JP6690329B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that gives a bonus to a player when a gaming ball hit on a gaming board enters a specific area.

JP, 2006-95235, A

  However, there is a need for further interest.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a player in playing a game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the present invention has a game area in which a game ball can flow down, and a game ball flowing down in the game area at a first position so as not to flow down to a specific flow path at a predetermined timing. A first state that can be positioned and a second state that allows the game ball located at the first position to flow out to the specific flow path, a means that can be changed, and a game ball A first ball which has a specific ball-in means for giving a beneficial advantage to the player based on entering a ball, and an operation means operable by the player, and which is established based on an operation on the operation means. Control means for changing the means from the first state to the second state on the basis of the satisfaction of a second condition that can be satisfied in connection with the satisfaction of the condition, and the means for controlling the means to change the means to the first condition. By changing from one state to the second state The game ball flowing down the specific flow path can be changed between a third state in which it is easy to enter the specific ball entering means and a fourth state in which it is more difficult to enter the specific ball entering means than the third state. Variable means, variable control means for variably controlling the variable means from a predetermined operation start timing in accordance with a variable pattern in which the variable timing is defined in advance, and the variable control means brings the variable means to the third state. And a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect for indicating that the change is possible, a predetermined period before a specific timing when the changing means is changed to the third state, and the control means. A first control in which the period in which the means is in the second state is the first period, and a second control in which the period is in the second state that is longer than the first control der is, the game machine, the special In the flow path game ball capable flows down state, the gaming ball a specific channel than a difficult state to flow down, it is possible to easily by viewing at least a portion of the specific channel to the player.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to position the game area where the game ball can flow down and the game ball flowing down the game area at the first position so as not to flow down to the specific flow path at a predetermined timing. A first state, and a second state in which the game ball located at the first position can be flown out to the specific flow path, and a variable means, and the game ball enters Related to the establishment of a first condition that is established based on an operation on the operation means that the player has an operation means that can be operated by the player Control means for changing the means from the first state to the second state based on the establishment of a second condition that can be satisfied, and the control means causes the means to change from the first state to the first state. Flows down the specific channel by being changed to two states A variable means that can change the game ball into a third state in which it is easy to enter the specific ball entering means and a fourth state in which it is more difficult to enter the specific ball entering means than the third state, and It shows that the variable means is variably controlled from a predetermined operation start timing in accordance with a variable pattern in which the variable timing is defined in advance, and that the variable control means changes the variable means to the third state. Suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a suggestive effect for executing the suggesting effect for a predetermined period before a specific timing at which the changing means is changed to the third state. a first control period as the two states is the first period, Ri executable der and a second control period to be the second state becomes longer second period than the first control, the game The machine has a game ball flowing through the specific flow path. In a possible state, the gaming ball a specific channel than a difficult state to flow down, it is possible to easily by viewing at least a portion of the specific channel to the player.

  As a result, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine. It is the front view which expanded the lower right area | region (III part in FIG. 2) of the game board 13 in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a case where the upper limit number of balls is stored in the storage device, and (b) is a release state of the first storage device, and a movable valve is in a guided state ((b)). It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the case where it was in a protruding state. (A) is a schematic diagram showing a case where the first storage device is in the released state and the movable valve is in the restricted state (buried state), and (b) is the first storage device in the stored state. FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a case where the second storage device is in a released state. (A) is a schematic diagram showing the operation of the storage valve solenoid when the first storage device is in the released state and the second storage device is in the stored state, and (b) is the schematic diagram showing the operation of the first storage device in the stored state. It is a schematic diagram which showed operation | movement of the storage valve solenoid when a 2nd storage device becomes a cancellation | release state. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and effective line setting of a display screen, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen. 6 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the operation of the second frame button (release button) and various devices. It is the timing chart which showed the point which sets the timing which operates a 2nd frame button (button for cancellation | release) in timing production (operation production). (A) is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the display content during the notice production performed in the round before the timing production (operation production) is executed, and (b) is a timing production (operation production). It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the display content inside. (A), (b) is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the display content in timing effect (operation effect). (A), (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents during timing effect (operation effect) executed during variable display of special symbols. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display content in the timing effect (operation effect) performed during the variable display of a special symbol. (A), (b) is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the jackpot confirmation display screen. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content which sets the display position of a display pointer based on the timing which can enter into a specific general entrance, and the music information performed by timing effect (operation effect). It is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents of a difficulty level selection screen for selecting the difficulty level executed in the first round of the jackpot game. FIG. 18A is a schematic diagram showing a shielding state of the cover member, and FIG. 18B is a schematic diagram showing a transparent state of the cover member. It is the block diagram which showed the electric constitution of the pachinko machine. (A) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM in the main controller, and (b) schematically shows a correspondence relationship between the first hit type counter C2 and the special jackpot type. It is a schematic diagram, (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the second random number counter C4 and the hit in the normal symbol. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal table. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the probability variation / time saving table, (b) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the opportunity table. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the movable valve operation scenario storage area, (b) is a schematic diagram which showed the content of the movable valve operation scenario table typically. It is a figure showing an outline of various counters. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a RAM in the main control device. FIG. (A) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM in the voice lamp control device, and (b) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a RAM in the voice lamp control device. It is a schematic diagram which showed the content of the movable valve operation scenario typically. It is a schematic diagram which showed the content of the music information storage area typically. It is the block diagram which showed the electric constitution of the display control device. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the display data table typically. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the transfer data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. 7 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is the flowchart which showed the special design fluctuation processing which is executed by MPU inside the main control control equipment. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol fluctuation start processing which is executed by MPU inside the main control control equipment. It is the flowchart which shows the starting winning a prize processing which is executed by the MPU inside the main control control equipment. 7 is a flowchart showing a prefetch process executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is the flowchart which showed the normal design fluctuation processing which is executed by the MPU inside the main control unit. 7 is a flowchart showing a through gate passage process executed by an MPU in the main control device. 6 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by an MPU in the main controller. 6 is a flowchart showing a startup process executed by an MPU in the main control device. 6 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is the flowchart which showed the big hit control processing which is executed by the MPU inside the main control unit. 6 is a flowchart showing a storage control process executed by an MPU in the main control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a storage valve operation process executed by an MPU in the main control device. 6 is a flowchart showing a movable valve control process executed by an MPU in the main controller. It is the flowchart which shows the winning a prize processing which is executed by the MPU inside the main control control equipment. It is the flowchart which showed the start-up process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the movable valve state command process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the storage device related process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a hit related process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which shows the big hit mid effect production processing which is executed by the MPU inside the audio lamp control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the ball passing monitoring process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the storage state monitoring process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the lamp output processing which is executed by the MPU inside the audio lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and effect process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the timing production setting processing which is executed by the MPU inside the audio lamp control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a jackpot timing effect preset process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device, and (b) is a normal timing effect executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is a flowchart showing a preset process. It is the flowchart which shows the timing production common setting processing which is executed by the MPU inside the audio lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the timing production correction processing which is executed by the MPU inside the audio lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the movable valve operation counter update process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a boot process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a V interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 7 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a stop type command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. (A) is a flowchart showing an opening command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a round number command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. . 7 is a flowchart showing ending command processing executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a back image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing an error command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 7 is a flowchart showing a display setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a pointer update process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 6 is a flowchart showing a normal image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a drawing process executed by an MPU in the display control device. It is the front view which expanded the lower right area | region (III part in FIG. 2) of the game board 13 in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 2nd embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which planarly viewed the 1st frame button and the 2nd frame button, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed the interlocking operation structure of the 1st frame button and the 2nd frame button. (A) is a schematic diagram showing a state where the first frame button is pressed in a released state in which the interlocking device is buried, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the first frame button in the interlocked state in which the interlocking device is projected. It is a schematic diagram showing a pressed state. It is the schematic diagram which showed the display content of the timing production (operation production) in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the modification of a 2nd embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram showing a state where a player operates the frame button unit, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing a configuration of the frame button unit. (A) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the frame button unit is operated (pressed) in a state in which the pressing operation of the second frame button of the frame button unit is restricted, and (b) is a schematic view of the frame button unit. FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the frame button unit is operated (pressed) in a state in which the pressing operation of the second frame button is released. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in another example of each embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in another example of each embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is provided in a lower right area of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10. 6 is a front view showing the inside of the board unit 700, FIG. 4 and FIG. 5 are schematic diagrams showing a ball flow inside the board unit 700, and FIG. 6 is a storage valve solenoid provided in the board unit 700. FIG. 7 is a schematic view showing the operation of FIG. 7, and FIG. 7 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape substantially the same as the outer frame 11 with respect to the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 that is openably and closably supported. To support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided serves as an opening / closing shaft. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A large number of nails, a game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, a first ball entrance 64, a second ball entrance 640, a through gate 67, a variable winning device 65, etc. can be attached to and detached from the front side. Be attached to. A ball game is performed by the ball flowing down on the front surface of the game board 13. In addition, in the inner frame 12, a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 19) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, a metal hinge 19 is attached to the left side in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the side provided with the hinge 19 serves as an opening / closing axis for the front frame 14 and the lower plate. The unit 15 is supported to be openable and closable on the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front surface side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with its front surface protruding and its upper surface opened, and prize balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to descend to the right in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a by the inclination.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change the light emission mode by lighting or blinking according to the change of the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect effect during the game. On the periphery of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED built therein. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as a production lamp such as a jackpot lamp, and when the jackpot or reach production is performed, each illumination portion 29 to 33 is turned on by turning on or blinking the built-in LED. Alternatively, it flashes to notify that the jackpot is in the midst of hitting, or that the reach is one step ahead of the jackpot. A display lamp 34 is provided at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). The display lamp 34 has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can display whether a prize ball is being paid out or when an error has occurred.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side illumination portion 32 so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a small window 35 is formed, and a pasting space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin plated with chrome is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more glitter.

  A ball rental operating unit 40 is arranged below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation unit 40 is operated in the state where bills, cards, etc. are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights to display the balance as a number as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a balance on the card or the like. To be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. It should be noted that the ball rental operation unit 40 is not required in a pachinko machine, which is a cash machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, but in this case, the ball rental operation unit 40 is used. It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of to make the parts configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  On the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed on the left side of the lower plate unit 15 in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. . On the other hand, on the right side of the lower plate unit 15, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is provided, and inside the operation handle 51, the ball firing unit 112a is driven. A touch sensor 51a for permitting the operation, a push button type stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is detected by a change in electric resistance. A variable resistor (not shown) is built in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the operation amount, depending on the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes as a result, and thereby the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  In the present embodiment, the configuration described above is used, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the main control device 110 and other control devices detect a game ball launched by the ball launch unit 112a, and a solenoid of the ball launch unit 112a. May be configured to detect that a game ball has been launched. Also, the number of detected game balls may be counted and stored until a process such as RAM clear is executed.

  Then, a first frame button (effect button) 22a is provided at the center of the lower plate unit 15, and a second frame button (release button) 22b is provided at the upper part of the lower plate. The first frame button 22a is operated by the player, for example, when the effect or background displayed on the third symbol display device 81 described later is changed, and the second frame button 22b is stored, for example, as described later. It is operated by the player when releasing the storage state of the devices (the first storage device 770 and the second storage device 771). In this way, by arranging a plurality of frame buttons (first frame button 22a, second frame button 22b) that can be operated by the player in the central portion and the left side of the pachinko machine 10, they can be arranged on the right side of the pachinko machine 10. Even when the provided operation handle 51 is being operated (the player is operating the operation handle with the right hand), the frame button can be easily operated.

  Further, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward is provided at the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. This ball-pulling lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens, The sphere falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "dollar box") placed below the lower plate 50 for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a large number of nails for guiding balls, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a general entrance 63, The first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12. The general ball entrance 63, the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and a game is played. It is fixed from the front side of the board 13 with wood screws or the like. Further, the central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front surface side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and at the inner position of the outer rail 62, a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in step 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer circumference of the front surface of the game board 13, and the front and rear surfaces are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area where a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area formed by partitioning the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 on the front surface of the game board 13 (where a starting opening or the like is provided and a shot ball is It is the area that flows down. In addition, the game area includes all areas in which the game ball that has passed through the return ball prevention member 68 flows down until it passes through the outlet 66 and the winning opening (ball entrance).

  In this pachinko machine 10, the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (the left side when viewed from the front of the game board 13) is formed as a left game area and the right side is formed as a right game area, and a game in which a ball is shot at the left game area (hereinafter, In the left-handed game, a game in which the ball is entered into the general entrance 63 or the first entrance 64 is performed, and a game in which the ball is shot aiming at the right game area (hereinafter referred to as right-handed game). In), the shot ball passes above the variable display device unit 80, and a game is played aiming at the board unit 700 provided in the right game area. In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this manner, the player is allowed to play a game (a left-handed game or a right-handed game) according to the game state, thereby suppressing the game from becoming monotonous. A detailed description of each board state 700 provided in each game state and the right game area will be described later.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the explanation of the game board 13 will be continued. The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 19) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent the situation where the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. To be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (the upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a force of a predetermined amount or more hits the return rubber 69 to generate momentum. Is attenuated and bounces back toward the central part. In addition, between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  In this pachinko machine 10, when a ball enters either the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, and the ball is a through gate (normal). When the ball passes through the entrance 67, an ordinary symbol (second symbol) is drawn. In the lottery of the special symbol which is performed for the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit, and it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. When it is done, the jackpot type is also determined. When it becomes a special jackpot, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a special game state, and the specific winning opening 65a that is normally closed is kept for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds or until 10 balls are won). ) It is opened, and the opening is repeated the number of times (the number of rounds) according to the jackpot type. As a result, a large number of balls are won in the specific winning port 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. As the jackpot type of special symbols, there are three types of "jackpot A" to "jackpot C", and after the special game state ends, as a value added after the jackpot ends, depending on the result of the jackpot game. Value (game value) is given to the player. The three types of “big hits A to C” are determined when a big hit is made in a lottery executed when a ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. It is a type of jackpot to be obtained, and a lottery (hereinafter referred to as a lottery for the first special symbol) executed when the ball enters the first inlet 64 is called a ball to the second inlet 640. The lottery (hereinafter, referred to as the second special symbol lottery) executed when the player has entered the ball is configured so that the proportions selected when the jackpot is won are different.

  When the special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, the variable display of the special symbol is started on the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds to 90 seconds) has passed, the lottery result The special symbol indicating is stopped and displayed. When the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entrances depends on the type of entrance. Each is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display ends in the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 remains, the next special symbol is drawn. , The variable display according to the lottery is started.

  On the other hand, in the lottery of the ordinary symbol performed for the passage of the ball in the through gate (ordinary ball entrance) 67, it is determined whether or not the ordinary symbol is hit. When the normal design hits, the second ball entrance 640 is changed by changing the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 to the open position for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second). It will be released. Note that, in the normal state, the electric accessory 640a is disposed at the closed position, so the second entrance 640 is closed. Therefore, in the case of winning the normal symbol, the ball easily enters the second entrance 640, and as a result, the special symbol is easily drawn.

  Further, when the normal symbol (second symbol) is drawn, the variable display of the normal symbol is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 1 second or 30 seconds) has passed, the lottery The normal pattern showing the result is stopped and displayed. When the sphere passes through the through gate (normal ball entrance) 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is reserved up to 4 times, and the number of reserved balls is the first symbol. While being displayed by the display device 37, it is also displayed on the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display ends on the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the through gate (normal entrance slot) 67 remains, the next ordinary symbol is selected and the lottery is performed. The variable display is started.

  As described above, three types of "big hit A" to "big hit C" are provided as special jackpot types. When the "big hit A" and the "big hit C" are reached, the special game state in which the number of rounds is 16 rounds (16 round big hit) is achieved. On the other hand, when the "big hit B" is reached, the number of rounds becomes a special game state of 8 rounds (eight round big hit). Moreover, when it becomes "big hit B" and "big hit C", it shifts to a high-probability state in which the big hit probability of the special symbol becomes high after the big hit ends (during the probability change of the special symbol). In the gaming state where the high probability state of the special symbol is given, the probability of hitting the normal symbol (second symbol) also increases, and the variation time of the normal symbol becomes short, that is, the second entrance 640 is attached. The electric accessory 640a to be opened is opened, and a state (time saving state) in which the ball can easily enter the second ball entrance 640 is also provided. The high probability state and the time saving state of this special symbol continue until the next big hit is won. On the other hand, when the "big hit A" is reached, only the above-mentioned time saving state is given after the big hit ends. In this case, the time saving state continues from the end of the jackpot until the fluctuation of the special symbol ends 100 times (until the 101st fluctuation starts).

  Here, "high probability state of the special symbol" is a state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is up, so-called "high probability state of the special symbol" (probably changed state of the special symbol), in other words, a special game state It is a game state where it is easy to move to (big hit). On the other hand, when it is not "high probability state of special symbol", it is called "low probability state of special symbol", this is a state where the jackpot probability is lower than the probability variation state of the special symbol, that is, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is normal. Indicates the state (normal state of special symbols). In addition, "the time saving state of the normal symbol" (high probability state of the normal symbol) means that the winning probability of the ordinary symbol is increased and the variation time of the second special symbol is shortened, and the lottery for the second special symbol is executed. It is an easy game state. On the other hand, when it is not "time saving state of normal symbol", it is called "normal state of ordinary symbol" (low probability state of ordinary symbol). Indicates that the winning probability is low.

  After that, the period during which the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot of the special symbol is called a probability variation period of the special symbol. In addition, the period during which the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol after the end of the special symbol jackpot is called the time saving period of the ordinary symbol.

  As described above, in the jackpot of the special symbol in the present embodiment, the number of rounds at the time of jackpot is changed according to the type of jackpot. On the other hand, the number of rounds may be common to all jackpot types (for example, all eight rounds). Further, for example, the period of the "normal symbol time saving state" may be changed according to the type of jackpot. In addition, instead of changing the period of being in the "time saving state of the normal symbol", the time to open the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 or the electric accessory is released at the time of one normal symbol. The number of times may be changed. Further, in the present embodiment, the type of jackpot determines the privilege to be given after the jackpot is finished. For example, after the jackpot is finished on the condition that the ball has passed a specific area (V winning switch) during the jackpot. You may make it give the probability change state of a special symbol and the time saving state of a normal symbol. Further, in the present embodiment, the probability change state of the special symbol is configured to continue until the next big hit is won, but like the time saving state of the normal symbol, the special symbol variation number after the big hit is a predetermined number of times ( Every time the fluctuation of the special symbol is started, the probability variation state of the special symbol continues only for a period of 100 times) or the special symbol changes from the probability variation state of the special symbol to the normal state of the special symbol (fall). It may be executed, and the probability variation state of the special symbol may be continued until the lottery is won. Further, the present embodiment, during the probability variation state of the special symbol, the time saving state of the normal symbol is given, but even during the probability variation state of the special symbol, the gaming state where the time saving state of the normal symbol is not given (so-called latent state Probably changed state) may be provided.

  The first symbol provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter, abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side in the front view of the game area (upper right side in FIG. 2). A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 is a display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a perform a variable display or a variation by indicating by a lighting state whether or not the lottery for the special symbol that is performed in association with the entry into the first entry slot 64 (starting winning) is in progress. As a stop symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is shown in a lighting state, or a ball entered into the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. Among them, the number of holding balls, which is the number of balls (holding balls) that have not been changed, is indicated by a lighting state.

  If the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the entry The number of times is reserved up to 4 times for each entrance, and the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In addition, in this embodiment, each of the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 is configured to be reserved up to four times, but the maximum number of reservations is limited to four. However, the number may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, it may be set to be held until the total number of balls entering a plurality of ball entrances reaches the upper limit number (for example, 8 times).

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds in a big hit, an error display, and the like. The LEDs 37a are configured so that the light emission colors of the respective LEDs (for example, red, green, and blue) are different, and by the combination of the light emission colors, various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 (high probability state of special symbols) with few LEDs. Or, it is possible to display normal patterns such as shortening of working hours. In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of fluctuation, but when it is a big hit, the big hit type (special symbol according to the big hits A to D). (First pattern) is shown.

  Further, in the game area, a plurality of general ball entrances 63 are provided in which a predetermined number (for example, 5) of balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the center of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. . In the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display corresponding to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (starting winning), the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a trigger. To be executed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol, the variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is performed.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of an 8-inch size liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114, which will be described later, so that, for example, three symbol columns of left, middle, and right are displayed. Is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main controller 110 is performed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. A corresponding decorative display is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81. Further, a plurality of liquid crystal displays may be provided as the third symbol display device 81, or the third symbol display device 81 may be movable. Here, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 8 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 8A is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 8B is a diagram exemplifying an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols with numbers "0" to "9". Each main symbol is formed by attaching numbers from "0" to "9" on the rear symbol consisting of a wooden box, of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are , A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) are attached to the front of the wooden box with an attached pattern imitating a character such as planer, furoshiki, helmet. An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached design, and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached design.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 11) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbol is aligned is performed. , The jackpot is configured to occur after the variable display is finished. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, the variable display in which the same main symbols are not arranged is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 8 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower parts, and the lower 2/3 is the main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed, other than that. 1/3 on the upper side is a sub-display area Ds for displaying the notice effect, the character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, center, and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed on the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers, and the variable symbols are scrolled from the top to the bottom to perform variable display. In particular, in the left symbol column Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in descending order, and in the middle symbol column Z2 and the right symbol column Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in ascending order.

  Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and in each game, the third symbol is stopped on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol column Z1, the right symbol column Z3, and the middle symbol column Z2. Is displayed. This stop display state is held for at least 1 second. In this way, by displaying the stopped third symbol for a certain period (1 second or more), whether or not the player is a combination of the third symbols corresponding to the jackpot (the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot). It is possible to suppress oversight. If a combination of big hit symbols (combination of the same main symbols in the present embodiment) is aligned on the activated line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a big hit moving image (opening effect) is displayed as a big hit.

  In addition, when the combination of the third symbols stopped and displayed is a combination corresponding to the disengagement and there is a holding ball, the variable display corresponding to the lottery based on the holding ball is started after the stop display for 1 second. . If there are a plurality of reserved balls, the lottery is performed based on the reserved ball corresponding to the oldest incoming ball in terms of time.

  On the other hand, in the state where there is no holding ball, if the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the deviation of the special symbol is stopped and displayed for 1 second, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues thereafter. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses or a new ball enters either the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses after the third symbol is stopped and displayed, a demonstration effect indicating that the game is not executed is displayed. It is rare for a player to shoot a ball continuously for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds), but there is no ball entering the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640. Yes, in many cases where the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds), the player quits the game, and the pachinko machine 10 is not playing the game at all. to cause. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed, it is determined that the player is not playing the game, and the demonstration effect is started. To do. Thereby, the player who is trying to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily determine whether or not the game is being performed based on the presence or absence of the display of the demonstration effect. On the other hand, if a new ball enters the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 before the predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses, it corresponds to the new entrance. The variable display of the third symbol is executed.

  The sub-display area Ds is horizontally provided above the main display area Dm, and is further divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Of these, the small area Ds1 displays the number of reserved balls that is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed among the balls that have entered the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640. The small areas Ds2 and Ds3 are areas for displaying the notice effect image. Further, the third symbol is displayed in the small area Ds3. Although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10, the type of the special symbol (either the first special symbol or the second special symbol) in which the lottery is likely to be executed depending on the game state is configured differently. In the main display area Dm, the variable display in the case where the special symbol lottery that is easy to perform in the current game state is executed is displayed. On the other hand, in the small area Ds3, the variable display when the lottery of the special symbol which is difficult to be performed in the current game state is performed is displayed.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 8B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, a total of three main symbols of the third symbol different from the main symbol displayed in the main display region Dm are displayed for the right small region Ds3. In the central small area Ds2, usually, a predetermined character 710 (in this embodiment, a boy with a hachimaki) performs a predetermined motion, sometimes performs a special motion different from the predetermined motion, or another character A notice production is performed by appearing.

  On the other hand, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 while the variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), and , When a ball enters the second entrance 640 while the variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol is being performed, the number of entered balls is respectively reserved up to 4 times, and the number of reserved balls is It is shown not only by the first symbol display device 37 but also by the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. Specifically, the symbol displayed on the upper half of the small area Ds1 (first reserved ball number symbol) indicates the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64, and the symbol displayed on the lower half (second symbol). The number of reserved balls) indicates the number of reserved balls for the second ball entrance 640. FIG. 8 exemplifies the case where four first reserved symbols are displayed and zero second retained symbols are displayed (the second reserved symbols are all blank).

  In the present embodiment, the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 are configured to be reserved up to four times, respectively, but the maximum number of reserved balls is four times. The number of times is not limited, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is a number on a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls for the maximum holding number, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in a lighting state.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the explanation will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 displays a variable display by indicating whether or not the lottery of the ordinary symbol, which is performed along with the ball passing through the through-gate (normal ball entrance) 67, is being executed by the lighting state. As a stop symbol after completion or variation, the normal symbol (second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the normal symbol is indicated by a lighting state.

  More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time the sphere passes through either the right or left through gate (normal entrance) 67, with a symbol of "○" as a normal symbol (second symbol) A variable display is performed in which the "x" symbol is alternately turned on. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, a symbol "○"), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 only for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in an operating state (opened), and as a result, a state in which a ball easily enters the second ball inlet 640. The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate (normal ball entrance) 67 is reserved up to 4 times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and also in the second symbol reserve lamp 84. Lights up and is displayed. Four of the second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  The variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, and the first symbol display device 37. Alternatively, a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the passage of the ball in the normal entrance 67 is not limited to the maximum number of reserved balls 4 times, as in the case of the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, but 3 times or less, or It may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may not be lit.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entrance 64 into which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. A lottery for special symbols is made in the main controller 110, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. In addition, the first ball entrance 64 is also one of the prize holes through which three balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters. This first ball entrance 64 is a case where a right hit game is performed when a ball is hit to the path on the left side in front view with respect to the variable display device unit 80 (a so-called left hit game is performed). It is configured so that it is easier to enter.

  On the other hand, a board unit 700 is arranged below the right side area of the game board area. This board surface unit includes a through gate (normal ball entrance) 67, a second ball entrance 640, a variable winning device 65, a specific general ball entrance 630, and a storage device (first storage device 770, second storage device). 771) is provided (see FIG. 3). A cover member 710 is provided in a part of the board unit 700 so that a specific flow path in the board unit 700 (flow path through which spheres stored in the storage device flow down) is difficult to see from the outside. It is configured.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 3, the board unit 700 arranged in the lower right area of the game board 13 will be described. FIG. 3 is an enlarged front view of the lower right area of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. 3, the board surface unit 700 includes an inflow port 700a that is opened upward so that a ball that has flowed down the right game area of the game board 13 can flow in, and a ball that flows in from the inflow port 700a. Of these, a flow that discharges the balls that have not entered the respective entrances (specific general entrance 630, second entrance 640, and specific winning opening 65a) provided in the board unit out of the board unit 700. It is a box-shaped unit body having an outlet 700b.

  In the board unit 700, a through gate (normal ball entrance) 67 is provided below the inflow port 700a, and most of the balls flowing into the board unit 700 from the inflow port 700a are through gates (normal ball entrance). Mouth 67. An electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is disposed below the through gate 67, and a ball flowing down the distribution channel 700d formed on the left side of the electric accessory 640a enters the ball. The variable winning device 65 and the base unit 760 are arranged at possible positions. Then, the specific general ball entrance 630 is arranged at a position where a ball flowing down the storage channel 700e formed on the upper surface of the base unit 760 can enter. When balls enter the specific general entrance 630, 15 prize balls, which are larger than those in the general entrance, are paid out.

  Next, various devices provided in the board unit 700 will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 10, the first flow path 641b and the second flow path 642b are provided as flow paths for guiding the ball to the second ball inlet 640. In order to flow the ball into the first flow path 641b. The first opening 641a and the second opening 642a for allowing the sphere to flow into the second flow path 642b are in an open state in which the sphere can be received, and a closed state in which the sphere is more difficult to receive than the open state. The electric accessory 640a is provided so as to be variable.

  Further, the electric accessory 640a is formed so that a sphere can flow down on the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a when the closed state, and the first opening 641a is formed on the upstream side of the flow path. It is configured to cover the second openings 642a on the downstream side. The electric accessory 640a is composed of a single plate-shaped member driven by a driving unit (a solenoid or the like) not shown. When the driving unit is changed to the open state, the first opening 641a and the second opening 641a are formed. When opening any of the openings 642a and changing the opening to a closed state, both the first opening 641a and the second opening 642a are closed. Further, the upper flow path of the electric accessory 640a has a downward slope such that the lower left direction in front view of the game board 13 is on the downstream side, whereby the right side of the electric accessory 640a (from the perspective of FIG. 3). The second opening 642a is arranged on the downstream side of the first opening 641a provided on the right side).

  Next, the opening / closing operation of the electric accessory 640a and the flow of the ball entering the second ball inlet 640 will be described by way of an example of a time saving state of a normal symbol in which the ball easily enters the second ball inlet 640. In the pachinko machine 10, in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol, the variation time of the ordinary symbol is set to 1 second (see FIG. 38), and the winning probability of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) is set to 75%. Then, as the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a in the time saving state of the normal symbol, the operation of 1 second open → 0.5 second close → 1 second open is executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the electric accessory 640a is a crank provided with a step in its substantially central portion such that the electric power accessory 640a is lower on the downstream side covering the second opening 642a than on the upstream side covering the first opening 641a. It is configured in a shape, and is configured such that it takes about 0.6 seconds for the sphere to reach from the upstream portion covering the first opening 641a to the downstream portion covering the second opening 642a. With such a configuration, the timing at which the ball has flown into the board unit 700 and has reached the upstream side of the electric accessory 640a flows into the first opening 641a as it is when the electric accessory 640a is in the open state. , And passes through the first flow path 641b and the combined flow path 641c to enter the second entrance 640. On the other hand, when the ball reaches the upstream side of the electric accessory 640a, when the electric accessory 640a is closed, the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a flows downward toward the downstream side (second opening 642a). Then, when the ball that has flowed down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a reaches the downstream side of the electric accessory 640a (the position that covers the second opening 642a) (that is, after the flow down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a, 0. After 6 seconds), the electric accessory 640a is performing the next opening operation, the sphere flows into the second opening 642a, passes through the second flow passage 642b and the joint flow passage 641c, and then enters the second ball inlet port. Enter 640.

  In this way, the plurality of flow paths (first flow path 641b, second flow path 642b) for guiding the sphere to the second ball entrance 640 are provided, and each opening for allowing the sphere to flow into the plurality of flow paths. A variable unit (electric accessory 640a) that changes the parts (the first opening 641a and the second opening 642a) between an open state in which the ball can flow and a closed state in which the ball is more difficult to flow than the open state. ) Is further provided, and each opening (first opening 641a, second opening 642a) for allowing the sphere to flow into the plurality of flow paths is located on the upstream side and the downstream side of the flow path through which the sphere can flow. Since the variable means (electric accessory 640a) is in the closed state, the sphere that could not flow into the opening on the upstream side (first opening 641a) is opened on the downstream side (second opening). It is possible to inflow from the portion 642a).

  In addition, the period (0.6 seconds) required for the ball to flow down from the upstream position where the electric accessory 640a covers the first opening 641a to the downstream position where the electric opening 642a covers the second opening 642a is the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a. Since it is designed to be longer than the closing interval period (0.5 seconds) executed during the first opening, the first opening is performed at the timing of the closing interval period even though the electric accessory 640a is in the opening operation. A sphere that has reached the portion 641a and could not flow into the first opening 641a can reliably flow into the second opening 642a.

  In addition, whether or not the period required for the ball to flow down from the upstream position that covers the first opening 641a to the downstream position that covers the second opening 642a (0.6 seconds) causes the electric accessory 640a to open. Since the design is designed to be longer than the variation time of the ordinary symbol (0.5 seconds during time saving), the first opening 641a will be reached during the variation of the ordinary symbol, and the first opening The ball that could not flow into the portion 641a can be flowed from the second opening 642a if the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is a hit. Therefore, in the game state in which the electric accessory 640a is easy to open (the time saving state of the normal symbol), the player can efficiently enter the ball into the second entrance 640 simply by performing a right-handed game. This allows the player to play the game with peace of mind.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10, the balls that have flowed in from the inlet 700a of the board unit 700 are configured to flow down toward the electric accessory 640a. Therefore, after the flows of the balls are aligned, the electric accessory 640a It is possible to guide the sphere toward the upstream side of. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a ball that does not enter the second ball inlet 640 occurs due to a ball that flows down the game board 13 directly falling on the downstream side of the electric accessory 640a.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the time required to roll from the position covering the first opening 641a to the position covering the second opening 642a is the interval period (0.5 seconds) during the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a. ), And because it is configured to be about 0.6 seconds, which is longer than the variation time (0.5 seconds) of the ordinary symbol (second symbol), not only during the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a, but also in the ordinary A ball launched in the right-handed game during the change of the symbol (second symbol) can also easily enter the second ball inlet 640.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 3, in the pachinko machine 10, the sphere that has flowed in from the first opening 641a enters the second ball inlet 640 with priority over the ball that has flowed in from the second opening 642a. Is configured. More specifically, the spheres that have flowed in from the first opening 641a or the second opening 642a merge and flow from the first opening 641a into the combined flow path 641c that causes the balls to flow down toward the second ball inlet 640. The first flow path 641b through which the spheres flow down is communicated in the directly upward direction, and the second flow path 642b through which the spheres that flow from the second opening 642a flow down is connected in the lateral direction. With this configuration, when a sphere flowing down the first flow path 641b and a sphere flowing down the second flow path 642b are generated at the same time, the first flow path 641b having a large kinetic energy (falling energy) is formed. The falling ball is preferentially guided to the second entrance 640. Therefore, it is possible to prevent sphere clogging from occurring in the combined flow channel 641c due to the sphere flowing down the first flow channel 641b and the sphere flowing down the second flow channel 642b. Furthermore, the spheres flowing in from the first opening 641a, which are more inflowing than the second opening 642a, can be smoothly inserted into the second ball entrance 640.

  The second flow channel 642b, which is set to have a lower priority for the downward flow of balls than the first flow channel 641b, has a length (35 mm in the present embodiment) capable of retaining a plurality of balls (three in the present embodiment). It is formed so as not to obstruct the inflow of the sphere into the second opening 642a even if the sphere flowing down the first flow path 641b delays the inflow of the sphere.

  In addition, as will be described later in detail, in the pachinko machine 10, since the time saving state of the normal symbol is reset during the big hit and the normal state is set, the electric accessory 640a is frequently opened during the big hit, It is possible to prevent a situation in which the ball does not reach the variable winning device 65 provided below the electric accessory 640a. In order to prevent the situation described above, the configuration of the game board 13 may be changed and the variable winning device 65 may be provided above the electric accessory 640a.

  The variable winning a prize device 65 is provided with a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the special symbol lottery performed by the main control device 110 is a big hit, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on after a predetermined time (variable time) has passed so that the big hit is stopped. While making it, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is shown. After that, the game state transitions to the special game state in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in the normal time. In this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

  Next, the base unit 760 arranged in the board unit 700 will be described. As shown in FIG. 3, the base unit 760 is disposed on the downstream side (outlet 700b side) of the board unit 700 so that the storage channel 700e is formed above and the out channel 700f is formed below. It is provided.

  The base unit 760 is provided with a first storage device 770 and a second storage device 771 as storage devices for storing the spheres flowing down the storage channel 700e, and the storage device has a maximum of five spheres. It is configured to be storable. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 9, the first storage device 770 and the second storage device 771 are based on the operation of the second frame button (release button) 22b provided in the pachinko machine 10, Each is controlled to change from a storage state in which the balls are stored at a predetermined time difference to a release state in which the storage state of the balls is released, and is set to 1 each time the player operates the second frame button (release button) 22b. It is configured to flow down the balls one by one.

  Further, on the storage channel 700e, a storage upper limit sensor S1 for detecting that the storage amount of the sphere has reached the upper limit, and a storage detection sensor S2 for detecting the presence or absence of the sphere in the storage state. It is provided. Since each of these sensors is formed by a non-contact detection type proximity sensor that replaces the presence information of the sphere to be detected with an electric signal by electromagnetic induction, the sensor is not damaged by the passage of the sphere.

  Note that the configuration is not limited to the configuration of this embodiment as long as the storage state of the sphere on the storage channel 700e can be grasped. For example, as a sensor for detecting the sphere, a capacitance type or an ultrasonic type is used. A proximity switch such as a photoelectric type or a magnetic type may be used, or a contact detection type switch such as a limit switch may be provided. Further, in order to grasp the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 700e, a sensor for detecting spheres corresponding to each sphere storage position (the position where the spheres shown in FIG. 3 are stored) is provided. A sensor may be provided so that the number of spheres flowing into the storage channel 700e and the number of spheres flowing out of the storage channel 700e can be counted, and the storage channel 700e can be provided with the difference. The number of stored balls may be grasped.

  Further, in the base unit 760, a guiding position (protruding position) for guiding the sphere that has flowed out of the storage channel 700e to the specific general entrance 630 and a regulation position for restricting the guidance to the specific general entrance 630. A movable valve 750 that can be changed to (buried position) is provided, and is variably controlled based on a predetermined operation pattern (operation scenario). A detailed description of the movable control of the movable valve 750 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the area of the board unit 700, which is covered with the cover member 710 (see FIG. 2), the cover member 710 emits light from the back surface side (the game board 13 side with respect to the cover member 710) to the cover member 710. Transmission lamps 227ba to 227be, which are light emitting means for irradiation, are provided. The transmission lamps 227ba to 227be irradiate the cover member 710 with light, so that the player can see the inside covered with the cover member 710 in a transparent state. As will be described in detail later, the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be are controlled to emit light when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the storage device is in the released state and the ball flows down). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from performing the releasing operation of the storage device while grasping the operation status of the movable valve 750 during the normal game in which the predetermined condition is not satisfied. Further, when the storage device is released and the ball flows down near the movable valve 750, the cover member 710 is in a transparent state, so that the player can visually recognize the situation where the ball flows down near the movable valve 750. You can

  In the pachinko machine 10 having the board unit 700 configured as described above, the ball reaches the movable valve 750 at the timing when the movable valve 750 is in the guiding state (closed state) in which the ball can be guided to the specific general entrance 630. As described above, by operating the second frame button (release button) 22b that changes the storage state of the storage device (the first storage device 770 and the second storage device 771) to the release state, the storage device (first storage device) The balls stored in the storage device 770 and the second storage device 771) can enter the specific general ball entrance 630. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to play the game while adjusting the timing of operating the second frame button (release button) 22b, and the player can be eager to participate in the game.

  Further, as will be described later in detail, in the present embodiment, the movable valve 750 is set to operate in various predetermined patterns, and among the operation contents, the movable valve 750 is in the inductive state (closed state). Most of the period is set as a period (0.1 seconds) in which only one sphere can be guided. Therefore, accuracy is required for the timing at which the balls stored in the storage device (the first storage device 770 and the second storage device 771) can be guided to the specific general entrance 630, so that the player is more motivated. Can be played.

  In the present embodiment, by operating the second frame button (release button) 22b, the balls stored in the storage device (the first storage device 770 and the second storage device 771) are specified one by one. Since it is configured so that it can flow down toward the mouth 630, the period in which only one sphere can be guided (0.1 seconds) is continuous as the period during which the movable valve 750 is in the guided state (closed state). Even if it is set as described above, it is stored in the storage device (first storage device 770 and second storage device 771) by operating the second frame button (release button) 22b at an appropriate timing. It is possible to allow all the balls to enter the specific general entrance 630. Therefore, the player can be actively involved in the game in order to obtain more prize balls. The detailed operation content (operation pattern) of the movable valve 750 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 9 and 23.

  Further, in the present embodiment, since the cover member 710 is provided as a shielding means for making it difficult for the player to grasp the operating condition of the movable valve 750, the second frame button is pressed while grasping the operating condition of the movable valve 750. It is possible to prevent the act of operating the (release button) 22b. In addition, the cover member 710 which is the shielding means is a half mirror so that the cover member 710 is switched to a transparent state in which the inside can be visually recognized based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition (for example, when the storage device is in the released state and the sphere flows down). Since it is configured, when the game ball flows down near the movable valve 750, the cover member 710 is switched to the transparent state. Therefore, the player can be informed of the flow-down situation of the ball flowing down near the movable valve 750.

  In the present embodiment, the cover member 710 as the shielding means is switched to the transmissive state by irradiating the cover member 710 with light (transmission lamp), but other configurations may be used. Well, for example, when the cover member 710 is configured to be movable so that the incident angle of the light emitted to the cover member 710 from the light emitting means (LED) that is constantly lit is switched, and the cover member 710 is located at a predetermined position. It may be configured such that only the inside is in a transparent state in which the inside is visible.

  Further, the movable valve 750 is made of a transparent resin material (for example, polycarbonate, ABS, etc.), the cover member 710 is made of a transparent color whose inside can be visually recognized, and the surface thereof is subjected to diffuse reflection of irradiated light (for example, , Texture treatment) may be applied. Accordingly, while the game is being executed in the pachinko machine 10, the light emitted from the decoration lamp 227a makes it difficult to visually recognize the inside of the cover member 710, and the pachinko machine 10 is powered off (that is, for decoration). The inside of the cover member 710 may be made visible when the lamp 227a is not lit. Thereby, even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, a store clerk can easily inspect the inside of the cover member 710.

  When such a configuration is used, a shield wall is provided to shield the cover member 710 from being irradiated with the light emitted from the decoration lamp 227a, and the shield wall can be changed between a shielded state and a non-shielded state. Should be provided. This allows the player to visually recognize the inside of the cover member 710 even while the game is being played. Further, similarly to the first embodiment, by providing a dedicated light emitting means (lamp) for irradiating the cover member 710 with light and performing light emission control on the light emitting means, the inside of the cover member 710 is controlled. May be switched between a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize (a state in which light is emitted) and a visible state (a state in which light is not emitted).

  Further, a movable member for decoration is provided on the cover member 710 whose inside is visible, and the operation of the movable member is controlled, so that the inside of the cover member 710 can be visually recognized (the movement of the decorative movable member is small. The state) and the state in which it is difficult to visually recognize the inside of the cover member 710 (the state in which the decorative movable member often operates) may be switched.

  Although details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 9 and 10, in the present embodiment, the timing for releasing the second frame button (release button) 22b is set based on the operation content of the movable valve 750, and The three-symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is configured to perform an effect display. As a result, by operating the second frame button (release button) 22b in accordance with the effect display executed on the third symbol display device 81, the player is provided with a privilege (a prize based on the entrance into the specific general entrance 630). It is possible to give a ball, and the player can participate in the game eagerly.

  Next, the flow of the ball hit in the right game area by the right hit game in the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 3.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the board surface unit 700 is arranged in the right side area of the pachinko machine 10, and by the arrangement of the nails provided above the inflow port 700a of the board surface unit 700, the right game area is achieved by the right hitting game. Approximately 95% (about 95 balls out of 100 balls) of the balls hit in the above are arranged so as to flow into the inflow port 700a of the board unit 700. In addition, among the balls hit by the right-handed game, balls that did not flow into the inlet 700a of the board unit 700 (about 5 shots out of 100 shots) are formed between the variable display device unit 80 and the board unit 700. The sphere flow path (see FIG. 2) thus created flows down toward the outlet 66.

  The flow of the spheres flowing into the inflow port 700a of the board unit 700 will be described with reference to FIG. Immediately below the inflow port 700a, nails Qa and Qb are provided so that the balls that have flowed into the inflow port can be laterally distributed at a ratio of about 1:14. The balls distributed to the right side of the nails Qa, Qb (about 90 balls out of 100 balls hit by the right-handed game) pass through the through gate 67, and then the upstream part of the electric accessory 640a (the first opening 641a Spheres that flow down to the covering position) and are distributed to the left side of the nails Qa and Qb (about 5 balls out of 100 balls hit by the right-handed game) pass through the first guide path 700c and the electric accessory 640a. To the downstream portion (second opening 642a) of the. It should be noted that the nails Qa and Qb also serve as adjustable adjusting means, and can adjust the nails to a desired ratio even if the proportion of the balls to be divided into left and right is changed due to collision of the balls or the like. As described above, the sphere that has flowed down to the upstream portion (the position that covers the first opening 641a) of the electric accessory 640a can flow into the first opening 641a or the second opening 642a. Since it flows down on 640a, it becomes easier to enter the second entrance 640 than the ball that flows down to the downstream portion (second opening 642a) of the electric accessory 640a. Therefore, by adjusting the nails Qa and Qb that are the adjusting means, it is possible to adjust the ratio of the ball hit by the right-handed game entering the second ball inlet 640.

  The ball that has reached the electric accessory 640a flows into the first opening 641a or the second opening 642a at the timing when the electric accessory 640a is opened, and enters the second ball entrance 640. On the other hand, the balls that have not flowed into the first opening 641a and the second opening 642a flow down from the downstream end of the electric accessory 640a to the distribution flow path 700d. In the distribution flow path 700d, there are a direction in which the sphere flows down toward the variable winning device 65 (a lower right direction in the viewpoint of FIG. 3) and a direction in which the sphere flows down toward a base unit 760 (a lower left direction in the viewpoint of FIG. 3). The nails Q1 to Q3 for distributing and the first adjusting member 701a are provided, and the ratio of the balls that have flowed into the distribution flow path 700d (about 95 balls out of 100 balls that have been hit by the right-handed game) is 9: 1. It is configured to be divided into a lower right direction and a lower left direction.

  Then, a ball that flows down the distribution channel 700d and flows down toward the base unit 760 (downward left in the viewpoint of FIG. 3) (about 10 balls out of 100 balls hit by a right-handed game) Of these, about 1/3 of the spheres flow into the storage channel 700e, and the remaining about 2/3 of the spheres flow into the out channel 700f.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured so that the balls struck out by the right-handed game flow into the storage channel 700e at a ratio of one sphere to about 30 spheres. That is, when the balls enter the specific general entrance 630, the number of prize balls to be paid out to the player is 15. Therefore, the electric symbol 640a tends to be in an open state in a time saving state of a normal symbol or variable. In the normal gaming state, which is not the jackpot gaming state in which the opening operation of the winning device 65 is executed, even if the game in which the ball is thrown into the specific general entrance 630 is entered, the ball is entered into the specific general entrance 630. The number of balls required to make a ball (about 30 balls) is greater than the number of prize balls (15 balls) paid out when a ball enters the specific general entrance 630, so the number of balls held does not increase. . Therefore, it is possible to suppress an illegal game in which a ball is inserted into the specific general entrance 630 in a state where the operation content of the movable valve 750 is illegally grasped in the normal game state or the movable valve 750 is broken. .

  In addition, in the present embodiment, since the frequency of the balls flowing into the storage channel 700e is suppressed by using the above-mentioned board surface configuration, the jackpot state in which the opening operation of the variable winning a prize device 65 is performed, and the second winning. In the normal game state other than the time saving state (normal time saving state of the normal pattern) in which the ball easily enters the ball opening 640, the number of balls to be held does not increase even if a right-handed game is performed, but the storage channel 700e It may be possible to increase the frequency of inflow of the ball into and to facilitate the game of entering the ball in the specific general ball entrance 630 (the game of operating the second frame button (release button) 22b).

  Even in such a case, by covering the movable valve 750 with the cover member 710 as in the present embodiment, it becomes difficult to grasp the operation status of the movable valve 750, and the number of balls held increases in the normal gaming state. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the ball that has flown down the electric accessory 640a in the closed state can flow into the storage channel 700e, so the electric accessory 640a is in the open state. In the time-saving state of the easy ordinary pattern, it becomes difficult for the sphere to flow into the storage channel 700e, and in the jackpot gaming state where the electric accessory 640a is unlikely to be in the open state, the sphere easily flows into the storage channel 700e. Therefore, it is possible to change the expectation of the ball entering the specific general entrance 630 according to the game state, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

  In addition, the sphere that has flowed down the distribution channel 700d is configured to be distributed to either the lower right direction in which the variable winning device 65 is arranged or the lower left direction in which the specific general ball entrance 630 is arranged. Therefore, even if the distribution ratio of the spheres flowing down the distribution flow path 700d varies depending on the individual difference of the pachinko machine 10 and the installation situation, it is possible to prevent the player from playing an extremely disadvantageous game. Furthermore, by changing the specifications (arrangement) of the nails Q1 to Q3 and the first adjusting member 701a provided in the distribution flow path 700d, the balls can be efficiently put into the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game of the pachinko machine 10. A ball-type game specification and a ball type that easily enters the specific general ball entrance 630 during a jackpot game (that is, a ball is easily stored in the storage device (first storage device 770, second storage device 771)) And can be provided to the player, and the player can select the pachinko machine 10 to play the game based on his skill.

  Next, the operation of the storage device (the first storage device 770 and the second storage device 771) and the movable valve 750 provided in the base unit 760 and the ball flow will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 to 6. FIG. 4A is a diagram schematically showing a state where the upper limit number of five spheres is stored in the storage channel 700e, and FIG. 4B is a first storage device. It is the figure which showed typically the case where the movable valve 750 was in the induction | guidance | derivation state (protrusion state) in 770 a releasing state. FIG. 5A is a diagram schematically showing a case where the first storage device 770 is in the released state and the movable valve 750 is in the restricted state (buried state). FIG. 5B is a schematic diagram schematically showing a case where the first storage device 770 is in the storage state and the second storage device 771 is in the release state. FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the operation mechanism of the first storage valve 770a of the first storage device 770 and the second storage valve 771a of the second storage device 771, and FIG. It is a figure which shows operation | movement of the storage valve solenoid 770b when the 1st storage device 770 becomes a release state and the 2nd storage device 771 becomes a storage state, and FIG. It is a figure which shows operation | movement of the storage valve solenoid 770b when the storage device 771 becomes a releasing state.

  As shown in FIG. 4 (a), the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a are provided so as to have an interval between which one sphere can be stored, and the storage device (the first storage device 770 and In the state of FIG. 4A in which the upper limit number (5) of balls are stored in the second storage device 771), the first storage device 770 (first storage valve 770a) stores one ball, The second storage device 771 (second storage valve 771a) is in a state of storing four balls. In such a state, the new sphere that has flowed down toward the storage channel 700e has its flow direction changed by the sphere stored in the storage channel 700e, and the new sphere that is provided below the base unit 760. It flows down toward the flow path 700f and flows out of the board unit 700 through the out flow path 700f.

  A first ball passage sensor S3 for detecting passage of the sphere is provided in a region where the sphere flows down when the storage flow channel 700e is in the flow-down destination, that is, when the first storage valve 770a is in the released state. A second ball passage sensor S4 for detecting the passage of a sphere is provided in a region downstream of the region where the first sphere passage sensor S3 is provided. In the present embodiment, the first storage device 770 is in the released state based on the detection results of the first ball passage sensor S3 and the second ball passage sensor S4, and the command indicating the ball entering the specific general ball entrance 630. The period from when the specific storage area (specific general entrance 630 or the second ball passage sensor S4) passes is configured to be measurable, and the first storage device 770 is released based on the measurement result. It is configured to be able to correct the content of the effect (start timing of the effect, effect period, and effect content) that is executed after the state is reached (after the first ball passage sensor S3 detects the ball passage).

  Here, the ball flowing down the game area of the pachinko machine 10 has a flow-down period in which it flows down a specific section according to the installation state (tilt) of the pachinko machine 10, the outside air environment (temperature, humidity), and the dirt of the ball. different. Therefore, in the case of performing an effect for the falling of a ball, if a specific effect is executed based on a predetermined falling period, an error will occur between the result of that effect and the actual result of the falling of the ball. There was a problem that it ended up. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the contents of the effect on the falling of the ball can be corrected.

  As a result, the second frame button (for releasing) The notification timing of the effect for notifying the timing of operating the button 22b can be corrected based on the actual falling period of the ball, and execution of the effect that gives the player a feeling of strangeness can be suppressed. .

  In addition to the effect used in the present embodiment, for example, the sphere has passed a predetermined position (for example, the first ball passage sensor S3), the sphere has a specific position (for example, a specific general entrance). 630) is executed for a predetermined period of time, and when a result effect indicating the passing result of the ball is executed after the fanning effect is performed for a predetermined period, the period of the fanning effect is actually the ball passing period. It is possible to make a correction based on this, and it is possible to suppress the execution of an effect that gives the player a feeling of strangeness.

  Specifically, in the case of performing a production that satisfies the index set in multiple stages toward the final stage as a stirrup production, and performing a production of whether or not the final stage is reached as a result production, a plurality of By satisfying each of the indicators set in stages and changing the timing, or by changing the start timing of the fanning effect, the result effecting may be executed even if the fanning effect is in the middle, or the fanning effect It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the execution of the result effect is waited in the state where the final stage has been reached.

  In addition to the above-described first ball passage sensor S3 or second ball passage sensor S4, the detection results of the storage upper limit sensor S1 and the storage detection sensor S2 are used to determine the inside of the board unit 700 (particularly, the storage channel 700e). Alternatively, it may be configured to determine whether a ball clogging or a cheating act is being performed.

  The first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a that store the balls on the storage channel 700e have the second frame button (release button) 22b (see FIG. 1) provided on the pachinko machine 10. By operating (pressing) and driving the storage valve solenoid 770b (see FIG. 19), drive control is performed so that the balls stored in the storage channel 700e flow down one by one. The details of the mechanism for operating the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a by driving the storage valve solenoid 770b (see FIG. 19) will be described later with reference to FIG. Details of the drive control contents of the 770a and the second storage valve 771a will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Here, when the second frame button (release button) 22b (see FIG. 1) is operated in the state shown in FIG. 4A, first, the first storage valve 770a is in the released state, and the first storage valve 770a The sphere stored between the second storage valve 771a and the second storage valve 771a passes over the released first storage valve 770a and flows downward (see FIG. 4B). The sphere stored in the storage channel 700e is regulated from flowing down in the downstream direction by the second storage valve 771a in the storage state, so that only one sphere is stored in the storage channel 700e. It will flow downstream.

  Then, when the sphere flows down from the storage channel 700e with the movable valve 750 protruding (induction state), as shown in FIG. 4B, the movable valve 750 and the second adjusting member are provided. It flows down on 701b and enters the specific general entrance 630 (see FIG. 4 (b)). On the other hand, when the movable valve 750 is buried (restricted state) and a sphere flows down from the storage channel 700e, it enters the specific general entrance 630 as shown in FIG. 5 (a). It flows out of the board surface unit 700 from the outlet 700b without making a ball.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the player operates the operation means (the second frame button (release button) 22b) (presses) to release the storage of the balls by the storage device. The player can determine the timing to release the storage of the balls by the storage device. In addition, the movable valve 750 is configured to variably operate in a protruding state (allowable state) and a buried state (restricted state) according to a predetermined operation pattern. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the ball enters the specific general entrance 630 based on the timing at which the player operates the operation means (the second frame button (release button) 22b). In contrast, it becomes possible to operate the operation means eagerly, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

  When the player operates (presses) the second frame button (release button) 22b and the first storage valve 770a is in the release state for a predetermined time (1 second in the present embodiment), the next The first storage valve 770a is closed and the second storage valve 771a is released (see FIG. 5B). In this state, the sphere stored in the storage channel 700e by the second storage valve 771a flows down to a position where the sphere contacts the first storage valve 770a. Then, after a predetermined period has elapsed (0.5 seconds after the second storage valve 771a is in the released state in the present embodiment), the second storage valve 771a is in the closed state, and the state shown in FIG. Transition to.

  That is, in the state shown in FIG. 5B, in a state where the balls (4 pieces) stored in the storage channel 700e by the second storage valve 771a flow down to the state where they are stored by the first storage valve 770a, The second storage valve 771a is changed from the released state (buried state) to the closed state (projected state). Here, in the present embodiment, since the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a are provided with a space for one sphere (about 11 mm), the second storage valve 771a is the first storage valve. Among the four spheres stored (blocked) by the valve 770a, it projects to a position between the most downstream sphere and the second most downstream sphere. Therefore, the protruding operation of the second storage valve 771a can be smoothly performed.

  In the storage channel 700e, a region where the sphere is stored in a state where the second storage valve 771a is projected (that is, a position from the position where the second storage valve 771a projects to the upstream end of the storage channel 700e). ) Is longer than the distance (about 47 mm) obtained by adding the thickness of the second storage valve 771a (horizontal direction from the viewpoint of FIG. 5B) (about 3 mm) to four balls (about 44 mm), The distance is shorter than five (about 55 mm) (50 mm in this embodiment).

  With this configuration, when the second storage valve 771a projects, even if the sphere retreats on the storage channel 700e by the thickness of the second storage valve 771a, it is stored in the storage channel 700e. It is possible to prevent the ball from overflowing from the upstream end of the storage channel 700e due to the protruding operation of the second storage valve 771a. Further, it is possible to prevent the sixth ball from being stored in the storage channel 700e in the state where the second storage valve 771a is released (buried state). In order to prevent the spheres stored in the storage channel 700e from overflowing from the upstream end of the storage channel 700e due to the operation of each storage valve, the spheres downstream from the upstream end of the storage channel 700e are suppressed. You may provide the step which becomes low in the side. As a result, it is possible to prevent the balls stored in the storage channel 700e from overflowing from the upstream end of the storage channel 700e due to the operation of each storage valve.

  Next, a storage valve solenoid 770b for electrically driving the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6A is a schematic diagram schematically showing a state where the storage valve solenoid 770b is turned on in the positive direction, and FIG. 6B is a schematic diagram showing a state where the storage valve solenoid 770b is turned on in the negative direction. It is the schematic diagram shown. In the present embodiment, a plurality of variable members (first storage valve 770a and second storage valve 771a) are variably operated using one electric drive source (storage valve solenoid 770b). Specifically, the storage valve solenoid 770b is a two-way holding self-holding solenoid.

  This two-way holding type self-holding solenoid combines an open frame solenoid with a permanent magnet, instantly energizes the coil to attract the plunger, and holds the position after attraction with the permanent magnet. A self-holding solenoid that does not need to be energized to hold the state after attraction, in which coils are provided in the positive and negative directions centering around a permanent magnet, and by energizing each coil, the plunger is moved in the positive or negative direction. Is a solenoid that is configured to be attracted to and held in a state after the attraction using a permanent magnet. With this, one solenoid is used to maintain the three states of the state in which the plunger is attracted in the positive direction, the state in which the plunger is attracted in the negative direction, and the initial state in which the plunger is not attracted in any of the positive and negative directions. You can

  Then, in the state where the reservoir valve solenoid 770b attracts the plunger in the forward direction (the state where the reservoir valve solenoid 770b is turned on in the forward direction), the first reservoir valve 770a is opened (as shown in FIG. 6A). When the plunger is attracted in the negative direction (the storage valve solenoid 770b is turned on in the negative direction), the second storage valve 771a is opened (as shown in FIG. 6B). It is changed to the (release) state. Further, when the storage valve solenoid 770b is not turned on in either the positive or negative direction (OFF state), both the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a are changed to the closed (non-released) state. Is configured.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 6 (a), the first storage valve 770a and the storage valve solenoid 770b are combined by the first transmission means for transmitting the operation of the storage valve solenoid 770b to the first storage valve 770a. There is. This first transmission means has three gears and is attached to the forward end of the plunger of the storage valve solenoid 770b. In addition, the second storage valve 771a has its end portion assembled to the negative-side tip portion of the plunger.

  Here, when the storage valve solenoid 770b is turned on in the forward direction, the gear provided in the first transmission means rotates in accordance with the operation of the plunger sucked in the forward direction, and the result of the rotation of the gear is Based on this, the first storage valve 770a provided on the terminal side of the first transmission means (the side connected to the first storage valve 770a) is variably operated to the released (open) state, and the second storage valve 771a is set in the forward direction. According to the operation of the plunger sucked to the side, the tip portion thereof projects above the storage channel 700e and is variably operated in the closed (non-released) state (see FIG. 6A).

  On the other hand, when the storage valve solenoid 770b is turned on in the negative direction, the first storage valve 770a is closed (not released) based on the operation of the plunger protruding in the negative direction, as shown in FIG. 6B. The second storage valve 771a is variably operated to the released (open) state. Although illustration is omitted, when the plunger of the storage valve solenoid 770b is not attracted in either the positive direction or the negative direction (normal state), both the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a are closed ( It is variably operated so as to be in the (unreleased) state.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the plurality of variable members (the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a) are variably operated by only one electric drive source (storage valve solenoid 770b). Therefore, the space for installing the electrical drive source can be reduced, and the space of the device can be saved. Further, by saving the space of the device, it is possible to install decoration members and devices related to the game using the empty space, and it is possible to enhance the effect of production.

  Further, in the present embodiment, no matter which state the storage valve solenoid 770b is in, neither the first storage valve 770a nor the second storage valve 771a is in the open (release) state, so the storage valve solenoid 770b is Even if a failure occurs and a malfunction occurs, it is possible to reliably prevent the sphere from continuing to pass through the storage channel 700e. Further, since the configuration is such that only one electric drive source (reservoir valve solenoid 770b) is variably operated, when the balls stored in the storage channel 700e are flowed down toward the specific general ball entrance 630 one by one. The variable operation control is performed only on the storage valve solenoid 770b. The load can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the plurality of variable members (the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a) are moved according to the moving direction of the moving body (plunger) driven by one electric drive source (storage valve solenoid 770b). Although a configuration for variably operating is used, another configuration may be used as long as it variably operates a plurality of variable members by using one electric drive source. For example, stepping as an electric drive source is possible. A motor may be used so that the plurality of variable members are variably operated at a predetermined timing corresponding to the number of rotations (the number of steps) of the motor.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a configuration in which the plurality of variable members (the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a) are variably operated by only one electric drive source (storage valve solenoid 770b) is used. An electric drive source may be provided for each variable member. In addition, in the present embodiment, the configuration for variably operating the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a is different, but the same variable operating configuration may be used. In addition, in the present embodiment, the variable operation control is performed to cause the balls stored in the storage channel 700e to flow down toward the specific general ball entrance 630 one by one, but other than that. A configuration may be used. For example, by continuously pressing the second frame button (release button) 22b for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second), it is possible to release (open) the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a at the same time. Operation control may be executed. Thereby, when performing the normal operation on the second frame button (release button) 22b, the variable operation control is executed for each storage valve so that one sphere flows out from the storage channel 700e, When the long press operation is performed on the second frame button (release button) 22b, the variable operation control is executed so that at least two balls stored in the storage channel 700e flow out. Therefore, the number or timing of the balls flowing out from the storage channel 700e can be varied depending on the operation content of the player with respect to the second frame button (release button) 22b, and the player can play the game enthusiastically. Can be made.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 9, regarding the operation control of the first storage device 770 and the second storage device 771 and the flow of the opening / closing operation of the movable valve 750 when the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated. explain. FIG. 6 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the operation of the second frame button (release button) 22b and various devices.

  As shown in FIG. 9, when the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated in the present embodiment, first, the first storage valve 770a of the first storage device 770 is variably controlled for 1 second to a release (open) state. Then, the state shown in FIG. In this state, the balls stored between the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a flow down from the storage channel 700e. Here, it takes about 0.5 seconds for the sphere that flows down when the first storage valve 770a is in the released (open) state to reach the movable valve 750. Whether or not the ball is guided to the specific general entrance 630 is determined by the operating state of the movable valve about 0.5 second after the release (open) state. In the operation example shown in FIG. 9, the second frame button (release button) 22b is first operated to change the first storage device 770 (first storage valve 770a) to the release (open) state. As shown in FIG. 9D, the operation state of the movable valve 750 after 5 seconds is in the open state (restricted state), so the ball does not enter the specific general entrance 630 and the board unit It flows down from the outlet 700b of 700 to the outside of the board unit 700.

  As shown in FIG. 9A, once the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated, variable control for a total of 2 seconds is executed as shown in FIGS. 9B and 9C. While the variable control is being executed, the operation of the next second frame button (release button) 22b is not accepted. Therefore, the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated. When the variable control of each storage device is executed, an operation invalid period during which the operation of the second frame button (release button) 22b is not accepted is set for about 2 seconds after that. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the next variable control from being started while the variable control of each storage device is being executed.

  When 1 second elapses after the first storage device 770 (first storage valve 770a) is in the release (open) state, the first storage device 770 (first storage valve 770a) is in the non-release (closed) state. Is variably controlled (FIG. 9 (b)), and after 0.5 seconds from that point, the second storage device 771 (second storage valve 771a) is variably controlled to the released (open) state (FIG. 9B). 9 (c)). Then, the released (opened) state of the second storage device 771 (second storage valve 771a) is continued for 0.5 seconds from that point, and as shown in FIG. 5 (b) described above, the second storage device 771 ( A period is provided in which the balls stored by the second storage valve 771a) are allowed to flow down to a position where they are in contact with the first storage valve 770a of the first storage device 770 (FIG. 9 (c)).

  That is, in the present embodiment, by operating the second frame button (release button) 22b, one sphere is made to flow down toward the movable valve 750, and further, the second frame button (release button). The button 22b is configured to execute the releasing operation of the storage device only once every two seconds at the shortest. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10, the ball cannot be inserted into the specific general entrance 630 unless the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated (pressed) at a timely timing, and the second frame button ( Operation accuracy of the release button) 22b is required. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a timing effect (operation effect) that suggests the timing of operating the second frame button (release button) 22b is configured to be executed by the third symbol display device 81. By operating the second frame button (release button) 22b in accordance with the timing effect (operation effect), the ball can be easily made to enter the specific general entrance 630. There is. This allows the player to motivate the second frame button (release button) 22b.

  In FIG. 9, when the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated to change the first storage device 770 (first storage valve 770a) to the release (open) state again, the operation timing is 0. Since the movable valve 750e is closed (guided) after 5 seconds, the sphere flowing down toward the movable valve 750 by this operation is guided to the specific general ball entrance 630 by the movable valve 750 in the closed (guided) state. To be done.

  The movable valve 750 is always variably controlled according to a predetermined rule based on the power supply of the pachinko machine 10. The variable control content is defined by combining a plurality of operation scenarios (see FIG. 23A) having different operation (variable) patterns, as described later. By operating the second frame button (release button) 22b so that the ball reaches the movable valve 750 at the timing when the movable valve 750 that is variably controlled based on the operation scenario is closed (guided) in this way. , The ball is guided to the specific general entrance 630.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 10 to 17, a timing effect (operation effect) executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, the spheres stored in the storage device (first storage device 770, second storage device 771) are moved toward the movable valve 750 based on the operation on the second frame button (release button) 22b. It is designed to flow down. Then, when the ball arrives at the movable valve 750, when the movable valve 750 is in the open (restricted) state, the ball is restricted from entering the specific general ball entrance 630, and when it is in the closed (guided) state. It is configured to guide the ball entering the specific general ball entrance 630.

  The period in which the movable valve 750 is in the closed (induction) state is set to a short period (for example, 0.1 seconds), and the player randomly operates the second frame button (release button) 22b. Even in this case, it is difficult to make the balls stored in the storage device (the first storage device 770, the second storage device 771) enter the specific general ball entrance 630. Here, in the present embodiment, a timing effect (operation effect) is executed as an effect for notifying the timing of operating the second frame button (release button) 22b. By operating the second frame button (release button) 22b according to the effect contents of this timing effect (operation effect), the player can efficiently cause the ball to enter the specific general entrance 630. Become.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 10, a method for setting the timing at which the player operates the second frame button (release button) 22b in the above-described timing effect (operation effect) will be described. FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing points where the timing for operating the second frame button (release button) 22b is set in the timing effect (operation effect). As described above, the movable valve 750 is configured to be constantly variably controlled according to a predetermined rule, and the storage channel based on the operation of the second frame button (release button) 22b. The sphere flowing down from 700e (see FIG. 3) toward the movable valve 750 is configured to reach the movable valve 750 after a falling period of about 0.5 seconds.

  In the present embodiment, the variable control content of the movable valve 750 is read in advance, the point where the movable valve 750 is in the closed (guided) state is specified (FIG. 10 (a)), and the ball down period (0.5 seconds) from that point. The point obtained by subtracting () is settable as a possible entrance timing at which the ball can enter the specific general entrance 630 (FIG. 10B). In this way, by setting the timing at which the player can enter the ball and executing an effect of operating the second frame button (release button) 22b in accordance with the timing, the player can play the second frame button ( A ball can be inserted into the specific general entrance 630 simply by operating the release button) 22b. Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect capable of giving an advantageous privilege (prize ball) to the player, and it is possible to cause the player to participate in the game eagerly.

  In addition, as described above, the possible entrance timing set as the timing at which the movable ball 750 can enter the specific general entrance is 0.5 seconds before the timing at which the movable valve 750 is in the guiding state. Here, most of the period in which the movable valve 750 is in the inductive state is 0.1 second, so during the period when the ball entry possible timing is set, the operation of the corresponding movable valve 750 is more likely than when the operation of the corresponding movable valve 750 is started. It will be the previous period. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to notice that the timing effect executed based on the ball entry possible timing is set based on the operation content of the movable valve 750.

  Further, in the present embodiment, since the movable valve 750 is operated based on a plurality of operation scenarios, the interval at which the movable valve 750 is in the induction state varies. Therefore, even if, by any chance, the operation of the movable valve 750 that is executed before the operation of the movable valve 750 that is referred to when setting the entry possible timing and the entry possible timing match, The operating status of the movable valve 750 cannot be grasped based on this. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to notice that the timing effect executed based on the ball entry possible timing is set based on the operation content of the movable valve 750.

  In addition, although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, when the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated and the first storage device 770 is in the release (open) state, specifically, the first When the storage device 770 is released (opened) and the first ball passage sensor S3 detects a sphere that has flowed out of the storage channel 700e, the transmission lamp 227b is turned on. That is, when the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated at a timing when the ball can enter the specific general entrance 630, the ball flowing out from the storage channel 700e is the first ball. The interior of the cover member 710 becomes visible at the timing of passing through the passage sensor S3 (timing 0.1 seconds after the second frame button 22b is operated). Here, since most of the period in which the movable valve 750 is in the guiding state is 0.1 second, the timing at which the inside of the cover member 710 can be visually recognized is the movable target for which the entry possible timing is set. This is a period before the operation of the valve 750 is started. As a result, the operating condition of the movable valve 750 is not grasped based on the timing when the inside of the cover member 710 becomes visible.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11 to 17 described later, a display pointer that prompts the third symbol display device 81 to operate the second frame button (release button) 22b as a timing effect (operation effect). Is moved and displayed, and by operating the second frame button (release button) 22b at the timing when the display pointer reaches a specific position, the above-described entry possible timing and the second frame button (release button) 22b The effect that matches the operation timing of is executed. Next, the content of the timing effect (operation effect) used in this embodiment will be described.

  First, the contents of the timing effect (operation effect) executed during the big hit will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12. FIG. 11A is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display content during the notice effect executed in the round before the timing effect (operation effect) is executed, and FIGS. (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display content during a timing effect (operation effect). In addition, in each drawing, a schematic diagram showing the display content of the third symbol display device 81, and an operation state with respect to the operation means (first frame button (production button) 22a and second frame button (release button) 22b). The display contents of the third symbol display device 81, which changes based on the operation of the operation means, will be described with reference to the schematic diagram shown.

  As shown in FIG. 11, on the third symbol display device 81, a round number display section 714 that displays the current round number is displayed in the upper left of the screen, and in the sub-display area Ds2, the number of balls acquired during the jackpot is suggested. The acquisition display is executed, and in the sub-display area Ds3, the display "Aim right" is displayed on the guide display unit that guides the game method. Then, the acquired number display mode 718 for indicating the number of balls obtained based on the fact that the balls have won the specific winning opening 65a is displayed as "15" indicating the number of winning balls of the specific winning opening 65a. This acquisition number display mode 718 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the winning of the ball to the specific winning opening 65a, then is moved and displayed toward the sub display area Ds2, and finally, the sub display area. It is added as an acquisition display of Ds2.

  At the center of the screen, a notice display for notifying the player that the timing effect (operation effect) will start from the next round and a guide display for notifying the game nature of the timing effect (operation effect) are executed. . Then, on the lower side of the screen, an effect area used for timing effect (operation effect) is displayed. In this effect area, a left button display mode 715 with "left" attached corresponding to the second frame button (release button) 22b and "middle" corresponding to the first frame button (effect button) 22a And a middle button display mode 716 are displayed, and sub display regions Ds4 and Ds5 in which a display pointer 719 (see FIG. 11B) is displayed are provided corresponding to the respective button display modes. .

  The sub-display areas Ds4 and Ds5 are areas in which a plurality of display pointers 719 are scrolled and displayed from right to left, which will be described later with reference to FIG. 11B, and a display mode in which the display pointer 719 indicates an operation timing. By operating the operation means (the first frame button (effect button) 22a or the second frame button (release button) 22b) at a timing that coincides with the bar display section 717, the success effect (FIG. 11B described later). )) Is executed. Further, when the operation means is operated at the timing when the display pointer 719 does not match the bar display portion 717, the failure effect (see FIG. 12B described later) is executed.

  The timing at which the display pointer 719 coincides with the bar display portion 717 in the sub-display area Ds4 corresponding to the second frame button (release button) 22b is the entrance possible timing described above with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 11A, while the notice effect is being executed, the characters “standby” are scrolled and displayed from right to left in the sub display areas Ds4 and Ds5.

  As described above, in the timing effect (operation effect) according to the present embodiment, an effect that causes the player to operate the first frame button (effect button) 22a and the second frame button (release button) 22b is executed. It With this configuration, the number of times the player performs the button operation can be increased and the effect of the effect can be enhanced, as compared with the case of performing the effect of operating only the second frame button (release button) 22b. You can

  Next, the display content of the timing effect (operation effect) during the big hit will be described with reference to FIG. When the timing effect (operation effect) is executed, the display pointer 719 is scroll-displayed in the sub-display areas Ds4 and Ds5, and at the timing when the display pointer 719a matches the bar display portion 717, the second frame button (for release) is displayed. When the button) 22b is operated, the characters "good" are displayed as the result display mode 720 in the center of the screen, and the operation of the second frame button (release button) 22b changes the display mode of the left button display mode 715. It is displayed by changing it. In this case, as the timing effect (operation effect), since the second frame button 22b for releasing the storage device is operated at a timing when the ball can enter, the ball flowing down from the storage device based on the operation is the specific general entrance. He will enter 630.

  In the state shown in FIG. 12A, when the display pointer 719c displayed in the sub display area Ds5 corresponding to the first frame button (production button) 22a matches the first frame button (production). Player button 22a is operated, and by operating the first frame button (effect button) 22a at this timing, the prize ball obtained by the ball entering the specific general entrance 630 The specific acquisition number display mode 721 indicating the number is displayed, and the fact that the first frame button (production button) 22a is operated is displayed by changing the display mode of the right button display mode 716.

  The state shown in FIG. 12B is a state in which the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated at the timing when the display pointer 719h does not match the bar display portion 717 in the timing effect (operation effect). The character “bad” is displayed as the result display mode 720 in the center of the screen, and the fact that the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated is displayed by changing the display mode of the left button display mode 715. It In this case, as the timing effect (operation effect), since the second frame button 22b for releasing the storage device is operated at a timing different from the timing at which the ball can enter, the sphere flowing down from the storage device is specified based on the operation. It does not enter the general entrance 630.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 13 and FIG. 14, the content of the timing effect (operation effect) executed during the variable display of the special symbol will be described. The same elements as those in FIG. 8B described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. As shown in FIG. 13A, when the timing effect (operation effect) is executed during the variable display of the special symbol, the same effect display as during the big hit is executed. Regarding the display of the timing effect (operation effect), the same elements as those in the big hit are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In FIG. 13A, the display mode of “start” is scroll-displayed in order to notify the player of the timing when the timing effect (operation effect) is started. Then, when the timing effect (operation effect) is executed during the variable display of the special symbol, as shown in FIG. 13B, the sphere has entered the specific general entrance 630 in the sub-display area Ds2. The acquisition display (“15”) indicating the privilege (prize ball) given to the player is executed, and the display pointer 719 (719k to 719p) is scrolled and displayed in the sub display area Ds4 or Ds5.

  In this embodiment, in the timing effect (operation effect) executed when the lottery result of the special symbol is changing, the display pointer scrolling in the sub display area Ds4 (in the case of FIG. 14, the display pointer 719q). By operating the second frame button (release button) 22b at the timing when (-719t) matches the bar display portion 717, the lottery result of the special symbol is displayed in the sub display area Ds2 as shown in FIG. Is configured. With such a configuration, the second frame button (release button) 22b for releasing the storage state of the storage device can be used to notify the lottery result of the special symbol.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 15, a description will be given of the display content of the jackpot confirmation display screen for informing the third symbol display device 81 that the special symbol lottery result has been won in the jackpot. FIG. 15 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a jackpot confirmation display screen displayed when the jackpot type “jackpot A” is won, and FIG. 15 (b) is a jackpot type “jackpot”. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the jackpot confirmation display screen displayed when the jackpot of "C" is won.

  Here, in the present embodiment, as the operation pattern of the movable valve 750, an advantageous period in which an operation pattern (operation scenario) that is advantageous to the player is executed, and an operation pattern (action that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous period). A disadvantage period during which a scenario) is executed is set (see FIG. 23A described later), and the movable valve 750 is configured to execute a plurality of operation patterns (operation scenarios) in a predetermined order. (See FIG. 23B described later). Further, the operation pattern (operation scenario) of the movable valve 750 to be executed later can be determined based on the operation state of the movable valve 750.

  In the present embodiment configured in this way, in the jackpot confirmation display screen for notifying the third symbol display device 81 that the special symbol lottery result has been won in the jackpot, the period when the jackpot game based on the jackpot is executed During, it is possible to determine whether or not the movable valve 750 is variably operated in an operation pattern (operation scenario) that is advantageous to the player, and the determination result can be notified on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the player can understand that the movable valve 750 is executed in the operation pattern (operation scenario) advantageous to the player during the jackpot game, before the jackpot game is executed, and during the jackpot game. The game can be motivated.

  In the example of the jackpot confirmation display screen shown in FIG. 15 (a), the jackpot of which the jackpot type is "jackpot A" is won, that is, the jackpot is a 16 round jackpot in which the probability variation state is not given after the jackpot game is finished. And a character of "chance" is displayed as a movable valve advantageous period notification mode 721 that notifies that the movable valve 750 is executed in an operation pattern (operation scenario) advantageous to the player during the jackpot game. .

  Further, in the example of the jackpot confirmation display screen shown in FIG. 15 (b), the jackpot of the jackpot type "jackpot C" is won, that is, the 16 round jackpot in which the probability variation state is given after the jackpot game is finished, and , "Super" character is displayed that indicates that the movable valve 750 is executed in an operation pattern (operation scenario) advantageous to the player during the big hit game.

  In this way, in addition to the mode of notifying that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, by notifying the mode of notifying the operation status of the movable valve 750 during the big hit on the big hit confirmation display screen, various patterns The jackpot confirmation display mode of can be displayed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 16 and FIG. 17, a method of setting the effect mode in the timing effect (operation effect) executed in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 16 schematically shows the content of setting the display position of the display pointer based on the timing when the player can enter the specific general entrance 630 and the music information executed in the timing effect (operation effect). It is a schematic diagram.

  As shown in FIG. 16, in the present embodiment, information indicating the timing at which the specific general entrance 630 described above with reference to FIG. The display position of the display pointer 719 (see FIG. 11B) displayed in the timing effect (operation effect) is determined based on the difficulty setting information for setting the difficulty level of (operation effect).

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of music pieces are configured to be usable in the timing effect (operation effect), and a display pointer 719 can be displayed (settable) for each music piece in advance. This is for operating the operation means at a timing that matches the rhythm of each song in the timing effect (operation effect). With this configuration, the display pointer can be entered at the specific general entrance 630. Even if 719 is set, the operation means can be operated in accordance with the rhythm of the music being executed in the timing effect (operation effect), and the timing effect (operation effect) can be provided without giving a sense of discomfort to the player. Can be run.

  The music A shown in FIG. 16 (a) and the music B shown in FIG. 16 (b) have different numbers and intervals of displayable (settable) positions of the display pointer 719. The location to set is also different. Further, in this embodiment, the difficulty of the timing effect is settable, and when the high difficulty is selected, the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated in the timing effect (operation effect). The display pointer for operating the second frame button (release button) 22b instead of setting the display position of the display pointer 719 to be coincident with the number of times that it is possible to enter the specific general entrance 630 The production mode is set such that it is difficult to operate the second frame button (release button) 22b in a state where 719 matches the bar display portion 717 (see FIG. 11B). On the other hand, when the low difficulty level is selected, the display position of the display pointer 719 for operating the second frame button (release button) 22b is set to the specific general entrance 630 as compared with the case where the high difficulty level is selected. A state in which the display pointer 719 for operating the second frame button (release button) 22b matches the bar display portion 717 (see FIG. 11B), instead of setting the number of times matching the timing at which the ball can be entered to be small. The effect mode is set so that the second frame button (release button) 22b can be easily operated.

  Specifically, when a low difficulty level is selected for the song A, as shown in FIG. 16A, the specific general entrance of the display pointer 719 corresponding to the second frame button (release button) 22b is entered. The number of times that matches the timing at which the ball can enter the mouth 630 is set to two times, and further five display pointers 719 corresponding to the first frame button (effect button) 22a are set to be displayed.

  On the other hand, when a high difficulty level is selected for the music B, as shown in FIG. 16B, the display pointer 719 corresponding to the second frame button (release button) 22b is moved to the specific general entrance 630. The number of times matching the timing at which the ball can be entered is set to 5, and further eight display pointers 719 corresponding to the first frame button (effect button) 22a are set to be displayed.

  Further, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 17, when a high difficulty level is selected, compared with a case where a low difficulty level is selected as a display mode of the display pointer 719 displayed as a timing effect (operation effect). A display mode in which timing is difficult to set is set.

  In this way, the player can select the difficulty level of the timing effect (operation effect) according to his / her skill level, and by varying the privilege to be granted according to the difficulty level, various players can be provided. Thus, the timing effect (operation effect) can be motivated to be executed.

  Further, the content described above is the content indicating both the selection of the music and the selection of the difficulty level in the timing effect (operation effect) executed in the present embodiment, but only the music without changing the difficulty level. In the case of selecting, since the interval of the display pointer 719 can be displayed (set) is different between the music A and the music B, the player who wants to enjoy the timing effect (operation effect) with the interval is A player who selects A and wants to enjoy timing effect (operation effect) at short intervals can select song B. As a result, it is possible to execute the timing effect (operation effect) desired by the player without changing the difficulty level, and various players are motivated to execute the timing effect (operation effect). You can

  Furthermore, when the timing effect (operation effect) is executed at a short interval, the spheres stored in the storage channel 700e can be digested (flown out) in a short period of time, so the timing effect (at a long interval) ( It is possible to make it easier to store the new sphere in the storage channel 700e than in the case where the operation effect is performed (that is, the new sphere collides with the sphere stored in the storage channel 700e and It is possible to suppress the situation where the liquid does not flow into the storage channel 700e). As a result, it is possible to increase the chances of causing the ball to enter the specific general entrance 630 through the timing effect (operation effect).

  In the present embodiment, the timing at which the specific general entrance 630 can be entered in the display pointer 719 corresponding to the second frame button (release button) 22b set during the timing effect (operation effect). Although the upper limit of the number of times matching with is set to 5, the number of times more than that (for example, 8 times) may be set. With this configuration, in addition to the spheres (maximum 5 balls) stored in the storage channel 700e when the timing effect (operation effect) is executed, new storage is performed during the timing effect (operation effect). It is possible to operate the second frame button (release button) 22b at a timing at which the ball can enter the specific general ball entrance 630 even for the ball that has flowed into the flow channel 700e. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to actively play the game so that more balls flow into the storage channel 700e.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the interval of the displayable (set) position of the display pointer 719 is changed depending on the music, and the player selects the music. Although a configuration for narrowing or widening the display interval is used, as another configuration, a selection means for selecting the display interval of the display pointer 719 executed by the player in the timing effect (operation effect). Setting means for setting the display position of the display pointer 719 based on the display interval of the display pointer 719 selected by the selecting means may be provided, or the same music piece can be reproduced by changing the reproduction speed of the music piece. A setting means for setting the display interval of the display pointer 719 may be provided. Even when such a configuration is used, it is possible to execute a timing effect (operation effect) desired by the player without changing the difficulty level, and various players are motivated. A timing effect (operation effect) can be executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of music pieces (music piece information) having different locations (intervals) where the display pointer 719 can be displayed (set) are stored, but the display pointers set for the respective music pieces (music piece information) The displayable location of 719 may be configured to be associated with the movable valve closing timing of each scenario type of the movable valve 750. Thereby, the operation status of the movable valve 750 (that is, the scenario type to be executed) in the period in which the timing effect (operation effect) is executed is determined, the scenario type is specified based on the determination result, and the specified scenario is determined. By executing the music corresponding to the type as the timing effect (operation effect), it is easy to match the timing when the ball can enter the specific general entrance 630 and the place where the display pointer 719 of the music can be displayed. be able to. In this case, by setting the timing at which the scenario type of the movable valve 750 switches as the start timing of the timing effect (operation effect), the display location of the display pointer 719 displayed in the timing effect (operation effect) is set more easily. can do.

  Next, the contents of the difficulty level selection screen for selecting the difficulty level in the timing effect (operation effect) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents of the difficulty level selection screen for selecting the difficulty level executed in the first round of the jackpot game. Among the elements displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the same elements as those in FIG. 11A described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. As shown in FIG. 17, when the first round of the jackpot game is started, “ROUND1” is displayed on the round display portion 714, and a notification display for notifying that the difficulty level selection effect is being executed is displayed in the center of the screen. Then, a guide display for guiding how to select the difficulty level is executed. In this guidance display, a button display 721 that indicates selection using the first frame button (effect button) 22a is displayed.

  Then, in the lower part of the screen, an arrow 722 indicating the currently selected difficulty level is moved and displayed every two seconds to a position indicating low difficulty level and high difficulty level, and the corresponding difficulty levels are displayed in the sub-display areas Ds4 and Ds5. The demo pointer 723 showing the display mode of the display pointer 719 displayed when the degree is selected is scroll-displayed.

  Here, the demo pointers 723a to 723d in the case of selecting the high difficulty level displayed in the sub display area Ds5 are different from the demo pointers 723 in the case of selecting the low difficulty level displayed in the sub display area Ds4. A display mode is set that is difficult for a person to operate at a specific timing. Specifically, the demo pointer 723a has an obstruction display indicated by an asterisk around the display pointer 719, the demo pointer 723b has the display pointer 719 reduced, and the demo pointer 723c has the display pointer. A non-target display mode in which the center position of 719 is difficult to grasp is displayed, and the demo pointer 723d is displayed at a position where an obstruction display for making the display pointer 719 difficult to visually recognize overlaps with the display pointer 719.

  In this way, the player can select the difficulty level of the timing effect (operation effect) according to his / her skill level, and by varying the privilege to be granted according to the difficulty level, various players can be provided. Thus, the timing effect (operation effect) can be motivated to be executed. In addition, the number of times the player has operated the operation means (the first frame button 22a, the second frame button 22b) at an appropriate timing in the timing effect (operation effect) (success number) is accumulated, and the success number is increased. Based on this, the display mode of the display pointer 719 executed when the difficulty level is high may be changed to the display pointer 719 executed when the difficulty level is low. In addition, in the case where the timing effect (operation effect) with low difficulty is being executed, the display pointer 719 that matches the entrance timing at which the ball can enter the specific general entrance 630 according to the number of successes. May be configured to be displayed more frequently. This allows the player to participate in the game more enthusiastically.

  In addition, in the timing effect (operation effect), when the cumulative number of successful operations of operating the operation means (first frame button 22a, second frame button 22b) at appropriate timing exceeds a predetermined number, the player is presented with It may be possible to select a timing effect (operation effect) having a higher difficulty level and a super-difficulty level with which a larger privilege can be obtained. This makes it possible to provide the player with a selectable effect (super-difficulty effect) only when a predetermined effect condition (the number of successes reaches a predetermined number) is satisfied. You can play games more enthusiastically.

  In the present embodiment, the presentation mode of the timing effect (operation effect) is changed based on the operation content (the number of successes) for the player to be executed in the timing effect (operation effect). For example, in an operation effect that is executed other than the timing effect (operation effect) (for example, a mini game effect during a jackpot game or a reach effect during a special symbol change), the operation history of the player operating the first frame button 22a. The effect mode of the timing effect (operation effect) may be changed based on (the number of operations, the operation content, and the operation result). As a result, it is possible to enthusiastically play the game for various operation effects executed by the pachinko machine 10, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early. Further, the present invention is not limited to the operation result of the operation means (the first frame button 22a, the second frame button 22b) by the player, and for example, the time period measured by the time measuring means (RTC) or the player performs the game. It may be configured to switch the effect mode of the timing effect (operation effect) based on the game period.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 18, regarding the contents of the transparent effect for changing the cover member 710 provided in the board unit 700 (see FIG. 2) from a shielded state in which the inside is difficult to see to a transparent state in which the inside is visible. explain. FIG. 18A is a schematic diagram showing a shielding state, and FIG. 18B is a schematic diagram showing a transmission state. The same elements as those in FIG. 4 described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. As shown in FIG. 18A, the cover member 710 is attached so as to cover the entire downstream side (downstream from the first storage valve 770a) region of the board unit 700, and covers the area other than the storage channel 700e side. It is attached so that the inside of the member 710 cannot be looked into. Even if an attempt is made to look into the inside of the cover member 710 from the storage channel 700e side, since the movable valve 750 is provided below the extending direction of the storage channel 700e, the movable state of the movable valve 750 is visually recognized. It is configured so that it cannot. Furthermore, since the first storage valve 770a is located at the protruding position, it becomes more difficult to visually recognize the inside of the cover member 710 from the storage channel 700e side. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the movable state of the movable valve 750 from being grasped when the cover member 710 is in a shielded state where it is difficult to visually recognize the inside.

  In the cover member 710 configured as described above, the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be are turned on based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition (for example, when the storage device is in the released state and the sphere flows down), and FIG. As shown in (), it is configured with a half mirror so as to switch to a transparent state where the inside is visible. Therefore, the player can be informed of the flow-down situation of the ball flowing down near the movable valve 750.

  In the present embodiment, the cover member 710 as the shielding means is switched to the transmissive state by irradiating the cover member 710 with light (transmission lamp), but other configurations may be used. Well, for example, when the cover member 710 is configured to be movable so that the incident angle of the light emitted to the cover member 710 from the light emitting means (LED) that is constantly lit is switched, and the cover member 710 is located at a predetermined position. It may be configured such that only the inside is in a transparent state in which the inside is visible.

  Further, the movable valve 750 is made of a transparent resin material (for example, polycarbonate, ABS, etc.), the cover member 710 is made of a transparent color whose inside can be visually recognized, and the surface thereof is subjected to diffuse reflection of irradiated light (for example, , Texture treatment) may be applied. Accordingly, while the game is being executed in the pachinko machine 10, the light emitted from the decoration lamp 227a makes it difficult to visually recognize the inside of the cover member 710, and the pachinko machine 10 is powered off (that is, for decoration). The inside of the cover member 710 may be made visible when the lamp 227a is not lit. Thereby, even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, a store clerk can easily inspect the inside of the cover member 710.

  When such a configuration is used, a shield wall is provided to shield the cover member 710 from being irradiated with the light emitted from the decoration lamp 227a, and the shield wall can be changed between a shielded state and a non-shielded state. Should be provided. This allows the player to visually recognize the inside of the cover member 710 even while the game is being played. Further, similarly to the first embodiment, by providing a dedicated light emitting means (lamp) for irradiating the cover member 710 with light and performing light emission control on the light emitting means, the inside of the cover member 710 is controlled. May be switched between a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize (a state in which light is emitted) and a visible state (a state in which light is not emitted).

  Further, a movable member for decoration is provided on the cover member 710 whose inside can be visually confirmed, and the operation of the movable member is controlled, so that the inside of the cover member 710 can be visually recognized (the movable member for decoration is the movable valve 750. And a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize the inside of the cover member 710 (a movable member for decoration is movable in an overlapping position so as to cover the movable valve 750). .

  In addition, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 18A, the cover member 710 is configured to cover the entire downstream side of the board unit 700, so that the movable valve 750 when the cover member 710 is in the shielded state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to obtain the effect of making it difficult to visually recognize the movable state of the movable valve 750 in the posture of the normal game. Good. For example, the cover member 710 may have a size that covers only the movable valve 750. This makes it possible to construct at low cost a structure that makes it difficult to visually recognize the movable state of the movable valve 750.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. Adhesive spaces K1 and K2 for adhering certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided in the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamps etc. adhered to the adhesive space K1 are front frames 14 It can be seen through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an outlet 66. Balls that have not won any of the winning openings are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the outlet 66. On the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (features) such as a wind turbine are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 7, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a payout unit 93. Also, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are installed as needed.

  The main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

  Further, in the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (payout controller 111 and launch controller 112), a box base and a box cover are connected in an unopenable manner by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, extending over the box base and the box cover. The seal sticker is made of a brittle material, and if the seal sticker is peeled off to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. To be cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The payout unit 93 is located at the uppermost part of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, the tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclines toward the downstream side, and the downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out the balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 19). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with the balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately dispensed by the dispensing device 133. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch (FIGS. 7 and 122). ing. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 12). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 7) is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. In addition to a certain RAM 203, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. Note that various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device in only one direction.

  In the main control device 110, main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 24) that stores various counters for controlling these processes.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 24, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters, in order to perform jackpot lottery, display setting of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, lottery of the display result of the second symbol display device 83, etc., the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. Used in.

  To set the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the jackpot (and the jackpot) lottery, and the selection of the jackpot type (jackpot symbol) Used for the first permissible type counter C2, the stop type counter C3 used for selecting the stop type, the variation type counter CS1 used for selecting the variation pattern, and the initial value setting of the first per random number counter C1. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is used. Moreover, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbol (the second symbol display device 83), and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for the initial value setting of the second random number counter C4. The small hit type counter C5 is used to select the small hit type. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 42). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although details will be described later, the RAM 203 stores each counter value for the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a in which each counter value is stored for the prize for the first ball entrance 64 and the prize for the second ball entrance 640. The special symbol 2 storage sphere storage 203b is provided. In the present embodiment, the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 are respectively provided with up to four holding balls, and a total of up to eight holding balls can be stored. Therefore, when the special symbol is not displayed in a variable display, or during the period when the special symbol can be drawn by lottery, such as when the special symbol jackpot is not being played, when the ball wins the first entrance 64, each counter value is a special symbol. When the game ball is stored in the 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the second ball entrance 640, each counter value is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Then, each counter value stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a is moved to the execution area provided in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, and the first special symbol is variably displayed (dynamic display). Various settings and control processes for executing are performed. Similarly, each counter value stored in the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is moved to the execution area provided in the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b, for variably displaying the second special symbol. Various settings and control processing are executed.

  On the other hand, during a period during which the special symbol cannot be selected by lottery, such as during variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol or during the jackpot game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the game ball is the first entrance 64. Alternatively, in the case of winning the second entrance 640, if the number of holdings for the winning entrance (starting opening) is less than the upper limit value (four in this embodiment), acquisition of each counter value Is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b corresponding to the winning entrance. In addition, when the number of holdings for the winning entrance is equal to or more than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment), each counter value or the like is not acquired and the prize balls (5 in this embodiment). Only prize balls are treated as invalid balls paid out to the player.

  In the present embodiment, the upper limit value of the number of reserved balls is set to four for each of the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640, but is not limited to this and is less than four (for example, 3) or more than 4 (for example, 8). Further, the upper limit value may not be provided.

  Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 299 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 299). It is configured to return to. Particularly, when the first per random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the per first random number counter C1.

  Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 42).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the timing at which the ball wins the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. Then, it is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b of the RAM 203. Then, the value of the random number that becomes the big hit of the special symbol is defined in the first per random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first per random number counter C1 is the per per random number table. When it coincides with the value of the random number to be a jackpot defined in 202a, it is determined as a jackpot of the special symbol.

  Here, the first random number table 202a will be described. The first hit random number table 202a is a table in which a random number value (judgment value) determined to be a hit in each game state is set in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Specifically, when the gaming state is a low-probability gaming state, in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, it is determined whether the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired is "0". If it is “0”, it is determined that it is a big hit. Further, when the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state, the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is within the range of "1 to 4". If it is determined that it is within the range of "1 to 4," it is determined that it is a big hit.

  Here, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the execution area of the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is a random number that is a jackpot for the special symbol. For example, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the special symbol big hit time. In this case, the concrete display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same execution area.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. As described above, in the low probability state of the special symbol, the value of the first random number counter C1 which is a big hit of the special symbol is 1, and the random number value "0" is the first random number table as described above. It is stored in 202a. In this way, while the total number of random number values is 300, the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 1, so the probability of being a jackpot of a special symbol is "1/300". On the other hand, in the high probability state of the special symbol, there are four values for the first random number counter C1 which is a big hit for the special symbol, and the random number values “1 to 4” are the first per random number table as described above. It is stored in 202a. In this way, while the total number of random number values is 300, the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 4, so the probability of being a jackpot of a special symbol is "1/75".

  The value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, when the special symbol lottery result is a big hit, the big hit type is selected based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 and the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 20 (b)). The Rukoto. Specifically, it will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 99, for example, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99), returns to 0. In the present embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of disengagement displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after the reach is generated, it is different from the symbol that the reach is applied as the final stop symbol. Two stop (effect) patterns are selected: "reach loss" (for example, the range of 90 to 99) where the symbol stops, and "complete loss" (for example, the range of 0 to 89) at which reach does not occur. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and when a ball enters the first entrance 64, the value is stored in the RAM 203. The special symbol 1 is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203a. Further, when the ball enters the second entrance 640, the value is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  From the value of the stop type selection counter C3 (random number value), a random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by a stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Further, in the present embodiment, this table is divided into a high probability of special symbols and a low probability of special symbols, and a range of random number values set for each outage type depending on the table. Is changing. This is to change the selection ratio of the stop type depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or in the low probability state of the special symbol.

  For example, in the probability variation state of the special symbol, a big hit is likely to occur, so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary, so that the range of random value corresponding to the stop type of "completely out" is 0 to 89 Table is selected, "completely out" is easily selected, and "reach out" is narrowed to 90 to 99. Therefore, it is difficult to select "reach out". If the special symbol is in a low probability state, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of "complete deviation" is as narrow as 0 to 79 in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first entrance 64. The table for low probability is selected, and it becomes difficult to select “complete loss”, and the range of random number values corresponding to the stop type of “reach loss” is widened to 80 to 99. Therefore, in the low probability state, since many reach displays having a long effect time can be performed, it is possible to secure a ball entry time into the first entrance 64 and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. Easier to do.

  The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS1 determines one variation pattern from the set variation pattern selection table. A fluctuation time (dynamic display period) is set in this fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is also a counter that determines the fluctuation time. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 42) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process. The variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIGS. 21 and 22) that stores a random number value that determines one variation time of the symbol variation from the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random number value) is of the main controller 110. It is provided in the ROM 202.

  The fluctuation pattern selection table 202d defines a plurality of data tables for selecting fluctuation patterns (see FIGS. 21B and 22). In this variation pattern selection table 202d, a plurality of variation pattern selection tables that are commonly used by the first special symbol and the second special symbol are set, and for each of them, variation pattern selection table for each win / fail judgment result. Is set. Details of each variation pattern selection table will be described later with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second per random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second per random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is, for example, periodically updated for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33), and the ball has passed through either the left or right normal starting opening (through gate) 67. When it is detected, it is acquired and stored in the universal figure execution area of the RAM 203.

  Then, the value of the random number that normally hits the symbol is defined in the second per random number table 202c (see FIG. 20) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second per random number counter C4 is 2 When it matches the value of the random number that is defined in the random number table 202c per 2, it is determined that the normal symbol (the second symbol) is a symbol. For example, in this second random number table 202c, when the probability of the normal symbol is low (during the normal state of the normal symbol), there are five random number values that are the symbols of the normal symbol, and the range is "5-9". ing. The total number of random numbers that can be taken by the second random number counter C4 is 240, and the total number of random numbers that can be won is 5, so the probability of winning a normal symbol at a low probability of a normal symbol is "5. / 240 ".

  On the other hand, when there is a high probability of the normal symbol (during the time saving state of the normal symbol), there are 200 random number values that are the symbols of the normal symbol, and the range is "5-204". The total number of random numbers that can be taken by the second random number counter C4 is 240, and the total number of random numbers that can be won is 200, so the probability of winning a normal symbol is "1 / 1.2". . As described above, in the present embodiment, the random number that is a hit of the normal symbol is greatly different between the low-probability state of the normal symbol and the high-probability state of the normal symbol, and thus the hit probability is significantly different. In addition, the variation time of the normal symbol and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 when the normal symbol hits are different between the low probability and the high probability of the normal symbol. . Therefore, the low probability state of the normal symbol, and the high probability state of the normal symbol, the ease of entering the second entrance 640 is greatly different, so in the low probability state of the normal symbol (normal state), It is possible to allow the player to play the game by aiming at the first entrance 64.

  In a low probability state of the normal symbol, when the sphere passes through the through gate (normal ball entrance) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the variable display of the regular symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. It runs for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 9", it is determined that the winning has occurred, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (the second symbol) The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the second entrance 640 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 2 times”. On the other hand, in a high probability state of the normal symbol, when the sphere passes through the through gate (normal entrance slot) 67, the variable display of the normal symbol is executed for 1 second on the second symbol display device 83, and the acquired second per-random number. If the value of the counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the winning has occurred, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the symbol "○" lights as the stop symbol (second symbol). While being displayed, the second entrance 640 is opened for “1 second × 2 times”. In addition, in the present embodiment, the variation time of the ordinary symbol, the ordinary electric accessory opening time and the number of times of opening may be appropriately changed within a range that does not impair the game playability.

  The universal figure fluctuation type counter CS2 is configured as a loop counter which is sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 99 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). When the game ball passes through the through gate 67, the variation pattern of the normal symbol is selected based on the value of the ordinary figure variation type counter CS2. Specifically, a variation pattern in which the value of the universal figure variation type counter CS2 is in the range of 0 to 99 (that is, the entire range) and the variation time is 3 seconds is selected.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 42).

  In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the values of the counters and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 19, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 19, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

  The RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer at the time of the power shutdown (including the occurrence of a power failure. The same applies to the following) and the value of each register. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure. The same applies to the following), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by the main process (see FIG. 42), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in the startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 41). The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is shut down due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to, the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 40) as the power failure processing is immediately executed.

  Next, the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 20A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 according to this embodiment. In the ROM 202, in addition to the above-described first random number table 202a and second random number table 202c, a first winning type selection table 202b, a variation pattern selection table 202d, a movable valve operation scenario storage area 202e, At least a movable valve operation scenario table 202f is provided.

  First, the details of the first hit type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 20 (b)) is a data table in which the judgment value for determining the big hit type is stored for each kind of special symbol, and the judgment of the first hit type counter C2. Values are defined in association with each jackpot type. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

  As shown in FIG. 20B, with respect to the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49", and "big hit A" is associated. It is prescribed by. This jackpot A has 16 rounds. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value that is "big hit A" is 50, so "big hit A" is determined when it is a big hit in the lottery for the first special symbol. The ratio is 50% (50/100). This "big hit A" is one of the big hit types with the largest number of rounds, and after the big hit ends, the time saving state of the normal symbol is given 100 times.

  Further, "big hit B" is associated and defined in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "50 to 89". This "big hit B" is a big hit with eight rounds. Among the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value that is "big hit B" is 40, so "big hit B" is determined when a big hit is made in the lottery for the first special symbol. The ratio is 40% (40/100). This "big jackpot B" is set to 8 rounds, which is a smaller number of rounds than the "big jackpot A", but since the probability change state is given after the big jackpot ends, in terms of the payouts obtained by one big jackpot. It is a jackpot type that is more disadvantageous than "jackpot A", but since the probability variation state continues until you win the next jackpot, the player wins from the time when one jackpot starts until the game state returns to the normal state. In terms of possible payout (expected payout), it is a jackpot type that is more advantageous than "jackpot A".

  Further, "big hit C" is defined in association with the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 being "90 to 99". The “big hit C” is a big hit with 16 rounds, like the “big hit A”. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value that is "big hit C" is 10, so "big hit C" is determined when a big hit is made in the lottery for the first special symbol. The ratio is 10% (10/100). The “big hit C” has a larger number of rounds than the “big hit B”, and the probability variation state is given after the big hit ends. Therefore, the jackpot type is more advantageous than the “jackpot A” and the “jackpot B”.

  On the other hand, for the second special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49", the "big hit A" is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2. Is defined as being associated with the “big hit B” in the range of “50 to 59”, and “big hit C” is associated with the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 being “60 to 99”. It is prescribed by. In other words, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are the same (1: 1 ratio) in the ratio of the privilege (the time saving state or the probability variation state of the normal symbol) given after the jackpot is finished, but the number of rounds is 16 The proportion of the jackpots of the rounds is specified so that the second special symbol is larger.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot is the big prize in the lottery of the first special symbol, the big jackpot in the lottery of the second special symbol is the most advantageous to the player. Is selected so that it is easy to select. Therefore, once the continuous game mode (probably changed state of special symbol, and time saving state of normal symbol) is set, by entering the ball into the second entrance 640 by right-handing, the second special symbol lottery It becomes easy to repeat the state in which is easily executed and the jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game with one purpose of shifting to the extended game mode. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Next, the details of the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22. As described above, the variation pattern selection table 202d defines random number values that determine the variation pattern (variation time) of the variation display from the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random number value).

  As shown in FIG. 21A, the variation pattern selection table 202d is a normal table 202d1 for determining a variation pattern (variation time) in the normal mode, a probability variation state, and a normal symbol time saving state (hereinafter, Probability variation / time saving table 202d2 for determining a variation pattern in a time saving state), and a change in the special symbol after the jackpot of "jackpot A", which is a jackpot type in which a time saving state of 100 times is given after the jackpot ends At least the chance table 202d3 for determining the variation pattern (variation time) of the 90th to 110th times is included.

  First, the normal table 202d1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal table 202d1. As shown in FIG. 21B, the normal table 202d1 has a random number value (variation type counter value) for determining the type (variation time) of the variation pattern for each special symbol type and each special symbol stop type. The counter value of CS1) is defined.

  In the present embodiment, it is stipulated that the common variation pattern (variation time) is selected regardless of the type of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol), and specifically, the complete stop type. When the deviation is determined, as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the fluctuation pattern of short deviation (5 seconds) is associated with the range of “0 to 98”, and the long deviation (10) is associated with the range of “99 to 198”. Second) variation pattern is associated. Also, when the special symbol is missed by lottery and the miss reach is determined as the stop type, various normal reach types (30 seconds) are associated with the range of "0 to 159" as the value of the variation type counter CS1, and " Various types of super reach (60 seconds) are associated with the range of "160 to 198". If the special symbol lottery is a big hit, various normal reach types (30 seconds) are associated with the range of “0 to 50” as the value of the variation type counter CS1, and the super reach to the range of “51 to 179”. Various types (60 seconds) are associated, and various special reach types (90 seconds) are associated in the range of “180 to 198”.

  Next, the details of the probability variation / time saving table 202d2 included in the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. The probability variation / time saving table 202d2 is a table used for determining the variation pattern in the probability variation state and the time saving state, as described above.

  In this probability variation / time saving table 202d2, the same variation pattern (variation time) is determined when the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same stop type and the same variation type counter CS1 value. It is configured to be. Specifically, when the special symbol lottery is missed and complete out is determined as the stop type, a short out (5 seconds) is associated with the range of the variation type counter CS1 of "0 to 190". , "191 to 198" are associated with a long deviation (10 seconds). In this way, in the probability change state and the time saving state, the special symbol lottery results in a miss, and when complete stoppage is determined as the stop type, the proportion of short misses is higher than in the normal mode (normal state). . As a result, it is possible to improve the game efficiency in the probability variation state or in the slightly shortened state, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal mode (normal state).

  In addition, if the special symbol is missed in the lottery, and if the reach out is determined as the stop type, various normal reach (30 seconds) in the range of "0 to 198" (that is, the entire range) as the value of the variation type counter CS1. Are associated with. Also, in the first special symbol lottery, if a small hit, which is one of the outliers, comes in the range of “0 to 198” (that is, the entire range) as the value of the variation type counter CS1, various super reach (60 seconds). ) Is associated.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol lottery is a big hit, the normal reach various types (30 seconds) are associated with the range of “0 to 50” as the value of the variation type counter CS1, and the super reach to the range of “51 to 179”. Various types (60 seconds) are associated, and various special reach types (90 seconds) are associated in the range of “180 to 198”.

  As described above, in the probability variation state and time reduction state in which the probability variation / time saving table 202d2 is set, unlike the normal mode (normal state), the variation pattern having a short variation time is easily selected as the variation pattern to be selected. Furthermore, the lottery of the second special symbol that is easier to win the jackpot (eg, jackpot C) that is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol is configured to be easily executed. As a result, by hitting the ball by aiming at the second entrance 640 by right-handing, it is possible to efficiently execute the lottery for the second special symbol. That is, in the case of a big hit, it is an advantageous state in which the probability variation state is easily given. Therefore, it is possible to make the game play with a strong expectation that it will be a big hit.

  Next, the details of the chance table 202d3 included in the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, this chance table 202d3 is a period in which the number of changes in the special symbol is a predetermined number (90 to 110 times after the jackpot is finished) after the jackpot is executed when the jackpot type is the "jackpot A". It is a table in which the variation pattern (variation time) is defined. That is, in the "big hit A" to which a time saving state (a period until the special symbol changes 100 times) is given after the end of the big hit, the end of the time saving state (90 to 100 times after the end of the big hit) and the short time state to the normal state It is a table used in the opening stage (101 to 110 times after the jackpot end) after the game state shifts.

  Specifically, when complete disengagement is determined as the stop type, the fluctuation pattern of short deviation (5 seconds) is associated with the range of “0 to 98” as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and “99 to The variation pattern of long deviation (10 seconds) is associated with the range of “150”, and the variation pattern of missed opportunity (50 seconds) is associated with the range of “151 to 198”. If the special symbol is missed in the lottery and the miss reach is determined as the stop type, various normal reach types (30 seconds) are associated with the range of "0 to 150" as the value of the variation type counter CS1, and " 151 to 198 ”are associated with various chance reach (50 seconds). If the special symbol lottery results in a big hit, various normal reach types (30 seconds) are associated with the range of “0 to 10” as the value of the variation type counter CS1, and the chance reach range of “11 to 179”. Various types (50 seconds) are associated with each other, and various special reach types (90 seconds) are associated with the range of "180 to 198". That is, in the period in which the chance table 202d3 is referred to, when the jackpot is won, the chance variation is set to be the highest. As a result, the variation display based on the variation of the chance is executed, so that the player can have the expectation for the big hit and the expectation for the ball to enter the specific general entrance 630.

  As described above, in the chance table 202d3, the special variation type (chance variation type) having the variation time of 50 seconds can be selected regardless of the selection result of the special symbol and the selection result of the stop type. Although detailed description will be given later with reference to FIGS. 58 to 60, when the chance variation type is selected and a sphere is stored in the storage channel 700e, the second frame button (release An operation effect that suggests the operation timing of the operation button) 22b is executed. By operating the second frame button (release button) 22b in accordance with the operation timing suggested in this operation effect, the balls stored in the storage channel 700e enter the specific general entrance 630. It becomes possible to do.

  With this configuration, the balls stored in the storage channel 700e (storage device) are normally stored in the gaming state (probably changed state or time saving state) in which an advantageous right-handed game can be provided to the player. The release operation can be efficiently performed in the state. Further, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern (variation time) is selected using the chance table 202d3 even during the period in which the right-handed game is being executed (the final stage of the time saving game). As a result, the number of hours saved is reduced, and even if the expectation for winning a jackpot during a right-handed game is low, it is possible to make it easier for a ball to enter the specific general entrance 630. , It is possible to enthusiastically play the game until the end of the time saving state.

  Further, when the special symbol lottery results in a big hit, the operation result is operated by operating the second frame button (release button) 22b to notify the result of this lottery. With such a configuration, using the operation means (second frame button (release button) 22b) for releasing the storage state of the storage device, the effect of suggesting (notifying) the lottery result of the special symbol is executed. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game with a surprising effect to the player.

  In the present embodiment, the period in which the chance table 202d3 is referred to is set so as to extend from the end of the time saving state to the beginning of the normal state, but is not limited to this, and for example, a predetermined period of the time saving state (for example, , The remaining number of saved time is 20 to 10), and the variation pattern is set using the chance table 202d3 when the number of lottery for special symbols exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 600) without winning the jackpot. Alternatively, unlike the present embodiment, the chance table 202d3 is not provided, and the chance change type is associated with the predetermined value of the change type counter CS1 in each change pattern selection table used according to the game state. May be defined as follows.

  Next, detailed contents of the movable valve operation scenario storage area 202e will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the movable valve operation scenario storage area 202e. The movable valve operation scenario storage area 202e is an area where operation scenarios used for operation control of the movable valve 750 are stored for each scenario type, and information stored in the movable valve operation scenario storage area 202e is stored in the movable valve operation scenario storage area 202e. By using the movable valve 750, the movable valve 750 is operated in the scenario setting order that is set during the power-on process.

  Specifically, in the movable valve operation scenario storage area 202e, operation scenarios 1 to 5 are defined as scenario types. In operation scenario 1, “open 2 seconds → close 0.1 seconds (1 set) × 15 times” is set as the scenario content, which is an operation scenario for 31.5 seconds. In other words, the movable valve 750 is movable such that the period during which the ball that has flowed down can be guided to the specific general entrance 630 (the period when the movable valve 750 is in the closed state) is 0.1 second in 2.1 seconds. It is a scenario that is operated. This “closing 0.1 second” is a period in which the ball is guided to the specific general entrance 630 when the ball reaches the movable valve 750 with good timing, and is a variable operation for closing the movable valve 750. Even if the player operates the second frame button (release button) 22b after the player visually recognizes it, it is set as a period until the ball reaches the movable valve 750. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from operating the second frame button (release button) 22b while visually checking the operation status of the movable valve 750.

  In operation scenario 2, “open 5 seconds → close 0.1 seconds (1 set) × 6 times” is set as the scenario content, and is an operation scenario of 30.6 seconds. In this operation scenario 2, the movable valve 750 is set in the open state (open) for a longer period than the above-mentioned operation scenario 1, and is an operation scenario that is more disadvantageous to the player than the operation scenario 1. Further, in the operation scenario 1 and the operation scenario 2, since the movable valve 750 is in the closed state (closed) for the same period, even if the player grasps the period in which the movable valve 750 is closed, Therefore, it is difficult to predict the timing when the movable valve 750 is closed.

  In operation scenario 3, “open 4 seconds → ((close 0.1 seconds → open 0.2 seconds) × 3) (1 set) × 6 times” is set as the scenario content, and operation for 29.4 seconds It is a scenario. This operation scenario 3 is different from the above-described operation scenarios 1 and 2 in that the movable valve 750 is closed (closed) for a short period (0.1 seconds) a plurality of times (0.9 seconds). This is an operation scenario that is set (three times), and is an operation scenario in which it is easy to guide the ball to the specific general entrance 630.

  In operation scenario 4, “open 3 seconds → close 0.5 seconds (1 set) × 9 times” is set as the scenario content, which is an operation scenario for 31.5 seconds. In this operation scenario 4, the movable valve 750 is maintained in a closed state (closed) for a long period (0.5 seconds) in comparison with the above-described operation scenarios 1 to 3. This makes it possible to set a wide operation timing of the second frame button (release button) 22b for guiding the ball to the specific general entrance 630.

  In this way, the predetermined operation contents of the movable valve 750 are divided into the operation period that is advantageous to the player and the operation period that is disadvantageous, and are stored so that the operation is currently performed (or It is possible to easily determine whether or not the operation of the movable valve 750 (to be executed in the future) is an operation advantageous to the player.

  FIG. 23B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the movable valve operation scenario table 202f. The movable valve operation scenario table 202f is provided with setting order information for operating the movable valve 750 for each scenario type defined in a predetermined order. When executing the operation control of the movable valve 750, the MPU of the main controller 110 reads out information corresponding to the contents defined in the movable valve operation scenario table 202f from the movable valve operation scenario storage area 202e and moves the movable valve operation scenario. The valve 750 is moved.

  This movable valve operation scenario table 202f is subjected to loop processing so that when the operation based on the operation scenario corresponding to the setting order “END” is completed, the operation scenario corresponding to the setting order “1” is executed. . In addition, in the present embodiment, the movable valve operation scenario table 202f shows that the setting order is stored in advance, but other configurations may be used, for example, a plurality of predetermined scenario types. A means for deciding any one of the above as the operation start timing of the movable valve 750 is provided, and the setting order “1” is set for the scenario type determined for the operation start timing, and thereafter, the setting order is given in ascending order. Good. This makes it possible to change the operation scenario that is first executed when the operation of the movable valve 750 is started, which makes it difficult for the player to grasp the operation of the movable valve 750.

  In addition, the movable valve operation scenario table 202f is configured so that a plurality of operation scenarios defined in a predetermined order can be read in a loop, and the operation scenario to be read first (that is, the setting order “1” is set). It is possible to change the operation scenario that is initially executed when the operation of the movable valve 750 is started by changing the position of the operation valve), which makes it difficult for the player to grasp the operation of the movable valve 750. In addition, the variable operation of the movable valve 750 can be fairly provided when viewed for a long time. Further, it is possible to prevent the operation process of the movable valve 750 from becoming complicated.

  Next, details of the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. 25, the RAM 203 is a special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved sphere storage area 203c, a special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d, a special symbol 2 reserved sphere. Number counter 203e, ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203f, probability variation flag 203g, time saving counter 203h, operation scenario storage area 203i, operation counter 203j, release flag 203k, remaining ball timer flag 203m, remaining ball timer 203n, other memory area 203z Have at least

  The special symbol 1 holding sphere storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and in each of these areas, a first random number counter The respective values of C1, the first type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored.

  More specifically, each value of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball enters the first entrance 64 (start prize), and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding). Among the vacant areas from the first area to the reserved fourth area, the areas having smaller area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the prize that is older in time is stored, and in the reserved first area, the data that corresponds to the prize that is older in time is stored. If data is stored in all of the four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

  After that, in the main controller 110, when the special symbols are selected by lottery, the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a are transferred to the execution area. Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery for special symbols is performed.

  When data is shifted from the first reserved area to the execution area, the first reserved area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process of packing the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) into holding areas having a smaller area number by one (holding first area to holding third area) Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, only the reserved areas (reserved second area to reserved fourth area) in which winning data is stored are shifted.

  The special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b has one execution area and four reserved areas, like the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a. In the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, each counter value acquired based on the starting winning to the second ball entrance 640 is stored. Since the storage method of the counter value and the like are the same as those of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c, like the special symbol 1 holding sphere storing area 203a and the special symbol 2 holding sphere storing area 203b, has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth Area). A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the through gate 67, and the acquired data is available in four reservation areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Among the existing areas, the areas having smaller area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, like the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all of the four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

  After that, in the main control device 110, when a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( It is moved), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is made.

  In addition, when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so as in the case of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b, A shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas is packed into the holding area having a smaller area number by one. Further, the data shift is also performed only for the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

  Special symbol 1 reservation ball number counter 203d, variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry into the first entry port 64 (starting prize) (third symbol) This is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display performed on the display device 81 up to a maximum of four times. This special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d, the initial value is set to zero, each time a sphere enters the first entrance 64, and the number of spheres of variable display increases, up to a maximum value of 4 One is added (see S404 in FIG. 36). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the special symbol is newly executed (see S210 in FIG. 34).

  The value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d (the number of times N1 of variable display holding in the first special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the holding sphere number command (S211 of FIG. 34, S405 of FIG. 36). reference). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113 each time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 holds the variable display held in the main control device 110 by the holding ball count command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball count counter 203d is changed. The value of the sphere itself can be obtained. Thereby, the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113, and the number of holding balls of the variable display managed by the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c are affected by noise or the like, and are the main control device. Even if the number of balls held in 110 is changed from the actual number of balls held for variable display, the deviation can be corrected by the next command of the number of held balls received.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of balls to be held based on the number of balls to hold, and the display hold device for notifying the number of balls to be held to the display controller 114 each time the number of balls to hold changes. Send the ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the number of reserved balls on the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of reserved balls notified by the display reserved ball number command.

  Special symbol 2 reservation sphere number counter 203e, the variable display of the special symbol (the 1st symbol) which is done with the 1st symbol indicator 37 on the basis of the entry to the 2nd entry port 640 (starting winning) (the 3rd symbol) This is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display performed on the display device 81 up to a maximum of four times. The initial value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is set to zero, and the maximum value is 4 each time a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 and the number of holding balls in variable display increases. The value is incremented by 1 (see S410 in FIG. 36). On the other hand, the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the special symbol is newly executed (see S205 of FIG. 34). The value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is also notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the holding ball number command, similarly to the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d.

  The normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is a maximum of 4 times the number of holding balls (standby number) of variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed on the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the sphere in the through gate 67. Is a counter that counts up to. The initial value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is set to zero, and every time the ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of holding balls for variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4 ( (See S1504 in FIG. 41). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S1405 in FIG. 40).

  When the sphere passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the ordinary symbol holding sphere number counter 203f (holding number M of the variable display in the ordinary symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired. The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c (S705 of FIG. 39). On the other hand, when the sphere passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c (S703: No of FIG. 39). ).

  The probability variation flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the current game state is a probability variation state of a special symbol (during a probability variation of a special symbol). If the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON, it indicates that the game state is a probability variation state of the special symbol, and if it is OFF, it is a low probability state of the special symbol. In the present embodiment, the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON at the end of the jackpot game in which the jackpot type is "jackpot B" or "jackpot C" (see S1113 in FIG. 43). Further, the probability variation flag 203g is a big hit by the special symbol lottery, and is set to OFF when the start of the big hit is set (see S219 in FIG. 34). It should be noted that in the initialized state (that is, the state in which the pachinko machine 10 is powered on with the RAM erase switch 122 pressed), the probability variation flag 203g is reset to off, and a normal power shutdown occurs. In such a case, the state immediately before the power shutdown occurs is backed up.

  The time saving counter 203h is a counter for counting the remaining time saving period (the number of fluctuations of the special symbol) in the time saving state (time saving state) of the normal symbol. At this time saving counter 203h, 100 is set at the end of the jackpot game in which the jackpot type is "jackpot A" (see S1112 in FIG. 43). That is, in the present embodiment, when the probability variation state is not set after the jackpot game, the time saving state of 100 times is given.

  The operation scenario storage area 203i is an area for reading and storing the operation scenario from the movable valve operation scenario table 202f when the operation control of the movable valve 750 (see S1009 in FIG. 46) is started. The operation control of the movable valve 750 is performed based on the operation scenario stored in the operation scenario storage area 203i.

  The operation counter 203j is a counter used when executing the operation control of the storage device (the first storage device 770, the second storage device 771). Every time the storage valve operation process (see S1206 in FIG. 45) is executed, 1 is added (S1302), and the operation control based on the value of the counter is executed.

  The release flag 203k is a flag for determining that the second frame button (release button) 22b has been operated. If it is ON, the second frame button (release button) 22b has been operated. Is turned off, it means that the second frame button (release button) 22b is not operated. The release flag 203k is set to ON when it is determined that the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated in the storage control process (see S1008 of FIG. 44) (S1202 of FIG. 44: Yes), The storage valve operation process (S1206 of FIG. 45) is executed by being set to ON, and is set to OFF when the storage valve operation process (S1206 of FIG. 45) is completed (see S1309 of FIG. 45).

  The remaining ball timer flag 203m is a flag that is set to ON in the winning process (see S1010 of FIG. 47) executed to determine whether or not a ball normally wins the specific general ball entrance 630 ( 47) (see S1504 in FIG. 47), which is used to start counting of a remaining ball timer described later.

  The remaining ball timer 203n is counted to specify the normal range in the winning process (see S1010 of FIG. 47) executed to determine whether or not the ball normally wins in the specific general ball entrance 630. It is a timer. Even if the count value of the remaining ball timer 203n reaches the upper limit (a value corresponding to 1 second), if no ball enters the specific general entrance 630, an error command is set.

  The movable valve initial setting flag 203p is a flag that is set to ON to start the operation control of the movable valve 750, and sets the operation setting of the movable valve in the startup process (see FIG. 41) of the main controller 110. It is set to ON when performing (see S914 in FIG. 41).

  The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110.

  Returning to FIG. 19, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. In the input / output port 205, a payout control device 111, a voice lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a large opening opening solenoid for closing or opening the specific winning opening 65a and an electric role. The solenoid 209 including a solenoid for driving an object, the storage valve solenoid 770b for driving the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a, and the movable valve 750 are projected (allowed) or buried (restricted). A movable valve solenoid 751 is connected to the MPU 201, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to them via the input / output port 205.

  Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), a RAM erasing switch (FIG. 7, 122) circuit 253, which will be described later, provided in the power supply device 115, and a storage valve of the storage device. The second frame button (cancellation button) 22b that is operated when releasing is connected, and the MPU 201 outputs signals from the various switches 208 and the second frame button (cancellation button) 22b and the RAM erase switch (see FIG. (7, 122) various kinds of processing are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a computing device, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory and the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and data can be retained (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, like the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 40) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, etc. are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not to the main control device 110.

  The firing control device 112 controls the ball firing unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 issues an instruction to fire a sphere, the sphere launching unit 112a has a launching strength corresponding to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet, which are not shown, and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the touch handle 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop handle 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated) on condition that the operation handle is not operated. The firing solenoid is excited according to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice in the voice output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, and outputs and changes the lighting and turn-off of the lamp display device 227 (the decoration lamp 227a, the transmission lamp 227b, the other lamp 227c, etc.). The display control (variable display) is performed by the display control device 114, and the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 and the like are controlled. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the first frame button (effect button) 22a, etc. are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the first frame button (production button) 22a, and when the player operates the first frame button (production button) 22a, the third symbol display device 81. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the stage displayed by and the effect contents at the time of the super reach, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image according to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and controls the display of the error command including the type of the error. Send to device 114. In the display control device 114, control is performed to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  Next, details of the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 to 27. FIG. 26A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 26A, the ROM 222 has at least a fluctuation pattern selection table 222a, a movable valve operation scenario 222b, a music information storage area 222c, and a ball entry timing setting table 222d.

  The variation pattern selection table 222a is based on the variation pattern command output from the main control unit 110 of the voice lamp control device 113, and the rough variation content (variation time, variation type (reach, deviation, etc.)) indicated by the variation pattern command. ) Is used to determine more detailed fluctuation contents. Thereby, a wider variety of variation modes can be determined. Here, with respect to the rough variation contents instructed from the main control device 110, one variation mode among a plurality of types is determined by lottery.

  The movable valve operation scenario 222b is provided in order for the voice lamp control device 113 side to grasp the operating condition of the movable valve 750 whose operation is controlled by the main control device 110, and is stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. This is an area in which the information stored in the movable valve operation scenario storage area 202e and the movable valve operation scenario table 202f that are stored is stored.

  Here, the content of the movable valve operation scenario 222b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the movable valve operation scenario 222b. As shown in FIG. 27A, in the movable valve operation scenario 222b, the same information as the movable valve operation scenario stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 is associated with the value of the movable valve operation counter 223t described later. Has been. Furthermore, scenario groups are set for a plurality of consecutive scenario types. Thus, the operation status (current operation status and future operation status) of the movable valve can be grasped also on the voice lamp controller side based on the movable valve status command output from the main controller 110 side. A scenario group set for a plurality of consecutive scenario types is used to determine whether or not the operating state of the movable valve is an operating state advantageous to the player.

  The music information storage area 222c is an area in which music information used for operation effects is stored, and is referred to when setting the display position of the effect pointer for the music used for operation effects.

  Here, the contents of the music information storage area 222c will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the music information storage area 222c. As shown in FIG. 28, in the music information storage area 222c, music data 222c1 and range data (range 1 data 222c2, range 2 data) set for each range type obtained by dividing the range of the music data 222c1 by a predetermined threshold value. 222c3) are stored.

  The music data 222c1 is information (scale, tempo, etc.) related to the music executed (reproduced) in the operation effect, and the range type data (range 1 data 222c2, range 2 data 222c3) based on this information is set. Has been done.

  The tone range type data (tone range 1 data 222c2, tone range 2 data 222c3) is information set by dividing the music data 222c1 into a plurality of tone ranges (tone range 1 (treble range) and tone range 2 (low range)). In this information, the position corresponding to the tempo of the music executed in the operation effect (the position where the note is written in the scale of the music data 222c1) is set as the effect pointer displayable area. In this way, by setting the displayable area of the effect pointer used in the operation effect in advance for the music data, when changing the display position of the effect pointer with respect to the operation effect, the operation effect is executed. The effect pointer can be displayed at a timing corresponding to the music to be played (reproduced) without any discomfort.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 28, in the musical composition executed (reproduced) by the operation effect, the range 1 and range 2 are different in the number of notes to be noted, so the range 2 data is more than the range 1 data 222c2. Many effect pointer displayable areas are set in 222c3. In other words, the range in which the effect pointer can be displayed in the range 1 data 222c2 is wider than that in the range 2 data. In this way, by setting the effect pointer displayable area for each musical range to the music executed (reproduced) in the operation effect, it is possible to execute different operation effects using the same music. Becomes Therefore, it is possible to reduce the amount of data required to provide the player with various operation effects.

  Furthermore, in the operation effect, when the player can select the interval at which the operating means (the first frame button 22a and the second frame button 22b) is operated, the range corresponding to the operation interval selected by the player is used. The operation effect desired by the player can be executed only by executing the operation effect using the type data (range 1 data 222c2, range 2 data 222c3).

  In addition, when a plurality of range type data is created from one piece of music data in this way and the operation effect corresponding to the range range data selected from the range range data is executed, the selected range range data is used. It is preferable that the corresponding sound is output when the operating means is operated. This makes it possible to give a sense of unity to the player's operation and the operation effect when executing the operation effect with different range types for one music piece. The staging effect can be enhanced.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a plurality of range data (range 1 data 222c2, range 2 data 222c3) is stored for one piece of music data 222c1 in the music information storage area 222c, but other than that, For example, for one piece of music data 222c1, type data may be set for each of a plurality of musical instruments used, or type data may be set for each of a plurality of different tempos.

  Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26B is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. In the RAM 223, a command storage area 223a, a first special symbol holding sphere number counter 223b, a second special symbol holding sphere number counter 223c, a normal symbol holding sphere number counter 223d, a fluctuation start flag 223e, a stop type selection Flag 223f, production counter 223g, round number accumulation counter 223h, probability variation state flag 223i, time saving state counter 223j, storage state flag 223k, storage upper limit flag 223m, ball passing flag 223n, release operation flag 223p. A release state flag 223q, an effect temporary storage area 223r, a movable valve state storage area 223s, a movable valve operation counter 223t, a movable valve first flag 223u, a closing timing storage area 223v, and a timing effect setting flag 223w. , Production running flag 23x, a pressing period information storage area 223y, a difficulty level storage area 223aa, a difficulty level selection flag 223ab, a ball passing information storage area 223ac, a ball entry timing storage area 223ad, and another memory area 223z. ing.

  The command storage area 223a is an area in which various commands output from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 are temporarily stored until processing for the commands is executed. Specifically, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 50) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a is read out, and the command determination process is executed. , The command is analyzed, and the process according to the command is performed.

  The first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b, and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c is a variable effect (variable display) performed on the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), It is a counter that counts up to 4 times the number of holding balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable effect held in the main controller 110 for each special symbol type. The first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b corresponds to the number of holding balls of the variable effect based on the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c, the second special symbol ( Corresponds to the number of reserved balls of the variation effect based on the lottery of the special symbol 2).

  As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Cannot get the value of. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, the number of holding balls is counted based on the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b, the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c. The number of reserved balls is managed for each type of special symbol.

  Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of holding balls of the variable display is added by entering the first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, or in the main controller 110 special symbols When the variable display in is executed and the number of holding balls is subtracted, the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction, or the number of holding balls indicating the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e The command is transmitted to the voice lamp controller 113.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, from the holding ball number command, the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110, or the special symbol 2 holding ball The value of the number counter 203e is acquired and stored in the first special symbol holding sphere number counter 223b and the second special symbol holding sphere number counter 223c (see S2211 in FIG. 50). In this way, in the voice lamp control device 113, the value of the first special symbol holding ball counter 223b, the second special symbol holding ball counter 223c is updated according to the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the values of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d of the main controller 110 and the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e.

  The value of the first special symbol holding sphere counter 223b, the second special symbol holding sphere counter 223c is used to display the holding sphere number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of holding balls indicated by the command in the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c in response to receiving the holding ball number command. Together with the first special symbol holding sphere number counter 223b after storage, in order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the second special symbol holding sphere number counter 223c, the display holding sphere number command to the display control device 114 Send.

  In the display control device 114, when receiving the display holding ball number command, the value of the holding ball number indicated by the command, that is, the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113, the second special symbol The drawing of the image is controlled so that the number of holding balls corresponding to the number of holding balls counter 223c is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b, the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c is synchronized with the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d, the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. However, its value is changed. Therefore, the number of reserved sphere numbers displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 is also synchronized with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved sphere counter 203e of the main controller 110. You can change it while doing it. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of holding balls whose variable display is held.

  The normal symbol holding sphere number counter 223d increases or decreases the value according to the content of the received command when the command set when the value of the normal symbol holding sphere counter 203f of the main control device 110 increases or decreases. It is a counter that is used to synchronize the number of holding balls of the normal symbol managed by the main controller 110 side with the number of holding balls of the ordinary symbol managed by the voice lamp controller 113 side. is there. The value of this normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is used, for example, when displaying the holding sphere number of the normal symbol on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, as for the detailed contents when the value of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, when the number of reserved spheres of the special symbol described above is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, Since it is the same, the description thereof will be omitted.

  The fluctuation start flag 223e is turned on when the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S2202 in FIG. 50), and is turned off when the fluctuation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S2702 in FIG. 55). When the variation start flag 223e is turned on, the display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S2102) of the main process (see FIG. 49) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving the variation pattern command for display, with the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display, the variable display of the third symbol is performed on the third symbol display device 81, The display control of the variation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223f is turned on when the stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S2205 in FIG. 50), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S2710 in FIG. 55). When the stop type selection flag 223f is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type (a big hit type in the case of a big hit) extracted from the received stop type command.

  The effect counter 223g is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, and the like. The effect counter 223g is composed of a 1-byte loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 198, and the value is incremented by 1 and updated each time the main process (see FIG. 49) is executed. . The effect counter 223g has a plurality of counters (not shown), and when the effect pattern is determined by referring to a plurality of counter values in one loop process, different counter values are used. Used. As a result, when setting one effect pattern, the same counter value is not used at a plurality of places, so that it is possible to suppress the deviation of the effect pattern to be set. Note that the effect pattern may be set using each value calculated by performing different processing on the value acquired from the same counter. Specifically, among the effect patterns, one digit of the obtained value is referred to in one selection, ten digit of the obtained value is referred to in another selection, and one digit of the acquired value is referred to in another selection. You may make it refer to the ones digit of the obtained value by multiplying by the value which tripled the place of 10 times the value which multiplied the tens place by 5 times. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the deviation of the effect pattern to be set while reducing the number of counters used when setting the effect pattern.

  The round number cumulative counter 223h is a counter for counting the number of rounds in the big hit game, and when a round number command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received, it is updated to a value corresponding to the command ( The value of the counter is reset to 0 in the jackpot ending effect process (S2504 in FIG. 53) (S2513 in FIG. 53). In the voice lamp control device 113, the display round number command is set based on the round number cumulative counter 223h (S2611, S2614 in FIG. 54).

  The probability variation state flag 223i is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the probability variation state of the special symbol. If the probability variation state flag 223i is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is a probability variation state of the special symbol, and if it is off, it is a low probability state of the special symbol. The probability variation state flag 223i is updated according to the notification content of the state command output from the main control device 110. Depending on the state of the probability variation state flag 223i, it is determined whether or not the current state is the probability variation state of the special symbol, and the corresponding effect is set. More specifically, it is determined whether or not to display the right-handed navigation image displayed in the special symbol probability change state, or whether to display the right-handed warning image when the right-handed game is executed in the normal state. To determine

  The time saving state counter 223j is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a time saving state of a normal symbol. If the time saving state counter 223j is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, and if it is off, it is in the normal state of the normal symbol (low probability state). At this time, the time saving state counter 223j is updated according to the notification content of the state command output from the main control device 110. According to the state of the time saving state counter 223j, it is determined whether or not the current time is the time saving state of the normal symbol, and the corresponding effect is set. More specifically, it is determined whether or not to display the right-handed navigation image displayed in the time saving state of the normal symbol, and whether or not to display the right-handed warning image in the normal state.

  The storage state flag 223k is a flag for determining that a sphere is stored in the storage channel 700e, and is set based on the detection result of the storage detection sensor S2 provided in the storage channel 700e. Is done. When the storage state flag 223k is on, it indicates that the sphere is stored in the storage channel 700e, and when it is off, it indicates that the sphere is not stored in the storage channel 700e. The storage state flag 223k is set to ON (see S2853 in FIG. 57) when it is determined that the storage detection sensor S2 detects a sphere in the storage state monitoring process (see S2116 in FIG. 57). When it is determined that the sensor S2 does not detect a sphere, the sensor S2 is set to off (S2855 in FIG. 57). Then, in the variable display setting process (see S2114 in FIG. 55), when the variation pattern of the chance pattern is acquired (S2704: Yes in FIG. 55), it is referred to (S2705 in FIG. 55). Here, when the storage state flag 223k is set to ON (S2705 of FIG. 55: Yes), an effect (see FIG. 13) of operating the second frame button (release button) 22b is executed.

  The storage upper limit flag 223m is a flag for determining that the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 700e has reached the upper limit number (five in the present embodiment), and is stored in the storage channel 700e. Settings are made based on the detection result of the storage upper limit sensor S1 provided. When the storage upper limit flag 223m is on, it indicates that the upper limit number of balls is stored in the storage channel 700e, and when it is off, the upper limit number of balls is not stored in the storage channel 700e. Indicates that. The storage upper limit flag 223m is set to ON when the storage upper limit sensor S1 determines that a sphere is detected in the storage state monitoring process (see S2116 in FIG. 57) (see S2858 in FIG. 57), and the storage upper limit When it is determined that the sensor S1 does not detect a sphere, the sensor S1 is set to off (S2862 in FIG. 57). Then, in the big hit medium effect process (see S2504 of FIG. 54), when a predetermined round (7 or 15 rounds in this embodiment) is entered (S2605: yes of FIG. 54), the process is referred to (S2606 of FIG. 54). Here, when the storage upper limit flag 223m is set to ON (S2606 of FIG. 54: Yes), an effect (see FIG. 11) of operating the second frame button (release button) 22b is executed.

  The sphere passage flag 223n is a flag for determining that the sphere has passed a predetermined area (area where the first sphere passage sensor S3 is provided) in the board unit 700. If the sphere passage flag 223n is on, it indicates that the sphere has passed the predetermined region, and if it is off, the sphere has not passed the predetermined region (for example, a predetermined period after the sphere passed the predetermined region (for example, 1 second) has elapsed). The sphere passage flag 223n is set to ON when the first sphere passage sensor S3 (see FIG. 3) detects passage of a sphere in the sphere passage monitoring process (see S1815 in FIG. 56) (S2804 in FIG. 56). Similarly, in the ball passing monitoring process (see S1815 in FIG. 56), when the ball passes through the specific general entrance 630 within a predetermined period after the ball passing flag 223n is set to ON (SS2806 in FIG. 56: Yes), when the second ball passage sensor S4 detects a sphere (S2807: Yes in FIG. 56), or when a predetermined period has elapsed (S2808: Yes in FIG. 56), it is set to OFF (in FIG. 56). S2813).

  The release operation flag 223p is a flag for determining whether or not the second frame button (release button) 22b has been operated. If the release operation flag 223p is on, it indicates that the second frame button (release button) 22b has been operated, and if it is off, the second frame button (release button) 22b is not operated. Indicates. The release operation flag 223p is set to ON (see S2219 in FIG. 50) when the release operation command is received (see S2218 in FIG. 50) in the command determination process (see S2113 in FIG. 50), and the storage device related process is performed. When a command indicating the closed (non-release) state is received (see S2217 in FIG. 52) (S2404: Yes in FIG. 52), it is set to OFF (see S2406 in FIG. 52).

  The release state flag 223q is a flag that determines whether or not the storage device (the first storage device 770, the second storage device 771) is in the open (release) state. If the release state flag 223q is on, it indicates that the storage device (first storage device 770, second storage device 771) is in an open (release) state, and if it is off, the storage device (first storage device 770, the second storage device 771) is in a closed (non-released) state. The release state flag 223q is stored device-related processing (see S2217 of FIG. 52) that is executed when a storage device-related command is received (S2216 of FIG. 50: Yes) in the command determination process (see S2113 of FIG. 50). When the open state command (the storage state command corresponding to the release state) is received (S2401: Yes in FIG. 52), it is set to ON (see S2402 in FIG. 52), and the closed state command (the storage state corresponding to the non-released state). When the status command) is received (S2404: Yes in FIG. 52), it is set to OFF (see S2405 in FIG. 52). When the release state flag 223q is set to ON, the sphere passage monitoring process (see S2115 of FIG. 56) is executed, and the spheres stored in the storage device (first storage device 770, second storage device 771) flow down. The situation is monitored.

  The effect temporary storage area 223r is an area for temporarily storing the effect contents that have been set until the effect is executed, and, for example, an effect mode of a timing effect (operation effect) executed during a big hit. During the period from the set timing (7th or 15th round) to the timing (8th or 16th round) of executing the timing effect (operation effect) during the jackpot, the content of the timing effect (operation effect) is temporarily stored. .. In the effect temporary storage area 223r, in the timing effect common setting process (see S3105 in FIG. 62), when it is determined that the effect set this time is the timing effect (operation effect) executed during the big hit (in FIG. 62). S3210: Yes), the set effect mode is stored (see S3214 in FIG. 62), and in the big hit medium effect process (see S2504 in FIG. 54), the timing effect (operation effect) is executed in a round (8 or 16 rounds). ) Is executed (S2609 of FIG. 54: Yes), it is read (S2611 of FIG. 54).

  The movable valve state storage area 223s is an area for storing information for grasping the operating condition of the movable valve 750 (see FIG. 3) on the voice lamp control device 113 side, and the value of the movable valve operation counter 223t described later. In response to the above, the operating status of the movable valve 750 is updated at any time. In the movable valve state storage area 223s, when the movable valve state information including the initial information is received in the movable valve state command process (see S2215 in FIG. 51) (S2302 in FIG. 51: Yes), the movable valve operation scenario 222b is displayed. Information is stored (see S2303 in FIG. 51), and the operating state of the movable valve 750 is updated based on the value of the movable valve operation counter 223t. Every time a movable valve state command is received from the main controller 110, it is determined whether the information stored in the movable valve state storage area 223s matches the content of the movable valve state command (S2309 in FIG. 51). . Further, the movable valve closing timing is stored in the closing timing storing area based on the information stored in the movable valve state storing area 223s (see S2306 in FIG. 51).

  The movable valve operation counter 223t is a counter used for grasping the operation status of the movable valve 750 (see FIG. 3) on the voice lamp controller 113 side, and the movable valve operation counter 223t stored in the movable valve state storage area 223s. It is for updating scenario information. The movable valve operation counter 223t is set to "1" when the movable valve operation scenario is set in the movable valve state storage area 223s (see S2303 in FIG. 51) in the movable valve state command process (see S2215 in FIG. 51). A value is set (S2304 in FIG. 51), and the counter value is updated each time the movable valve operation counter updating process (S2112 in FIG. 64) executed in the main process (see FIG. 49) of the voice lamp controller 113 is executed. “1” is added (S3403 in FIG. 64). If the counter value has reached the upper limit, the counter value is set to "1" again (S3404 in FIG. 64). In this way, by updating the value of the movable valve operation counter 223t in the process (main process) executed periodically (1 ms), the operation status of the movable valve 750 is appropriately managed on the voice lamp control device 113 side. be able to.

  The movable valve initial flag 223u is a flag for determining that the pachinko machine 10 is in a state immediately after the power is turned on, and is a state in which a movable valve operation scenario is initially set in the movable valve state storage area 223s. It is used to determine whether or not. If the movable valve initial flag 223u is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a state immediately after the power is turned on, and if it is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is not immediately after the power is turned on. The movable valve initial flag 223u is set to ON in the startup process (see FIG. 48) of the voice lamp control device 113 (see S2013 in FIG. 48) and is referred to in the movable valve state command process (see FIG. 51) (see FIG. 51). 51 (S2301), the movable valve operation scenario is set to the movable valve state storage area 223s and then set to OFF (S2305 in FIG. 51). Further, if the movable valve initial command is not included in the movable valve state command received from the main control device 110 even though the movable valve initial flag 223u is set to ON, an error command is set (FIG. 51). S2307).

  The closing timing storage area 223v is an area for storing the closing timing of the movable valve 750, and based on the information set in the movable valve state storage area 223s, the closing timing of the movable valve 750 (that is, the sphere The timing of entering the specific general entrance 630 is stored. This closing timing storage area 223v receives the movable valve state command including the initial information from the main control device 110 in the movable valve state command process (see S2215 of FIG. 51) (S2302 of FIG. 51: Yes), and moves the movable valve state. When the movable valve operation scenario is set in the storage area 223s, the closing timing of the movable valve is calculated based on the movable valve operation scenario, and the calculated closing timing is stored (S2306 in FIG. 51). The closing timing stored in the closing timing storage area 223v is referred to when setting the effect pointer in the timing effect (operation effect).

  The timing effect setting flag 223w is a flag for determining whether to execute a timing effect (operation effect) for executing an effect that causes the player to operate the operation means (first frame button 22a, second frame button 22b). If it is ON, it means that the condition for executing the timing effect (operation effect) is satisfied, and if it is OFF, it means that the condition for executing the timing effect (operation effect) is not satisfied. In the present embodiment, a specific variation pattern (chance variation type) is selected as a condition for executing the timing effect (operational effect), and the sphere is stored in the storage channel 700e, or A state in which a predetermined round (8R, 16R) during the jackpot game is started, is set.

  In the timing effect setting flag 223w, the variation pattern acquired in the variation display setting process (see S2114 in FIG. 55) is the chance pattern (variation pattern indicating the chance variation type) (S2704 in FIG. 55: Yes), and the storage state When it is determined that the flag 223k is on (S2705: Yes in FIG. 55), it is set to on. In addition, in the hit related process (S2221 of FIG. 53), when the interval command indicating the end of 7 or 15 rounds is received (S2507 of FIG. 53: Yes) and it is determined that the storage upper limit flag 223m is ON (FIG. 53). S2508: Yes) is set to ON.

  When the timing effect setting flag 223w is set to ON, the timing effect (operation effect) is set in the timing effect setting process (see S2111 in FIG. 60) (see S3102 to S3105 in FIG. 60). Then, if the timing effect (operation effect) set this time is to be executed during the change of the special symbol, in the timing effect common setting process (see S3105 in FIG. 62), after setting the display timing effect command. (Refer to S3211 of FIG. 62), if it is set to OFF (S3213 of FIG. 62) and the timing effect (operation effect) set this time is to be executed during the big hit game, big hit medium effect processing (FIG. In S2504 of 54, a round in which the timing effect (operation effect) is executed is started (S2609 of FIG. 54: Yes), and after the display effect round command is set (see S2611 of FIG. 54), it is turned off. It is set (S2613 in FIG. 54).

  The effect execution flag 223x is a flag for determining whether the timing effect (operation effect) is being executed. If it is on, it indicates that the timing effect (operation effect) is being executed, and if it is off. For example, it indicates that the timing effect (operation effect) is not executed. The effect execution flag 223x is referred to when determining whether the operation on the operation means (the first frame button 22a, the second frame button 22b) is an operation based on the timing effect (operation effect). The effect execution flag 223x is set to ON (S3212 in FIG. 62) after setting the display timing effect command in the timing effect common setting process (see S3105 in FIG. 62). ). Further, in the big hit mid-sized production process (see S2504 of FIG. 54), the round in which the timing production (operation production) is executed is started (S2609: Yes of FIG. 54), and after setting the display production round command (FIG. 54). (See S2611) of FIG. 54). Then, when the set timing effect (operation effect) is completed, it is set to off.

  The pressing period information storage area 223y is an operation means (first frame button 22a or second frame) set to correspond to the display timing of the pointer (effect pointer, hit pointer) displayed in the timing effect (operation effect). This is an area for storing the operation timing of the button 22b). In this pressing period information storage area 223y, a successful pressing period is set in correspondence with the display pointer (effect pointer, hit pointer) set in the timing effect common setting process (see S3105 in FIG. 62) (FIG. 62). See S3209). The successful press period set here is the timing when the frame buttons (first frame button 22a, second frame button 22b) are pressed in the frame button input monitoring / effect process (see S2107 in FIG. 59). It is referred to for determining whether or not (see S3005 and S3006 in FIG. 59).

  The difficulty storage area 223aa is an area for storing the difficulty level information of the timing effect (operation effect) selected by the player. The difficulty level storage area 223aa stores the difficulty level information selected in the frame button input monitoring / effect process (see S2107 in FIG. 59) (see S3012 in FIG. 59). The information stored in the difficulty storage area 223aa is referred to when setting the effect mode of the corresponding timing effect (S3133 in FIG. 61 (a)), and is cleared when the corresponding timing effect (operation effect) ends. It

  The difficulty level selection flag 223ab is a flag for determining whether an effect for selecting the difficulty level in the timing effect (operation effect) is being executed (is it a timing at which the difficulty level can be selected), and is ON. If it is OFF, it means that it is not a timing when the difficulty level can be selected. The difficulty level selection flag 223ab is referred to when determining whether the operation on the operation means (the first frame button 22a, the second frame button 22b) is an operation based on the effect of selecting the difficulty level. This difficulty level selection flag 223ab is set to ON when it is determined that the first round has started (S2602: Yes in FIG. 54) in the big hit medium effect process (see S2504 in FIG. 54), and the first round ends. When it is determined that it has been done (S2602: No in FIG. 54), it is set to OFF.

  The sphere passage information storage area 223ac is an area for storing information indicating a passage period until the sphere stored in the storage channel 700e passes through the specific general entrance 630 or the outlet 700b of the board unit 700. Is. The position where the pointer (effect pointer) is displayed in the timing effect (operation effect) is corrected based on the information indicating the passage period stored in the ball passing information storage area 223ac. This sphere passage information storage area 223ac stores information indicating the passage period calculated in the sphere passage monitoring process (see S2115 of FIG. 56) (S2812 of FIG. 56), and timing effect correction process (see S3106 of FIG. 63). (See S3301 in FIG. 63). The sphere passage information storage area 223ac is configured to be able to store a plurality of pieces of information (for example, 1000 times) indicating a passage period. Therefore, since it is possible to correct the timing effect (operation effect) by using the passing period calculated a plurality of times, for example, the effect content is corrected based on the occurrence of an unexpectedly moving sphere. Therefore, it is possible to set an appropriate timing effect (operation effect).

  Although the ball passage information storage area 223ac is provided in the RAM 223 in the present embodiment, for example, the ball passage information storage area 223ac is provided in a recording medium capable of holding information even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. You may.

  The ball entry timing storage area 223ad stores the ball entry timing set in the timing effect correction process (see S3106 in FIG. 63) based on the passage period calculated in the ball pass monitoring process (see S2115 in FIG. 56). It is an area for doing. Based on the ball entry timing stored in the ball entry timing storage area 223ad, the effect mode (effect pointer) of the timing effect (operation effect) is set.

  The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-mentioned data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the voice lamp controller 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . The resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and the output port 239 is connected via the bus line 241. Further, the third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81, even if it is a different model with a lottery probability of being a jackpot of a special symbol or the number of prize balls paid out in one jackpot of a special symbol. Since there are models having completely the same specifications, the display control device 114 is used as a common component to reduce the cost.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads out and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the power is turned on (including power recovery from a power failure. The same applies hereinafter), the MPU 231 can be system reset by the power supply device 115. When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a. Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes the instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional game machine. Instead of storing the data, the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stored.

  Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of achieving a large capacity with a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the character ROM 234 stores the control program and the like, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow especially when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data consecutively arranged on a plurality of pages, the data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is designated for reading the data of the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading out data that is not continuous, it takes a long time each time the data is read out. As described above, since the NAND flash memory has a low reading speed, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the commands that form the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. To store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as will be described later, and data is read and written at high speed, so that the MPU 231 can read the instructions that form the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and by using the third symbol display device 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after releasing the system reset via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 converts the image data stored in a character storage area 234a2, which will be described later, of the character ROM 234 into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores fixed value data for driving most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2 and further store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, the control program and the fixed value data are provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and, for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Is read and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to its nature, the NAND flash memory 234a has a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and reads and writes data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Convert the data address of.

  Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error data is based on erroneous data. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 to generate various images.

  Further, the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data block. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When the address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b includes one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address. Data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside while using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or is designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237, for example. One page of data including data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is set to the other. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ) Is configured. In the NOR ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 is the first program after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes the boot program after the system reset is released. This allows the display control device 114 to be in a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes)) are stored. It should be noted that the number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is set appropriately according to the specifications of the display control device 114. It may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and also designates the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d is stored in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. To output the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, increments the instruction pointer 231a by 1, and sets the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address designated by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present embodiment, not all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, but a predetermined number of commands from the first command to be processed by the MPU 231 in the boot program after the system reset is released are NOR type ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that, in reading the data of the first page, it takes a long time from the address designation to the data output. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read the data and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 designates the address “0000H” and then the instruction corresponding to the address “0000H”. It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 in the boot program after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. By doing so, when the address “0000H” is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately causes the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d to be stored in the buffer RAM 234c. , And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after the address “0000H” is designated, and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The program storage area of the work RAM 233 is a fixed amount of fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program for each predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed so as to be transferred to 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a different bank from the buffer RAM 234c.

  Since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, the process of resetting the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c again is unnecessary, and the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot pointer stored in the program storage area 233a becomes the instruction pointer 231a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a causes the instruction pointer 231a to be stored in the first predetermined area of the program storage area 233a. It is set to the address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1 are the control programs transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount. It is programmed so as to be included, and is programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot programs included in the control program.

  In this remaining boot program, all the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control programs are stored in the second program storage. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as the second predetermined address, an initialization process (see S5002 in FIG. 65) executed after the boot process (see S5001 in FIG. 65) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is completely executed by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and by using the third symbol display device 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

  As described above, the NOR ROM 234d does not store all boot programs, but stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Even if stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR ROM 234d having an extremely small capacity, it is possible to suppress the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time. You can

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 32) described later transmitted from the MPU 231 and selects one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the drawing processing of the image for one frame and the display processing of the image for one frame for the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment). Parallel processing in.

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process (see FIG. 67B), and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. By this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and gives the image controller 237 a drawing instruction. Therefore, the image controller 237 draws and displays the image. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the image drawing process and the display process have not been completed, so that the drawing of a new image is started during the drawing of an image, It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed in response to a new drawing instruction.

  The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The image drawing is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, the NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, but the reading speed is slower than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Is configured to. Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be immediately displayed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main controller 110 or the display controller 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until displaying some image on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when the display control device 114 draws an image using the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 needs to draw from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by, and the time required for the reading can be omitted, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a configured by an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The MPU 231 issues an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237 according to a transfer instruction or transfer data information of the drawing list, and the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (final address of storage source), transfer destination information (information indicating which of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 is to be transferred), and the start of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Address is included. Note that the storage source final address may be replaced with the data size of the image data to be transferred.

  The image controller 237 reads out one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a according to the various information of the transfer instruction. When the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in the RAM is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction are stored in the storage source end address.

  As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. You can Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image drawing and the image drawing are performed by a necessary time. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being delayed.

  Further, since the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. The unused period for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is retained without being overwritten during power-on, and at power-on the main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character symbol area. 235e, an error message image area 235f is provided, and at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from the time the power is turned on until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. Further, in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first entrance 64 and the second entrance This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on variation image that displays a lottery result performed by the main control device 110 in a variation effect when a ball entering the mouth 640 is detected.

  The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S5003 and S5004 in FIG. 65).

  Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be described. When the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b immediately after power-on. Then, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image on the third symbol display device. 81 to display.

  At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is the variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 causes the power-on main image. On the display screen of, the power-on fluctuation image of the "○" symbol at the lower right position toward the screen, and the power-on fluctuation image of the "x" symbol at the same position as the "○" symbol, the fluctuation period. Display alternately and repeatedly. Then, from the variation pattern command for display and the stop type command for display transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main controller 110, the lottery performed in the main controller 110 is selected. Judging the result, if it is a "special symbol big hit", a "○" symbol is displayed for a certain period after stopping the fluctuating effect, and if it is "off the special symbol", a "x" symbol is fluctuating after stopping the fluctuating effect. Display for a certain period.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a for the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instruct to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, a player or a person related to the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, an image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without any anxiety that the operation has stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. You can

  Also, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without any problem when the power is turned on. It can be immediately confirmed that the operation check efficiency is prevented from being deteriorated by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed for the character ROM 234.

  In addition, the player starts the game while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the entry into the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 is detected. If so, the power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in the power-on variation image area 235b, and the power-on variation image is alternately displayed on the third symbol display device. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 so as to be displayed at 81. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple change effect using the change image at power-on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, at the stage when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, image data corresponding to the variation effect image at power-on is already resident in the power-on variation image area 235b. When a ball is detected in the first ball entrance 64 while the time main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can

  Returning to FIG. 29, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The back image is an image displayed on the back side of the main symbol (third symbol), and for example, the city, the sea, the sky, etc. are displayed. A right-hand navigation image (see FIG. 11A) and the like are also stored in the rear image area 235c as rear images.

  The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, the image data corresponding to the above-mentioned ten types of main symbols with the numbers "0" to "9" which are the third symbols are resident. As a result, when performing the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. The variation production can be started quickly. Therefore, after the occurrence of the ball entering the first ball entrance 64, the variation effect is immediately started in the third symbol display device 81, although the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state that is not performed.

  Further, in the third symbol area 235d, as the main symbols to which the numbers "0" to "9" are not attached, the main symbols including the rear symbols such as a wooden box, the rear symbols and the planer, the furoshiki, the helmet character, etc. The image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect due to the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time elapses after one variable effect is stopped. To be As a result, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbol used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed according to various effects, and display control is performed by resident data corresponding to these characters in the character symbol area 235e. When changing the character design based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but rather in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading the image data that is resident in advance. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the character design can be immediately changed even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the voice lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even when the voice lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the error occurrence together with the error type by an error command. In the display control device 114, when the error command is received, an error message corresponding to the received error is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error from the viewpoints of preventing the player from cheating and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since image data corresponding to various error messages is previously resident in the error message image area 235f, the display control device 114, based on the received error command, displays the error message of the resident video RAM 235. By reading the image data resident in advance in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to sequentially read the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the error message corresponding to the error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that the data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data which is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

  Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 outputs the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub area in which the image data is to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data designated by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234 and transfers the read image data to the designated predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The image data transfer instruction is performed by the MPU 231 including transfer data information in a later-described drawing list instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, and thus the processing load can be reduced.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes the image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 into either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While developing the image, while the image is being developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously developed is read from the other frame buffer, and together with the drive signal, to the third symbol display device 81. Then, by transmitting the image information, the process for displaying the image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  In this way, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 develops the image for one frame drawn in one of the frame buffers and at the same time. It is possible to read out the image for one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer and display the read image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81.

  Then, the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third pattern display device 81 are the drawing processing of the image for one frame. The MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds to complete.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of 1 is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. It

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. It After that, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. Composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and an opening data transfer flag. 233i, a stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81. By using, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b is a display data table in which the display content to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time is displayed for one effect displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data. This is an area for storing the transfer data information of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one presentation displayed by the table, and the transfer data table that defines the transfer timing.

  These data tables are normally stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. When all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device. 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  Here, details of the various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command from the main control device 110, and for example, a variable effect and an opening effect. Display data tables corresponding to the round effect, ending effect, and demonstration effect are prepared.

  The variation effect is an effect which is started in the third symbol display device 81 when the display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the outage is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is jackpot A, jackpot B. If either of the above, the stop symbols shown for each jackpot are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  The opening effect is for informing the player that the pachinko machine 10 is now in a special game state and the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a that are normally closed are opened. The round effect is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started. The ending effect is an effect for informing the player of notifying the player of the end of the special game state (big hit state).

  As described above, the demonstration effect is an effect that is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect due to the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time elapses after one variable effect is stopped. That is, the third symbol, which is the main symbol to which the numbers “0” to “9” are not added, is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image is changed. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the hall-related person can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

  The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to each of the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. As for the variable display data table, which is the display data table for the variable effect, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set, one table is provided for each variable effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to an address representing a time (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. This is a detailed definition of the content (drawing content) of the image for one frame.

  For the drawing content, the type of the sprite is defined for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, and the semi-transparency are determined according to the type of the sprite. Drawing information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

  The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 which should display the sprite. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size set in advance for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement ratio. If the enlargement ratio is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than the standard size, and if the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite will be smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The semi-transparent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the semi-transparent value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite is displayed. The α blending information is information for identifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing a superimposing process with another sprite. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

  In the variable display data table, as a drawing content for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one rear image, nine third symbols (design 1, design 2, ...) And light in the image Drawing information for each sprite such as an effect that expresses the insertion of characters and a character used for various effects such as a boy image and characters is defined for each address. It should be noted that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in that frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are set with respect to the passage of time. Since it is fixed, the variable display data table defines only the rear surface type, which is information for specifying the type of the rear surface image. This back surface type displays one of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of the “town stage”, the “empty stage”, and the “island stage”), or the back surface A to Information that specifies whether to display a rear image different from C is described. In addition, the back surface type also includes information that specifies which back surface image to display when specifying that a back surface image different from the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed.

  When it is specified by this back surface type to display one of the back surfaces A to C, the MPU 231 specifies the back surface image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A to C as a drawing target. Also, the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame is specified in accordance with the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back surface image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back surface image to be displayed is specified based on the back surface type.

  In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which only the back side type is defined as the drawing content of the back side image in the display data table, but instead of this, the back side type and the range of the back side image corresponding to the back side type The position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time from the display of the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back surface image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time after the back surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from when the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 was displaying the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. The position is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time after the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) indicated by the position information is started.

  Further, the position information is, in accordance with the rear surface type, drawing of an image based on the information and the display data table indicating the elapsed time after the rear surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed (or the third symbol display device 81). Display) may be one of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of the display), and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back surface type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time after the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating that) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of the information indicating the elapsed time.

  For the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...), symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information indicating the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the variation until the predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop design in the immediately preceding variation effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Enter the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped with the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

  Since a unique number is attached to each of the third symbols, the variation symbol in the previous variable effect and the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main controller 110 are the third symbols. It is possible to easily identify the third symbol to be displayed from the offset information by managing the offset information by expressing the difference between the numbers assigned to the respective third symbols.

  Further, in the symbol offset information, the predetermined symbol is changed from the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed this time, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed. The time is set to be displayed. While the 3rd symbol is displayed at high speed, the 3rd symbol is invisible to the player, so during that time, the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one symbol offset information before. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect that is being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

  "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" which is the start address of the display data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 30) is the data table The “End” information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the display data table. Is listed.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and next, based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, An image content to be drawn is specified and a drawing list (see FIG. 32) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, the drawing instruction of the image is given. As a result, the drawing content is specified in the order defined by the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as defined by the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, or the like, Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, like a conventional pachinko machine, the effect images are diversified. Since a large load is applied to the start-up and execution of a complicated and enormous program, the processing capability of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable effect images is limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, since the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d, the display is performed. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, a wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared for each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting winning. On the other hand, in game machines such as pachinko machines other than gaming machines, the display content cannot be predicted because the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the rendering mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared for each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, it is resident in the image data of the sprite used in the effect specified in the display data table. Transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the general-purpose video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal-use video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

  If all the image data of sprites used in the effect defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) at which transfer is to be started at a time indicated by the address. Is described (corresponding to the addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 31). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data table is set, and the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in the transfer data table in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data to start the transfer does not exist at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, the transfer target image data to start the transfer corresponding to the address does not exist. Null data that means is defined (corresponds to the address “0002H” in FIG. 31).

  The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address. Is included.

  It should be noted that "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the start address of the transfer data table, like the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 31, "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table. Is listed.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d to create a drawing list (see FIG. 32) described later. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite at which the transfer should be started is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the created drawing list. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 31, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information defined at the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added to the drawing list and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data for which transfer should be started, and it is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image necessary for display from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays display data according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The character ROM 234 can be surely transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  Further, the transfer data table defines transfer data information so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the process related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in the unit of sprite, the transfer of the image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to start the transfer at the time indicated by the address. Since the data information is defined, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, various effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) on the third symbol display device 81. This simple image display flag 233c is provided after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , Is set to ON in the main process (see FIG. 65) executed by the MPU 231 (see S5005 in FIG. 65). Then, by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to OFF (see S6605 in FIG. 76B).

  This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 every time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S5301 in FIG. 67B), and If the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S5308 of FIG. 67 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 67B) are displayed so that the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 67 (b) S5309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 68 to 72) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 73 to 75) are executed.

  Also, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S6501 in FIG. 76A), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Has resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 76B) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 77) for transferring the image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays the display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The display data table is selected and stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by one, and based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 for each frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 32) in which the instruction content of the image drawing is described is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1 and adds an image to the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 32) describing the drawing instruction content is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is a buffer for storing. When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all of the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data, which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 specifies the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f by one. If so (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 32) describing the instruction content of the image drawing to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Accordingly, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, it is necessary for drawing the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image necessary for display from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or the transfer data information of the transfer target image data should be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the respective buffers of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. Is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V-interruption process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interruption signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed (FIG. 67 (b). (See S5303)), the pointer update process (see S6205 of FIG. 73) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  The MPU 231 identifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d every time such pointer 233f is updated, and the drawing list to be described later. (Refer to FIG. 32), transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite at which transfer should be started is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add information to the created drawing list.

  As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, it is possible to display a wide variety of effects regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table until the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for the drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image necessary for display from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image of one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructing 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 32, the back image used in the image of one frame, the third symbol (symbol 1, (Pattern 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., Reserved ball count symbol 1, reserved ball count symbol 2, ..., Error For each sprite such as (pattern), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite, information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to scaling processing according to the magnification rate, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and semitransparency according to the semitransparent value. Processing is performed, composite processing with other sprites is performed according to α blending information, color tone correction processing is performed according to color information, and filtering processing is performed according to the information designated by the filter designation information. After that, an image obtained by performing various kinds of processing at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c designated by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 draws the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of the other image to be drawn (for example, a hold number that displays the number of held balls). Based on the image and a warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing an image for one frame is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, of the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Is generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 determines the sprite type according to the type. Then, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 sorts the sprites to be arranged on the rearmost side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and draws detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, and then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), Character Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, ..., Reserved sphere number pattern 1, reserved sphere number pattern 2, ..., Error pattern).

  The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

  When the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e includes transfer data information at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 acquires the transfer data information (the character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and the storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 displays an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets the time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 (see FIG. 67 (b ) Each time the display setting process of ()) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S6207 of FIG. 73). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the same when the effect ends. Perform various processing that should be performed.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i indicates that the image data corresponding to the sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S5002 in FIG. 65) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" indicating that the storage states for all the sprites are not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 77) executed by the MPU 231. Be seen. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction has been set is set to "ON" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. In addition, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as the one sprite will always be in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to the other sprites is set to "off".

  Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and refers to the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S6713 in FIG. 77). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the transfer target sprite is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S6714 in FIG. 77). The image controller 237 is caused to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the transfer target sprite is “ON”, the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of that image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress wasteful transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and it is possible to reduce the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer that expands an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c) (hereinafter referred to as “drawing target buffer”). If the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and if it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S6802 in FIG. 78).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process for expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 simultaneously reads the drawn image information that has been developed from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and outputs the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by reversing the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is "0", it is set to "1", and when it is "1", it is set to "0". Done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. The transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. The drawing process is performed every time the drawing process (see FIG. 67B) is executed (see S6802 in FIG. 78).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of 1 is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. It

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. It After that, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 33 to 47. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, a main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and a timer that is started regularly (in this embodiment, at an interval of 2 msec). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of description, first, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described, and then the startup process. The main processing will be described.

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a regular process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110 are read, the states of the switches are determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (300 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Furthermore, the first random number counter C1, the first random type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, each of the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per random number counter C4 is incremented by 1, and the counter values thereof are maximum values (in the present embodiment, When each reaches 300, 99, 239, 239), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

  Next, in addition to the processing for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, the special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). Then, the start winning process associated with the winning (starting prize) to the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 34 to 37.

  After executing the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106), and the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 is accompanied by the passage of a ball. Gate passing processing is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 38 and 39, respectively. After the through gate passage process is executed, the firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is ended. Note that the firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a and that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. This is a process of determining on / off of firing. The main controller 110 instructs the firing controller 112 to fire a sphere when the firing of the sphere is on.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33), the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37, and the third symbol display device. This is processing for controlling the variable display of the third symbol and the like performed in 81.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is now determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S201). As the big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37, and the big symbol of the special symbol in the third symbol display device 81 (including during the jackpot game of the special symbol) is being displayed, and the special symbol. During the predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in a big hit (S201: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

  If the special symbol is not a big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e (the number of times N2 the variable display is held in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S204).

  If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S205) and changed by calculation. The special symbol 2 reservation sphere number counter 203e which shows the value of reservation sphere number command (special figure 2 reservation sphere number command) is set (S206). The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 42) described later executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e are extracted from the holding ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the RAM 223. The special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 223c are respectively stored.

  After setting the special figure 2 reserved sphere number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding first area → execution area, the holding second area → holding first area, the holding third area → holding second area, the holding fourth area → holding third area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the special symbol variation start process for starting the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S213). The special symbol variation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S204, if the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 203e (N2) is determined to be 0 (S204: No), the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d (N1) Is acquired (S208), it is determined whether the value (N1) of the acquired special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S209). By the processing of S209, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d (N1) is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d (N1) is decremented by 1 (S210). , The special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d value (N1) changed by calculation is set to the holding sphere number command (special figure 1 holding sphere number command) (S211). After setting the special figure 1 reserved sphere number command by the process of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a is shifted (S212), and the process proceeds to S213.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. Yes (S214). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time If has not elapsed (S214: No), this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S214, when it is determined that the variable time has elapsed (S214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S215). The stop symbol is set in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol fluctuation start processing is executed, based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b, the special symbol lottery is performed. Be seen. More specifically, depending on the value of the first per random number counter C1, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit, and if the special symbol is a big hit, depending on the value of the first hit type counter C2. The jackpot A, the jackpot B, or the jackpot C is determined.

  In addition, in this embodiment, when it is a big hit A, a blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when it is a big hit B, a red LED is turned on. When the jackpot is C, the red LED is turned on, and when the jackpot is off, the green LED is turned on. It should be noted that the display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

  After the processing of S215 is finished, when the variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol lottery result (this lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is It is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S216). If the result of the lottery this time is a jackpot of the special symbol (S216: Yes), the opening scenario of the specific winning opening is set based on the jackpot type (S217), and then the jackpot start is set (S218). The open scenario specifically indicates the setting of the open pattern of the specific winning opening 65a. That is, in the 1st to 11th rounds and the 13th to 15th rounds, the specific winning opening 65a is set to be opened for a predetermined period (until 30 seconds elapses or until 10 balls are won), and in the 12th round, It shows that the specific winning opening 65a is set to be opened in a pattern (see FIG. 16) according to the jackpot type. When the process of S218 ends, the probability variation flag 203g is set to OFF (S219). Next, the hour / hour counter 203h is set to 0 (S220), and the process proceeds to S221.

  On the other hand, in the process of S216, if the current lottery result is out of alignment (S216: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving medium counter 203h is 1 or more (S222), and the value is not 1 or more (that is, 0). If it is determined that there is (S222: No), the process proceeds to S221. On the other hand, when it is determined that the hour / hour counter 203h is 1 or more (S222: Yes), the value of the hour / hour counter 203h is decremented by 1 (S223). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / hour counter 203h is 0 (S224). If it is determined that the value is greater than 0 (S224: No), the process proceeds to S221. On the other hand, when it is determined that the hour / hour counter 203h is 0 (S224: Yes), the process proceeds to S221.

  In the processing of S221, a stop command is set (S221). Then, this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the special symbol variation start process (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process (S213). This special symbol variation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 34) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33), and the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a Based on the values of various counters stored in the common execution area with the symbol 2 hold sphere storage area 203b, a lottery for "special jackpot" or "out of special symbol" (judgment determination) is performed, and first It is a process for determining the effect pattern (fluctuation effect pattern) of the fluctuation effect performed by the symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

  In the special symbol variation start process, first, the first random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2 stored in the common execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b. , And each value of the stop type selection counter C3 (S301).

  Next, it is determined whether the probability variation flag 203g of the RAM 203 is on (S302), and if it is on (S302: Yes), the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the high probability Based on the special symbol jackpot random number table of, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol jackpot is obtained from the first hit random number table 202a (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with each of the 10 random number values defined in the first random number table 202a. As described above, 10 random numbers "0 to 9" are set as the random numbers to be the big hits of the special symbol, and the value of the first random number counter C1 and the random number to be hit are the same. If you do, it is determined to be a jackpot of special symbols. When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  In this embodiment, the lottery for the special symbol 1 and the lottery for the special symbol 2 have the same determination value as a jackpot, but depending on whether the lottery is for the special symbol 1 or the lottery for the special symbol 2. Different random number values may be used. With this configuration, a random number value determined to be off in the first special symbol is configured to be determined to be a hit in the second special symbol, and a big hit bias can be suppressed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the lottery for the special symbol 1 and the lottery for the special symbol 2 have the same determination value as the jackpot, but the lottery for the special symbol 1 and the lottery for the special symbol 2 The number of judgment values that are a big hit may be different. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the jackpot probability different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when the lottery is executed with the special symbol having the higher jackpot probability, the player Can make you expect big hits.

  On the other hand, in the process of S302, when it is determined that the probability variation flag 203g is not on (that is, it is off) (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (low probability game state), Based on the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the first random number table 202a for low probability, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value of 1 stored in the first random number table 202a for low probability. As the random number value for the special symbol jackpot, one of "200" is set, and when the value of the first random number counter C1 and the random number value for this hit match, the jackpot of the special symbol It is determined that When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  And the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the process of S303 or S304, it is determined whether it is a jackpot of the special symbol (S305), when it is determined that it is a jackpot of the special symbol (S305: Yes) , A display mode at the time of a big hit indicating a big hit is set (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the first hit type selection table 202b, and a special symbol of three types (a big hit) Of the A, the jackpot B, and the jackpot C), the jackpot type is determined.

  In the processing of S306, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C). Further, in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C) is set as the stop type.

  Next, the variation pattern at the time of a big hit is determined (S307). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set and the third until the big hit symbol is stopped in the third symbol display device 81. The variable time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. As described above, the relationship between the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation time is defined in the fluctuation pattern selection table 20d.

  As the variation patterns defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d, for example, the variation patterns for detachment include “off (for long time)”, “off (for short time)”, “off chance”, and “off”. Various "normal reach", "outside super reach", and "outside chance reach" are specified. In addition, as a variation pattern of jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C, various types of "common normal reach", "shared super reach", "shared chance reach", and "shared special reach" are defined.

  On the other hand, in the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S305: No), the display mode at the time of detachment is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the deviating symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is set. Based on this, as the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is set whether it is out of reach or out of reach.

  Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is the probability change state of the special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 and the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability are compared. Then, the stop type is set. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "90 to 97", reach other than front and rear deviation is set, and "98" is set. , 99 ”, the front / rear outreach is set. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability, and the stop type is set. To do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", complete disconnection is set, and if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "80 to 97", reach other than front and rear disconnection is set, and "98" is set. , 99 ”, the front / rear outreach is set.

  Next, the variation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the symbol comes off in the third symbol display device 81 is determined. At this time, similarly to the process of S307, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. To decide.

  When the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 is completed, next, the variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 is set (S310). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of S306 or S308 is set (S311). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are stored in the voice lamp controller 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (see FIG. 42). Sent. The voice lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command as it is to the display control device 114. When the process of S311 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 36, the start winning processing (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the starting winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33), and it is determined whether or not there is a prize (starting prize) in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. In the case where there is a start winning, it is a process for acquiring various random number counters and executing a holding process for the values.

  When the start winning process is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (starting prize) (S401). Here, a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d (holding number N1 of variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S402). ). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S403).

  Then, whether there is no prize in the first ball entrance 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a prize in the first ball entrance 64, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d (N1) is 4 If it is not less than (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes), and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol 1 hold The value (N1) of the ball number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by calculation is set (S405).

  The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 42) described later executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

  After the number of reserved balls command is set in the process of S405, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in the process of S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are set. , The special symbol 1 of the RAM 203 is stored in the first area of the empty holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the holding ball storage area 203a (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, in each process of S407 to S412, the same process as each process of S401 to S406 is executed for the winning of the second ball entrance 640. The processes of S407 to S412 are different only in that the process of holding the reserved ball corresponding to the winning of the second entrance 640 is executed, and the other processes are different from the processes of S401 to S406. Since they are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, when each processing of S407 to S412 is completed, the prefetch processing is executed (S413), and this processing is completed.

  Next, the prefetching process (S413) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing this prefetching process (S413). The prefetching process (S413) is executed in the start winning process (see FIG. 36).

  In this prefetching process, first, it is determined whether or not there is a new winning in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (S501), and either the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 is determined. However, if there is no new winning (S501: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a new winning in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (S501: Yes), whether the game state at the start of fluctuation is the probability change state of the special symbol or not. It is determined (S502) and if the special symbol is in the probable variation state (S502: Yes), the lottery result is acquired based on the first random number table for high probability (S503), and the process proceeds to S505.

  In the process of S502, when it is determined that the game state is not the special variation state of the special symbol (S502: No), the lottery result is obtained based on the first random number table for low probability (S504), and the process is S505. Transition to. In the process of S505, the values of the first hit type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3, which are the jackpot determination results, are stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area (S505). Next, a winning information command including a jackpot determination result is set (S506), and this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33), and is associated with the variation display of the second symbol performed on the second symbol display device 83 and the second entrance 640. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory.

  In this normal symbol variation process, first, now, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is hitting (S601). As the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit, the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is performed while the indication indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device 83. It is included in the middle. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (the second symbol) is hit (S601: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device. If the display mode is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (holding number M of the variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere counter 203f is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere counter 203f is 0 (S604: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is not 0 (S604: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f (S605).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved sphere storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding first area → execution area, the holding second area → holding first area, the holding third area → holding second area, the holding fourth area → holding third area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c is acquired (S607).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S608), and when it is determined that it is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol (S608: Yes), the second obtained in the processing of S607. Based on the value of the winning random number counter C4 and the high-probability-time second winning random number table 202c, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is won is acquired (S609). Specifically, the value of the second per random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second per random number table 202c for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 205 to 239", Normally it is determined that the design is off (see 202c2 in FIG. 20C).

  In the processing of S608, if the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol (S608: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, so the value of the second per-random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S607. Based on the second random number table for low probability, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is won is acquired (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that the winning symbol is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of “0 to 4, 29 to 239”, It is usually determined that the design is off (see 202c1 in FIG. 20C).

  Next, the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the processing of S609 or S610, it is determined whether it is a normal symbol hit (S611), when it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit (S611: Yes) , The display mode at the time of winning is set (S612). In the process of S612, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol "○" is set to be displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol) in a lit state.

  Then, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S613), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S613: Yes), the electric role associated with the second ball entrance 640. The opening period of the object 640a is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S614), and the process proceeds to S617. In the process of S613, if the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S613: No), the opening period of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is set to 0.2 seconds, and The number of releases is set to 1 (S615), and the process proceeds to S617.

  In the processing of S611, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (S611: No), the display mode at the time of out of contact is set (S616). In the process of S616, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol "x" is set to be lit as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S617.

  In the processing of S617, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S617), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S617: Yes), the variable display on the second symbol display device The variation time of is set to 1 second (S618), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is not in the normal time saving state of the symbol (S617: No), the variation time of the variable display on the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S619), and this processing is ended. In this way, except when the special symbol big hit, when the high probability of the normal symbol, compared to the low probability of the normal symbol, the time of the variable display is very short "30 seconds → 1 second", further, Since the opening period of the second ball entrance 640 becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the second ball entrance 640.

  In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variable display being executed on the second symbol display device has elapsed ( S622). The variable time here is a time preset by the process of S618 or the process of S619 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device.

  In the processing of S622, if the variation time has not elapsed (S622: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S622, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S623). In the process of S623, the lottery of the normal symbol is a win, and if the display mode is set by the process of S612, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is a stop display (lighting display) on the second symbol display device. ) Is set. On the other hand, if the lottery for normal symbols is lost and the display mode is set by the processing in S616, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the second symbol display device. Is set as follows. By the process of S623, when the stop display is set, when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 42) is executed next, the variable display in the second symbol display device ends. Then, in the display mode set in the processing of S612 or the processing of S616, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device.

  Next, when the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device is started, the lottery result of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol variation process (the lottery result this time) is the hit of the ordinary symbol. A determination is made (S624). If the result of the lottery this time is a normal symbol (S624: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is set (S625), and this processing is ended. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the processing of S625, the opening / closing of the electric accessory is opened and closed when the electric accessory opening / closing processing (see S1005) of the main processing (see FIG. 42) is executed next. The control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the opening number set in the processing of S614 or the processing of S615 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S624, if the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and the present process is ended.

  Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through-gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 33), and it is judged whether or not the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through-gate) 67, and the ball has passed. In this case, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

  In the through-gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S701). Here, the passage of a ball at the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number M of times of variable display holding in the normal symbol) is acquired. (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S703).

  Whether the ball does not pass through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f If the value (M) is not less than 4 (S703: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes), and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol The value (M) of the number of reserved balls counter 203f is incremented by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in the process of S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is stored in the empty holding area (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. The data is stored in the first area (S705), and this processing ends. In the process of S705, the value of the ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, the NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. To do.

  Note that the NMI interrupt process described above is similarly executed in the payout control device 111, and the power interruption occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 41, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This startup process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S901). In this initial setting process, for example, a predetermined value set in advance is set to the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait until the sub-side control device (the peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) becomes operable, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

  After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 7) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S910. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if it is not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the previous process at the time of power shutoff did not end normally, the process proceeds to S910 also in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is shut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and in such a case, the process proceeds to S910. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as described later in the process of S1017 of FIG. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the backup may be judged by whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S910, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111, which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S910). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start the payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S911, S912) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when opening a hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed at the time of executing the startup process, the RAM initialization process (S911, S912) is executed. In addition, the initialization processing (S911, S912) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization processing (S911, S912), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S911), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S912). After the execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the closing of the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a is set (S913). That is, when the RAM 203 is initialized, the storage device (the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a) is always closed (that is, the storage channel 700e (see FIG. 3) is filled with a sphere). It is set so that it cannot pass). As a result, in the state where the RAM 203 is initialized, the storage device (the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a) can always be in a constant state, and the specific general entrance 630 It is possible to make the ball difficult to enter. Therefore, it is possible to optimize the game state after initializing the RAM 203 and to prevent the act of illegally accumulating the ball in the specific general entrance 630 by initializing the RAM 203.

  When the process of S912 is completed, the operation of the movable valve 750 is set next (S914). In the processing of S914, the movable valve initial setting flag 203p for starting the operation control of the movable valve 750 is set to ON. By setting the movable valve initial setting flag 203p to ON, the operation control of the movable valve 750 is performed in the movable valve control process (see S1009 of FIG. 42) of the main process (see FIG. 42) of the main controller 110 described later. Be started. In the present embodiment, the movable valve initial setting flag 203p is set to ON in the process of S914 of the startup process. For example, the movable valve initial setting flag 203p is set to ON each time the startup process is executed. You may comprise so that the timing to be performed may differ.

  With this configuration, it is possible to change the timing at which the operation control of the movable valve is started each time the startup process is executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the operating condition of the movable valve 750 from being grasped based on the elapsed time after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Further, when using a configuration in which the movable valve initial setting flag 203p is set to ON at different timings, for example, when the RAM 203 is initialized, the movable valve initial setting flag 203p is set to ON at the same timing. It is good to do so.

  As a method of changing the timing of setting the movable valve initial setting flag 203p to ON, for example, a delay timer that delays the timing of setting the movable valve initial setting flag 203p to ON is provided, and the delay is performed in the startup process. It suffices to perform a process to execute the timer. As the delay period set in the delay timer, the values of various counters provided in the main controller 110 are used, the information stored in the storage area that is updated at any time is used, and the delay period is selected by lottery. A lottery means for determining may be provided. When the process of S914 ends, the process proceeds to S915.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored (S905: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) is normal ( (S907: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held (S908). Next, a payout return command at power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the game state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S915. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is ready to start the payout control of the game balls while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S915, a command (state command) for notifying the game state at the time of power recovery is output to the voice lamp control device 113 (S915). This state command is a command for notifying whether the special symbol is in a probability changing state, whether it is a time saving state of a normal symbol, the time saving number of a normal symbol, or the like. A state command is generated according to the value of the hour / hour counter 203h and the state of the probability variation flag 203g, and is output to the voice lamp control device 113. By outputting this state command, the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can match the recognition of the game state. Therefore, in spite of the low probability state of the special symbol, the right-hand navigation (see FIG. 5 (a)) is displayed, and, conversely, the player is in the state of the probability change of the special symbol, but the player It is possible to prevent (suppress) that the right-handing warning image (see FIG. 5B) is displayed when the right-handing is performed. That is, the game state and the effect to be executed can be matched.

  When the process of S915 ends, a production permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and execution of various productions is permitted for the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 (S916). Next, the interrupt is permitted (S917), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the RAM 203 is not initialized, the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held, so a detailed description is omitted, but the storage device (first storage valve) is omitted. 770a, and the second storage valve 771a) and the movable valve 750 are continuously operated from the state before the power was turned off. Therefore, when the power is temporarily turned off due to noise or the like, the game can be continuously executed without giving the player a feeling of strangeness.

  When the startup process is executed, the following control different from the present embodiment is set as the operation control setting for the storage device (the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a) and the movable valve 750. You may execute. First, a startup process is executed to determine whether or not the RAM 203 has been initialized in this process. If it is determined that the RAM 203 has not been initialized, it is determined whether or not the power is normally turned off. To determine. As a result, it is specified whether the state when the startup process is executed is the initialization state, the normal power-on state, or the abnormal power-on state.

  In the case of the abnormal power-on state, it is a temporary power-off state (instantaneous power-on state) due to noise or the like, and therefore the data backed up in the RAM 203 is used to continue the operation from the state before the power is turned off. Perform control processing. Next, in the normal power-on state, the same processing as the processing executed when the RAM 203 described above in this embodiment is initialized is executed. Finally, in the initialization state, the storage device (the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a) is in the closed state (that is, the sphere can pass through the storage channel 700e (see FIG. 3)). The movable valve 750 is set at a specific timing (for example, a delay period of 0 seconds) and at a specific location (for example, the location stored at the beginning) of the movable valve operation scenario table 202f. The processing may be executed so that the operation control is started from.

  As a result, in the abnormal power-on state, the game can be continuously executed without giving the player a feeling of strangeness, and in the normal power-on state, the movable valve The timing at which the operation control is started can be different. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the operating condition of the movable valve 750 from being grasped based on the elapsed time after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Further, in the case of the initialized state, the movable valve 750 is controlled with a specific operation content. Therefore, when it is desired to operate the movable valve 750 with the same content with respect to a plurality of pachinko machines 10, the setting can be easily performed. it can.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 42, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-described startup process will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, the main processing of the game is executed. As an outline thereof, each process of S1001 to S1010 is executed as a regular process of 4 msec cycle, and the counter updating process of S1013 and S1014 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33), output data such as a command stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is sent to each sub-side control device (peripheral device). The external output process to be transmitted to the control device) is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 33) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, it corresponds to the number of balls acquired to the payout control device 111. Send the prize ball command. In addition, the reserved symbol number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 34) or the start winning process (see FIG. 36) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the fluctuation pattern command, the stop type command, etc. necessary for the variable display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Also, the opening command, the round number command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 43) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the variation type counter CS1 is updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or variable. The jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is set for each round of the jackpot state according to the opening scenario set by the process of S217 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 34). In this embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, the electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is executed (S1005). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 38), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S614 or the processing of S615 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

  Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 35), the variation display according to the variation pattern, the first symbol display Start at device 37. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs of the first symbol display device 37, until the variation time elapses after the variation is started, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. And turn on the green LED. If the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED. If the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. And turn on the red LED.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main processing is executed so that the player can confirm the change of the LED lighting color, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  Further, in the first symbol display update process, in the first symbol display device 37, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the processes of S307 and S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 35) ends. The variation display being executed is ended, and in the display mode set by the processes of S306 and S308 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 35), the stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped on the first symbol display device 37. Display (lighting display).

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S618 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) or the process of S619, the variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83. To do. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, a variable display is performed in which the symbol "O" and the symbol "X" as the second symbol are alternately turned on. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S623 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 38), it is executed in the second symbol display device 83. The variable display is ended, and in the display mode set by the process of S612 or the process of S616 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 38), the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 ( (Lit display).

  After executing the process of S1007, the storage control process is executed (S1008). This storage control process (S1008) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 44 and 45, but a process for setting opening and closing of the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a is executed.

  When the process of S1008 ends, the movable valve control process is executed (S1009). This movable valve control processing (S1009) will be described later with reference to FIG. 46, but the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a are closed or based on the setting state of the movable valve initial setting flag 203p. A process for controlling the release state is executed. Next, when the process of S1009 ends, the winning process is executed (S1010). The winning process (S1010) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S1010 ends, it is determined whether or not the power cut occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1011), and if the power cut occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1011: No), the power failure monitoring circuit The power failure signal SG1 is not output from 252, and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current main processing (S1012). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S1012: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001 and the above-described processes after S1001 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main processing this time (S1012: No), during the remaining time until the predetermined time, that is, the execution timing of the next main processing, The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1013, S1014).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1013). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (300, 239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1002 (S1014).

  Here, since the execution time of each processing of S1001 to S1010 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the second random number counter C4 can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

  Further, in the processing of S1011, if the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1011: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 40 has been executed, the processing at the time of power shutdown after S1015 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1015), and a power-off command indicating that the power is cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). And transmits (S1016). Then, the RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is stored (S1017), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1018), and the endless loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area of the RAM 203 that are backed up.

  Note that the processing of S1011 is at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed at S1001 to S1010 is completed, or when the one cycle of the processing of S1013 and S1014 performed within the remaining time is completed. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, since the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the start-up processing is completed. The process can be started from S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 as in the case of being initialized in the startup process. Therefore, even if the contents of the registers used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the stack pointer value is not saved in the process when the power is shut off, the stack pointer is not saved in the initial setting process (S901). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S1001 can be started. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run out of control.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1004). This jackpot control processing (S1004) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 42), when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of the special symbol, execution of various effects according to the jackpot and the specific winning opening 65a. Is a process for opening or closing.

  In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1101). Specifically, the process of S218 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 34) is executed, and if the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is started. In the process of S1101, if the big hit of the special symbol is started (S1101: Yes), the opening command is set (S1102), and this process is ended.

  The opening command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 201, the audio lamp control is performed. Sent to device 113. Upon receiving the opening command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display opening command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, the opening effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1101, if the special symbol big hit is not started (S1101: No), it is determined whether the special symbol big hit is in progress (S1103). As the big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37, and the big symbol of the special symbol in the third symbol display device 81 (including during the jackpot game of the special symbol) is being displayed, and the special symbol. During the predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. In the process of S1103, if the special symbol big hit is not in progress (S1103: No), this process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined by the process of S1103 that the special symbol is in a big hit (S1103: Yes), then it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1104). When it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S1104: Yes), the specific winning opening 65a is opened (S1105), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1106). After the round number command is set, this process ends. The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 201, a voice lamp It is transmitted to the control device 113. Upon receiving the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, the display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1104, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1104: No), it is determined whether the closing condition for the specific winning opening 65a is satisfied (S1107). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after opening the specific winning opening 65a, or after opening the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a, a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls). ) If more than one prize is won, it is determined that the closing condition is met.

  In the processing of S1107, when it is determined that the condition for closing the specific winning opening 65a is satisfied (S1107: Yes), the specific winning opening 65a is closed (S1108), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, when the condition for closing the specific winning opening 65a is not satisfied (S1107: No), it is determined whether it is the ending timing of the ending effect (S1109). Specifically, when the special game state (16 rounds or all 8 rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in the normal state is completed, it is determined to be the ending effect start timing.

  In the processing of S1109, when it is determined that it is the timing to start the ending effect (S1109: Yes), the ending command is set (S1110). The ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp control in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 201. Sent to device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 selects the display mode of the ending effect based on the winning information stored in the command storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Then, a display ending command corresponding to the display mode of the selected ending effect is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the ending command for display, the ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  When the processing of S1110 ends, then, it is determined whether or not the big hit this time is the big hit A (S1111), and if the big hit A (S1111: Yes), after the big hit A ends, the ordinary symbol becomes a time saving state. In order to shift, the value of the hour / hour counter 203h is set to 100 (S1112), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1111, when it is determined that the big hit this time is not the big hit A (that is, the big hit B or C) (S1111: No), after the big hit B or C ends, the high probability state of the special symbol In order to shift, the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON (S1113), and this processing ends.

  Next, the storage control process (S1008) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing this storage control process (S1008). The storage control process (S1008) is a process that is executed in the main process (see FIG. 42) and is used to set opening and closing of the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a. As described above with reference to FIG. 4, in the present embodiment, the plurality of spheres (up to 5) stored in the storage channel 700e are set to 1 based on the operation on the second frame button (release button) 22b. The operation of the first storage valve 770a of the first storage device 770 and the operation of the second storage valve 771a of the second storage device 771 are controlled so as to flow down one by one. With this configuration, the balls stored in the storage channel 700e can be made to flow down in synchronism with the operation timing of the second frame button (release button) 22b performed by the player. Therefore, the player can motivate the second frame button (release button) 22b. Further, in the present embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 6, by driving one electric drive source (reservoir valve solenoid 770b), the first reservoir valve 770a and the second reservoir valve 771a are different from each other. It has a configuration of opening (release) and closing (non-release) at a timing (predetermined timing). With this configuration, the number of parts can be reduced as compared with the case where an electric drive source is provided for each storage valve, and cost reduction and space saving of the device can be achieved.

  In the storage control process, first, it is determined whether the release flag 203k is on (S1201), and if the release flag 203s is not on (that is, off) (S1201: No), the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a are closed (the first storage device 770 and the second storage device 771 are set in a state in which the balls can be stored). Therefore, the second frame button (release It is determined whether or not the player has pressed (operated) the operation button) 22b (S1202). That is, it is determined whether or not the press detection signal is detected.

  In the processing of S1202, when it is determined that the pressing (operation) of the second frame button (release button) 22b is not detected (that is, the pressing detection signal is not detected) (S1202: No), the first In order to keep the storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a in the closed state, this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the pressing (operation) of the second frame button (release button) 22b is detected (that is, the pressing detection signal is detected) (S1202: Yes), the release button operation command is set (S1203). ). Then, in order to indicate that the opening of the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a is set, the release flag 203k is set to ON (S1204), and the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a are opened. In order to notify the sound lamp control device 113 that the state has been reached, a storage state command corresponding to the open state (released state) of the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a is set (S1205), This process ends.

  The storage state command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 201, a voice lamp is used. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the storage state command corresponding to the release state, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs a display rear image change command for setting the rear type corresponding to the release state to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 changes the back image based on the display back image changing command. That is, as shown in FIG. 63 (b), it is set to a mode in which the character “gate opening” is displayed in the small area Ds2. This allows the player to easily recognize that the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a are in the open state.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1201, when it is determined that the release flag 203k is on (S1201: Yes), the storage valve operation process for setting the operation of the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a is executed. (S1206). The details of the storage valve operation process will be described later with reference to FIG. When the process of S1206 ends, it is determined whether the release flag 203k is off (S1207), and when it is determined that the release flag 203k is not off (that is, on) (S1207: No), this process ends. To do.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1207, when it is determined that the release flag 203k is ON (S1207: Yes), the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a are closed (the first storage device 770 and the second storage device 770). This means that the storage device 771 is set to store the sphere. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified that the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a are closed. Therefore, the storage state command corresponding to the closed state of the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a is set (S1208), and this processing is ended.

  The storage state command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 201, a voice lamp is used. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the storage state command corresponding to the closed state, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs to the display control device 114 a display rear image change command for setting the rear surface type corresponding to the closed state. The display control device 114 changes the back image based on the display back image changing command. That is, as shown in FIG. 63 (a), it is set in a mode in which the characters "Open the gate when the button is pressed!" Are displayed in the small area Ds2. This allows the player to easily recognize that the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a can be set to the open state by pressing the second frame button (release button) 22b.

  By executing this storage control process, opening or closing of the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a can be set according to the operation status of the second frame button (release button) 22b. As a result, the ball is stored in the upper portion of the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a at an arbitrary timing of the player, so that the ball enters the out opening, and the first storage device 770 and the first storage device 770 It is possible to switch between a state in which the ball that has flown (entered) into the 2 storage device 771 flows down toward the specific general entrance port 630.

  Here, the storage valve operation process (S1206) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing this storage valve operation processing (S1206). The storage valve operation process (S1206) is a process executed in the storage control process (see FIG. 44) and is a process for setting the operation of the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a.

  In the storage valve operation process, first, the storage valve solenoid 770b is set to ON in the positive direction (S1301), and 1 is added to the operation counter 203j (S1302). Next, it is determined whether the value of the operation counter 203j is 250 (S1303). In the processing of S1303, when it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203j is 250 (S1303: Yes), the storage valve solenoid 770b is set to OFF (S1304), and this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1303, if it is determined that the value of the motion counter 203j is not 250 (S1303: No), then it is determined whether the value of the motion counter 203j is 375 (S1305). In the process of S1305, when it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203j is 375 (S1305: Yes), the storage valve solenoid 770b is turned on in the negative direction (S1306), and the present process is ended.

  In the process of S1305, when it is determined that the value of the action counter 203j is not 375 (S1305: No), it is then determined whether the value of the action counter 203j is 500 (S1307). In the process of S1307, when it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203j is 500 (S1307: Yes), the storage valve solenoid 770b is set to OFF (S1306). Then, the release flag 203k is set to OFF (S1309), the value of the operation counter 203j is set to 0 (S1310), and this processing is ended. Also, in the processing of S1307, when it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203j is not 500 (S1307: No), this processing is ended.

  Next, the movable valve control process (S1009) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing this movable valve control processing (S1009). This movable valve control processing (S1009) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 42) and is processing for setting the opening and closing of the movable valve 750.

  In the movable valve control process, first, it is determined whether or not the movable valve initial setting flag 203p is turned on (S1201), and when it is determined that the movable valve initial setting flag 203p is turned on (S1201: Yes), the movable valve is moved. Based on the valve operation scenario table 202f, the operation scenario is stored in the operation scenario storage area 203i (S1402). When the process of S1403 ends, the movable valve initial setting flag 203p is set to OFF (S1403), and the process proceeds to S1404. On the other hand, in the process of S1201, when it is determined that the movable valve initial setting flag 203p is not on (that is, it is off) (S1201: No), the processes of S1402 and S1403 are skipped and the process proceeds to S1404.

  In the processing of S1404, the operation scenario is acquired from the operation scenario storage area 203i (S1404), and based on the acquired operation information, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of a new scenario type (S1405). When it is determined that it is the start timing of the new scenario type (S1405: Yes), the movable valve state command indicating the start of the new scenario type is set (S1406), and the process proceeds to S1407. This movable valve state command is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (see FIG. 42). The voice lamp control device 113 transmits the movable valve state command as it is to the display control device 114.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1405, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the new scenario type (S1405: No), the process proceeds to S1407. In the process of S1407, it is determined whether it is the closing timing of the movable valve 750 based on the operation information acquired in the process of S1404 (S1407). In the process of S1407, when it is determined that it is the closing timing of the movable valve 750 (S1407: Yes), the movable valve solenoid 751 is set to ON (S1408), and the process proceeds to S1409.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1407, when it is determined that it is not the closing timing of the movable valve 750 (S1407: No), the process proceeds to S1409. In the process of S1409, it is determined whether it is the opening timing of the movable valve 750 based on the operation information acquired in the process of S1404 (S1409). In the process of S1409, when it is determined that it is the opening timing of the movable valve 750 (S1409: Yes), the movable valve solenoid 751 is set to OFF (S1410), and the process proceeds to S1411.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1409, when it is determined that it is not the opening timing of the movable valve 750 (S1409: No), the process proceeds to S1411. In the processing of S1411, the operation counter 203j is incremented by 1, and this processing ends.

  Next, the winning process (S1010) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the winning process (S1010). The winning process (S1010) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 42), and is a process for performing control according to the winning of the specific winning opening 65a.

  In the winning process, first, it is determined whether or not the remaining ball timer flag 203m is on (S1501). When it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203m is not on (that is, it is off) (S1501: No), it is determined whether the release flag 203k is on (S1502). If it is determined that the release flag 203k is on (S1502: Yes), then it is determined whether the first ball passage sensor S3 detects passage of the game ball (S1503). When it is determined that the first ball passage sensor S3 detects the passage of the game ball (S1503: Yes), the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to ON (S1504), and the process proceeds to S1505. On the other hand, in the process of S1502, when it is determined that the release flag 203k is not on (that is, it is off) (S1502: No), and in the process of S1503, the first ball passage sensor S3 detects the passage of the game ball. When it is determined that it has not been performed (S1503: No), this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1501, if it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203m is on (S1501: Yes), the process proceeds to S1505.

  When it is determined in S1501 that the remaining ball timer flag 203m is on (S1501: Yes), and when the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to S1504, the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve Since the release period (opening period) of 771a is meant, the release period (opening period) of the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a is updated by adding 1 to the remaining ball timer 203n (S1505). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the updated remaining ball timer 203n is the upper limit value (that is, whether or not 1 second has elapsed since the release of the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a was set) (S1506). ), If it is determined that it is not the upper limit value (one second has not elapsed) (S1506: No), it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the specific general entrance 630 (S1507), and specified. When it is determined that the game ball has not entered the general entrance 630 (S1507: No), this processing ends.

  In the process of S1507, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the specific general entrance 630 (S1507: Yes), the process proceeds to S1508. On the other hand, in the process of S1506, when it is determined that the value of the remaining ball timer 203n is the upper limit value (S1506: Yes), an error command is set (S1510), and the process proceeds to S1508. The error command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp control in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 201. Sent to device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, the error display (for example, the character of the winning number mismatch error is displayed) is set, and the output of the error signal is set to the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to prevent illegally winning the game ball into the specific general ball entrance 630.

  In the process of S1508, the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to OFF (S1508), and the remaining ball timer 203n is reset to 0 which is an initial value (S1509). After that, this processing ends.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device according to the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 to 63. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup processing that is started when the power is turned on and a main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

  First, with reference to FIG. 48, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S2001). Specifically, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing in progress flag is turned on, the power-up processing of S2120 (see FIG. 49) occurs due to a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called “instantaneous interruption”) in the current startup processing. ) Is determined during execution (S2002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 49, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S2116 of FIG. 49), the power-off process of S2120 is executed. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is executed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process of S2120 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off process in progress flag.

  If the power-off process in progress flag is off (S2002: No), the startup process of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off process of S2120 is performed. It is started after completing the execution of the process, or is started (without receiving a power-off command from the main controller 110) only on the MPU 221 of the voice lamp controller 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2003).

  The confirmation of the data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S2006. Therefore, it is possible to check the data stored in the specific area, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is "55AAh", it is possible to confirm the data destruction in the RAM 223. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S2003: Yes), the process proceeds to S2004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S2003: No), the process proceeds to SS2008.

  If the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power shutdown). Therefore, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S2004. On the other hand, the startup process this time was started after the momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off process of S2120 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If it is started due to the trouble, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S2003: No), and the process proceeds to S2008.

  If the power-off processing in progress flag is on (S2002: Yes), the startup processing of this time is after the momentary power failure has occurred, and during the execution of the power-off processing of S2120, the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. The MPU 221 has been reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process proceeds to S2004, and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S2004, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S2004). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "55h", "0AAh", and "00h" after "0FFh". By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

  If the read / write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2005: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S2006). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data destruction in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if a read / write check abnormality is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S2007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may

  In the process of S2008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S2008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S2120 is executed (see S2118 in FIG. 49). That is, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S2120 is executed. Therefore, the process of S2008 with the power-off flag turned on is that the start-up process of this time is instantaneous. This is a case after the power failure has occurred and is started in a state in which the execution of the power-off process of S2120 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S2009), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2010), and then the interruption is performed. The permission is set (S2012), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

  On the other hand, the reason why the process of S2008 is reached with the power-off flag turned off is that the present startup process is started after the power has been completely cut off, for example, and the process of S2004 to S2006 is followed to the process of S2008. This is a case where processing has been reached or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset due to noise or the like (without receiving the power-off command from the main control device 110) and started. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: No), the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, S2009, is skipped, the process proceeds to S2010, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2010). Next, the probability variation state flag 223i is updated according to the game state notified by the state command received from the main control device 110 (S2011), interrupt permission is set (S2012), and the process proceeds to the main process. By updating the probability variation state flag 223i based on the state command, the gaming state recognized by the main controller 110 and the gaming state recognized by the voice lamp controller 113 can be matched. Therefore, the effect can be appropriately executed according to the game state.

  It should be noted that skipping the clearing process of S2009 is performed when all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S2004 when the process of S2008 is passed through the processes of S2004 to S2008. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared. This is because the control of can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 49, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started, or since the process of S2101 this time has been executed (S2101), 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S2101: No), the process proceeds to S2113 without performing the processes of S2102 to S2112. In the process of S2101, it is mainly the process related to display (effect) in S2102 to S2112 that determines whether or not 1 msec has elapsed, and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S2113, the variable display setting process of S2114, the ball passing monitoring process of S2115, and the storage state monitoring process of S2116 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S2113 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the process of S2114 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process is executed. Based on the above, it is possible to perform the setting related to the variation effect without delay. Further, since the processing of S2115 is executed in a short cycle, the setting regarding the passage counter can be performed without delay based on the first ball passage sensor S3 and the second ball passage sensor S4, and the processing of S2116 is conducted in a short cycle. By being executed, the storage state flag 223k and the storage upper limit flag 223m can be set without delay based on the storage state.

  If 1 ms or more has elapsed in the process of S2101 (S2101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S2103 to S2116 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2102). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S2108 described later (S2103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S2104). The power-on notification processing is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Be seen. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If it is not when the power is turned on, the process proceeds to S2105 without the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S2105, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and thereafter, the retained quantity display update process is executed (S2106). In the customer waiting production process, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is switched to the title screen, and the setting is controlled as a command. Device 114. In the reservation number display update process, a process of turning on a reservation lamp (not shown) according to the value of the first special symbol reservation ball counter 223b is performed.

  Thereafter, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S2107). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the first frame button 22a operated by the player in order to enhance the production effect is pressed, and the input of the first frame button 22a is confirmed. It is a process of setting to produce an effect corresponding to a case. In this process, when the player's operation of the first frame button 22a is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the first frame button 22a is set in the display control device 114.

  When the frame button input monitoring / effect process is completed, the ramp edit process is executed (S2108), and then the sound edit / output process is executed (S2109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination portions 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the processing of S2109, the liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S2110). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, the time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp edit process of S2108 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound edit / output process of S2109 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  When the processing of S2110 ends, timing effect setting processing is performed (S2111). Details of this timing effect setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 60 to 63.

  When the processing of S2111 ends, the movable valve operation counter updating processing is executed (S2112). The movable valve operation counter updating process is a process for updating the movable valve operation counter based on the movable valve operation scenario. Details of the movable valve operation counter updating process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the movable valve operation counter updating process, a command determining process is performed to perform a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 (S2113). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Then, the process proceeds to S2114. In the process of S2114, the variable display setting process is executed (S2114). In the variable display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 55.

  Next, the process proceeds to S2115. In the process of S2115, a ball passing monitoring process is executed (S2115). In the ball passing monitoring process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Details of this ball passage monitoring processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, the process proceeds to S2116. In the process of S2116, a storage state monitoring process is executed (S2116). In the storage state monitoring process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of this storage state monitoring process will be described later with reference to FIG. 57.

  Then, when the storage state monitoring process ends, it is determined whether or not the power RAM cutoff information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S2117). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S2117 (S2117: Yes), the power-off flag and the power-off process in progress flag are both turned on (S2119), and the power-off process is executed (S2120). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process in progress flag is turned off (S2121), and then the process is infinitely looped. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. Also, the storage of the information on occurrence of power failure is erased.

  On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S2117 (S2117: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S2118), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S2118: No), the process returns to S2101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2118: Yes), the process is infinitely looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and thus can call a store clerk or the like in the hall and request the pachinko machine 10 to be repaired. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 50, the command determination processing (S2113) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S2113). This command determination process (S2113) is performed in the main process (see FIG. 49) performed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. This is processing for.

  In the command determination processing (FIG. 50, S2113), first, of the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area 223a and analyzed, and the variation pattern command is determined. It is determined whether or not it has been received (S2201). The variation pattern command is a command for notifying the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol, and the variation pattern (variation time) selected from the main controller 110 is the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is output corresponding to each of the symbols.

  In the process of S2201, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command is received (S2201: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2202), and the fluctuation pattern type is received from the received fluctuation pattern command. Is extracted (S2203), and this processing ends. The variation pattern type extracted here can be identified in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 for each special symbol type (corresponding first special symbol, second special symbol) that is a variation pattern type of the special symbol. In the variable display setting process (see FIG. 55), which is stored in a format, to notify the display control device 114 of the start of the variable display effect of the special symbol and the display mode of the variable display effect of the special symbol. (When setting a variation pattern command for displaying special symbols) is used.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation pattern command is not received (S2201: No), it is determined whether the stop type command is received from the main control device 110 (S2204). When it is determined that the stop type command (either the special figure 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command) is received (S2204: Yes), the flag corresponding to the type of the received command is set to ON. (S2205). Specifically, when the special figure 1 stop type command is received, the stop type selection flag 223f corresponding to the first special symbol is set to ON, and when the special figure 2 stop type command is received, the second special The stop type selection flag 223f corresponding to the symbol is set to ON. Next, the stop type (completely out of reach, out of reach, small hit, or big hit A to C) is extracted from the received stop type command (S2206), and this processing ends. The stop type extracted in the process of S2206 is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. Then, it is referred to when a variable display setting process (see FIG. 55) described later is executed, and is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

  In the process of S2204, when it is determined that the stop type command is not received (S2204: No), it is determined whether the stop command is received from the main control device 110 (S2207). When it is determined that the stop command has been received (S2207: Yes), the display stop command is set based on the received command (S2208), and this processing ends.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the number-of-reserved-balls command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2209). When it is determined that the reserved ball number command is received (S2209: Yes), the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110 included in the received reserved ball number command Value (that is, the number of reserved balls of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is extracted, and corresponding to the extracted counter value provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113. The counter value is updated (S2210), and this processing ends. More specifically, when the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d is extracted, the extracted counter value is stored in the first special symbol holding sphere number counter 223b of the RAM 223, and the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e. When the value of is extracted, the extracted counter value is stored in the second special symbol holding sphere counter 223c.

  Here, since the number of reserved balls command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the balls enter the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (start prize), the start prize is given. Every time there is, by the processing of S2210, the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113, the special symbol 1 hold of the main controller 110 It can be adjusted to the values of the sphere counter 203d and the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 203e, respectively. Therefore, due to the influence of noise and the like, the value of the first special symbol holding ball counter 223b or the second special symbol holding ball counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is the special symbol 1 holding ball counter 203d of the main control device 110. Or even if it deviates from the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 203e, if the holding sphere number command is notified based on the start winning, the first special symbol holding sphere counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. Alternatively, the value of the second special symbol holding sphere counter 223c can be modified to match the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d or the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 203e of the main controller 110.

  In addition, in the processing of S2209, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls command has not been received (S2209: No), it is determined whether a winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2212). In the process of S2212, when it is determined that the winning information command is received (S2212: Yes), the winning information command receiving process is executed (S2213). In the prize information command receiving process (S2213), various flags and various counters to be referred to for setting various effects executed by the third symbol display device 81 are set. Thereby, based on the lottery result of the pending special symbol, before the fluctuation of the pending special symbol is started (that is, before the fluctuation of the target special symbol is executed. (Variable display), it is possible to execute the effect indicating the lottery result of the special symbol that has transmitted the winning information command, and the lottery result of one special symbol is displayed to the player using the variable display period of the plurality of special symbols. It is possible to give a suggestion and to enhance the effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2212, when it is determined that the winning information command is not received (S2212: No), it is determined whether the movable valve state command is received from the main control device 110 (S2214). When it is determined that the movable valve state command has been received (S2214: Yes), the movable valve state command process is executed (S2215), and this process ends.

  Here, the movable valve state command processing (S2215) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the movable valve state command processing (S2215). This movable valve state command process (S2215) is a process executed for the voice lamp control device 113 side to grasp the operating condition (opening or closing condition) of the movable valve 750 whose operation is controlled by the main control device 110. In the present embodiment, the movable valve operation scenario 222b containing the same information as the operation information (operation scenario) for the main controller 110 to operate the movable valve 750 is stored in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113, and By synchronizing the progress of the operation information with the operation control of the main controller 110, the voice lamp controller 113 can grasp the future operation status of the movable valve 750. As a result, an effect based on the opening timing and closing timing of the movable valve can be set and executed on the voice lamp control device 113 side. By executing the effect based on the opening timing and the closing timing of the movable valve, it is possible to suggest the timing for operating (pressing) the second frame button 22b to the player.

  When the movable valve state command process (S2215) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the movable valve initial flag 223u is on (S2301). If it is determined that the movable valve initial flag 223u is on (S2301: Yes), then it is determined whether the movable valve state command received this time includes initial information (S2302). That is, the movable valve state command received when the movable valve initial flag 223u, which is set to ON when the power is turned on, is set to ON, is executed in the startup process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 41). It is determined whether the command is a movable valve state command including the initial information indicating that the operation control of the movable valve 750 set in the movable valve operation setting (see S914 in FIG. 41) is started. In the processing of S2302, when it is determined that the movable valve state command received this time includes the initial information (S2302: Yes), the content of the movable valve operation scenario 222b is set in the movable valve state storage area 223s (S2303). ), The value of the movable valve operation counter 223t is set to 1 (S2304), and the movable valve initial flag 223u is set to OFF (S2305).

  Then, the timing at which the movable valve 750 is closed is acquired based on the movable valve operation scenario and the value of the movable valve operation counter 223t set in the movable valve state storage area 223s. The acquired movable valve closing timing is stored in the closing timing storage area 223v (S2306), and this processing ends. That is, in the present embodiment, the voice lamp controller 113 has the same information as the information of the operation scenario used when the main controller 110 controls the operation of the movable valve 750. When the operation control of 750 is started, information indicating the start (first time information) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the first time information, the operation scenario of the movable valve 750 The same information as the information is used to grasp the operation status of the movable valve 750. The initial information set in the startup process of main controller 110 (see FIG. 41) includes the start timing of movable valve 750 and the type of operation scenario used. As the other information, for example, in the case of using a configuration in which the operation start timing of the movable valve 750 is made different (delayed), it is actually moved after the startup process (see FIG. 41) of the main controller 110 is executed. It is preferable to include the period information indicating the period until the operation of the valve 750 is started (that is, the delay period) in the initial information.

  In addition, when the operation of the movable valve 750 is started and the configuration in which the starting point of the operation scenario is different is used, it is preferable to include the information indicating the starting point set this time in the initial information. Furthermore, as the initial information, period scenario information indicating operation scenario information for a predetermined period after the operation of the movable valve 750 is started may be included. As a result, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the initial information, it becomes possible to set the content of the movable valve operation scenario 222b in the movable valve state storage area 223s based on the period scenario information for a predetermined period. Of the movable valve 750 can be easily synchronized with.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S2302 that the first-time information is not included in the information received this time (S2302: No), the startup process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 41) and the startup of the voice lamp controller 113 are performed. It is determined that the timing at which the processing (see FIG. 48) is executed is different, an error command is set (S2307), and this processing ends. When the error command is set here, the third symbol display device 81 is informed that the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on again based on the set error command. Then, by turning on the power again, the startup processing of the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 is executed again, and the normal state can be restored. If the error command is set even if the power is turned on again a plurality of times, it is determined that the rising timing of the main control device 110 and the rising timing of the voice lamp control device 113 are not normal timings. It may be configured to change the setting content of the error command.

  In the process of S2301, when it is determined that the movable valve initial flag 223u is not ON (is OFF) (S2301: No), the current operation state of the movable valve 750 which is constantly updated by the voice lamp control device 113. Is read from the movable valve state storage area 223s (S2308), and it is determined whether the contents match by comparing with the currently received movable valve state command (S2309). Here, if it is determined that the contents match (S2309: Yes), the present process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the contents do not match (S2309: No), an error command indicating that the contents do not match is set (S2307), and this processing ends.

  Here, if the information indicating the operating state of the movable valve does not match the movable valve state command received from the main control device 110 and the operating state of the movable valve state storage area 223s of the voice lamp control device 113, they do not match. A storage unit capable of storing the determined number of times may be provided, and the error command may be set when the number of times stored in the storage unit is stored a predetermined number of times, more specifically, a predetermined number of times in succession. As a result, it is possible to suppress the determination of an error when only the determination result in which the contents do not match due to the sudden noise is generated.

  In the present embodiment, the operation scenario used when the main controller 110 controls the operation of the movable valve 750 is configured by combining a plurality of scenario types for a predetermined period (about 30 seconds). Is configured to send a movable valve state command at the timing of switching to a new scenario type. As a result, the total number of commands output from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113 can be reduced. In addition to that, when the voice lamp control device 113 is in a state in which there is a possibility of performing an effect based on the operation state of the movable valve 750, that is, when the main control device 110 selects a variation pattern. The movable valve state command is output when the chance table 202d3 is referred to, when the chance variation type is actually selected from the chance table 202d3, or when the big hit is started. This may reduce the total number of commands output from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and suppress an effect that gives the player a feeling of strangeness.

  Returning to FIG. 50, the description will be continued. In the processing of S2214, when it is determined that the movable valve state command has not been received (S2214: No), it is determined whether the storage device related command has been received (S2216). When it is determined in S2216 that the storage device-related command has been received (S2216: Yes), the storage device-related process is executed (S2217), and the present process ends.

  Here, the storage device related process (S2217) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the storage device related process (S2217). This storage device-related processing (S2217) is an operation of the storage device (first storage device 770, second storage device 771) that is executed based on the player operating the second frame button (release button) 22b. This is a process for the voice lamp control device 113 to grasp the contents.

  When the storage device-related processing (S2217) is executed, first, the storage device-related command received this time is in an open (release) state of the storage device (a state in which a sphere can flow down the storage channel 700e (see FIG. 3)). It is determined whether it is a command indicating (S2401). In the processing of S2401, when it is determined that the command indicates the open state (S2401: Yes), the release state flag 223q is set to ON (S2402), the display release command is set (S2403), and this processing is executed. finish. The display release command set here is transmitted to the display control device 114, and a dedicated effect is executed when the storage device is released. As the exclusive effect, for example, a suggestion mode suggesting a privilege (15 prize balls) given to the player when the ball enters the specific general entrance 630 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the ball enters the specific general entrance 630, the suggestion mode is changed to the confirmation mode, and when the ball does not enter the specific general entrance 630, the suggestion mode is changed. The production that disappears is executed.

  In the processing of S2401, when it is determined that the storage device-related command received this time is not the command indicating the open state (S2401: No), it is determined whether the storage device-related command received this time is the command indicating the closed state. If the command is a closed state (S2404) (S2404; Yes), the release state flag 223q is set to OFF (S2405), the release operation flag 223p is set to OFF (S2406), and the display is not released. A command is set (S2407), and this processing ends.

  In the present embodiment, in the storage device (the first storage device 770, the second storage device 771), the non-released state in which the spheres are stored in the storage channel 700e and the release state in which the spheres can flow down are described as follows. The storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a are operated and controlled to be variable (see FIG. 9). Since this operation control is control for changing the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a in a preset order, after receiving a command indicating a release (open) state in which the ball can flow down, The period until the command indicating the non-released (closed) state in which the sphere is stored is constant (1 second). Therefore, in the storage device-related process (S2217), a measuring unit that measures the period after receiving the command indicating the open (release) state is provided, and the measuring unit allows a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) to elapse. However, the error command may be set when the command indicating the closed (unreleased) state is not received. Accordingly, it is possible to immediately determine that the situation of the storage device (the first storage device 770, the second storage device 771) whose operation is controlled by main controller 110 is not normal.

  Returning to FIG. 50, the description will be continued. In the process of S2216, when it is determined that the storage device related command has not been received (S2216: No), it is next determined whether or not the cancel operation command has been received (S2218). In the process of S2218, when it is determined that the cancel operation command has been received (S2218: Yes), the cancel operation flag 223p is set to ON (S2219), and this process ends. This release operation command is a command output when the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the release operation command has not been received (S2218: No), it is determined whether or not a hit related command has been received (S2220).

  In the process of S2220, when it is determined that the hit related command is received (S2220: Yes), the hit related process is executed (S2221), and the present process is ended. The details of this hit-related process (S2221) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. On the other hand, in the process of S2220, when it is determined that the hit related command is not received (S2220: No), the process corresponding to the other command is executed (S2222), and the present process is ended.

  In the process of S2222, if the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, a process corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is executed. Command is set so as to be transmitted to the display control device 114, for example, a ball entry command set based on the fact that a ball has entered each entrance provided on the game board 13. When is received, a process of accumulating the number of entered balls is executed for each type of the entrance into which the ball entered.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 53, a hit related process (S2221) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the hit related processing (S2221). The hit related process (S2221) is a process executed in the command determination process (see S2113 of FIG. 560) of the main process (see FIG. 49) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and the main control This is a process executed when a hit related command is received from the device 110.

  When the hit related process (S2221) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not a big hit opening command is received (S2501). If it is determined that the big hit opening command has been received (S2501: Yes), then a display opening command is set (S2502), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2501, when it is determined that the opening command is not received (S2501: No), it is determined whether the round number command is received (S2503). In the process of S2503, when it is determined that the round number command is received (S2503: Yes), the round number cumulative counter 223h is updated based on the received command (S2504), and then the big hit medium effect process is executed ( (S2505), this processing ends.

  Here, the big hit medium effect process (S2505) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a flow chart showing the big hit midfield effect process (S2505). In this big hit medium production process (S2505), in addition to the big hit game presentation for congratulating the big hit, an operation production that causes the player to operate the second frame button (release button) 22b ( Timing effects) and difficulty selection effects that cause the player to select the difficulty level of the operation effects (timing effects) are set, and each effect is executed.

  When the big hit midtime production process (S2505) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the production execution flag 223x is on. When it is determined that the production execution flag 223x is not on (off) (S2601: No), it is determined whether the round number command received this time is the round number command indicating the first round of the jackpot. Yes (S2602). When it is determined in the process of S2602 that the command is the round number command indicating the first round (S2602: Yes), the difficulty level selection flag 223ab is set to ON (S2603), and this process is terminated. Here, by setting the difficulty level selection flag 223ab to ON, based on the operation signal of the frame button (first frame button 22a, second frame button 22b) operated while the first round of the jackpot is being executed. The process of selecting the difficulty level of the timing effect (operation effect) is executed in the frame button input monitoring / effect process (S2107 in FIG. 59) described later.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2602 that the command is not the round number command indicating the first round (S2602: No), the difficulty level selection flag 223ab is set to OFF (S2604), and then the number of rounds received this time is received. It is determined whether the command is the seventh round or the fifteenth round of jackpot (S2605). In the processing of S2605, when it is determined that the command is the round number command indicating the seventh round or the fifteenth round (S2605: Yes), it is determined whether the storage upper limit flag 223m is on (S2606), and the storage upper limit flag 223m. When it is determined that is ON (S2606: Yes), the condition that the timing effect (operation effect) can be executed is satisfied, so the timing effect setting flag 223w is set to ON (S2607), and the advance notice round command for display is displayed. Is set (S2608), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2605, when it is determined that the number-of-rounds command received this time is not the seventh round or the fifteenth round of the jackpot (S2605: No), or in the process of S2606, the storage upper limit flag 223m is not on. If it is determined (S2606: No), the timing effect (operation effect) is not executable, so the process proceeds to S2609 without setting the timing effect setting flag 223w to ON.

  In the process of S2609, it is determined whether the number-of-rounds command received this time is the eighth round or the 16th round of the big hit (S2609), and when it is determined that the round number command is the eighth round or the 16th round (S2609: Yes). It is determined whether the timing effect setting flag 223w is turned on (S2610). That is, in the immediately previous round of the eighth round or the 16th round (7th round or 15th round) received this time, whether the timing effect setting flag 223w is set to ON (timing effect (operation effect) can be executed). The above conditions are satisfied). In the process of S2610, if the timing effect setting flag 223w is set to ON (S2610: Yes), then the timing effect information is read from the effect temporary storage area 223r and the display effect round command is set (S2611). ). Then, the effect execution flag 223x is set to ON (S2612), the timing effect setting flag 223w is set to OFF (S2613), and this processing is ended. In the process of S2611, the timing effect information read is set in the timing effect setting process (see S2111 of FIG. 60) described later based on the timing effect setting flag 223w being set to ON. Yes, the detailed contents thereof will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the processing of S2609, when it is determined that the number-of-rounds command received this time is not the eighth round or the 16th round of the jackpot (S2609: No), or in the processing of S2610, the timing effect setting flag 223w is set to ON. If it is determined that the number of rounds has not been received (set to OFF), a display round number command corresponding to the received round number is set (S2614), and this processing ends.

  The various display round number commands set here are stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S2102) of the main process (see FIG. 49) executed by the MPU 221. , To the display control device 114. Upon receiving the various display round number commands, the display control device 114 starts a new round effect on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the present round number is determined by the counter value of the round number cumulative counter 223h, and the content of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed. Other configurations may be used. For example, the process of adding the counter value of the round number cumulative counter 223h may be omitted by including the information indicating the current round number in the round number command.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot is started, an effect of selecting the difficulty level of the timing effect (operation effect) executed during the jackpot in the first round (first round) is executed. (See FIG. 17). Furthermore, the condition (storage channel) at which the timing effect (operation effect) can be executed at the time of the round (7 or 15 round) before the round (8 or 16 round) in which the timing effect (operation effect) is actually executed. It is determined whether the upper limit amount of balls is stored in 700e (see FIG. 3)), and when the condition is satisfied, the timing effect (operation effect) is executed in the next round. A notice effect is given to give a notice (see FIG. 11A). Then, the timing effect (operation effect) is executed (see FIG. 11B).

  In this way, since the notice effect is executed in the round before the timing effect (operation effect) is executed, the player operates the frame buttons (first frame button 22a and second frame button 22b). It can be known in advance that the effect will be executed. In addition, in the round in which the notice effect is executed, it is determined that a condition capable of executing the timing effect (operation effect) is satisfied, and the notice effect is executed only when the condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the problem that the timing effect (operation effect) is not executed even though the notice effect is executed.

  Furthermore, since the storage of the upper limit number of spheres in the storage channel 700e is set as a condition for executing the timing effect (operation effect), the effect used as the timing effect (operation effect) is stored spheres. It is possible to fix the effect using 5 pieces, and it is possible to reduce the amount of data used for the effect. The condition for executing the timing effect (operation effect) is not limited to this, and may be a condition that a predetermined number (for example, one) of spheres are stored, or the sphere may be stored in the storage channel 700e. The timing effect (operation effect) may be executed regardless of whether or not is stored. Further, the number of balls stored in the storage channel 700e may be determined, and the effect mode of the timing effect (operation effect) may be changed based on the determination result. Specifically, the number of times the second frame button (release button) 22b for changing the storage channel 700e to the released state is operated corresponds to the number of balls stored in the storage channel 700e. It may be changed, or a specific timing effect (operation effect), that is, the number of operations of the second frame button (release button) 22b is fixed regardless of the number of balls stored in the storage channel 700e. Alternatively, the timing effect (operation effect) may be executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, since the difficulty of the timing effect (operation effect) can be selected for the player, the player can perform the timing effect (operation effect) according to his / her skill. Since it is possible to set, it is possible to cause the player to participate in the game eagerly.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the notice effect is executed when the condition for executing the timing effect (operation effect) is satisfied. That is, it is suggested to the player based on the execution of the notice effect that the condition for executing the timing effect (operation effect) is established, but other configurations may be used. For example, the third symbol display device 81 displays the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 700e and the number of storages required to execute the timing effect (operation effect), and to the player. It is advisable to execute an effect that encourages spheres to be stored in the storage channel 700e. As a result, the player plays a game in which the ball is stored in the storage channel 700e in addition to the game in which the ball is won in the specific winning opening 65a during the big hit, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced. Further, in order to store the spheres in the storage channel 700e, even in a state where the variable winning device 65 is closed during a big hit (interval state), the balls are continuously hit, so that the game is operated. Can be increased.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the number of rounds provided as a jackpot is 8 rounds, jackpots (the jackpot type is “jackpot B”), and 16 rounds of jackpots (the jackpot types are “jackpot A” and “jackpot C”). It is provided. That is, in the case of 8 round jackpot, the maximum number of times the timing effect (operation effect) is executed during the jackpot game, and in the case of 16 round jackpot, the timing effect (operation effect) is executed during the jackpot game. The maximum number of times is 2 times. As a result, it is possible to change the privilege to be given depending on the type of jackpot, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

  In addition, in this embodiment, the timing effect (operation effect) is configured to be executed in a predetermined number of rounds during the jackpot, but other configurations may be used, for example, the storage channel 700e. When it is determined that a predetermined number (for example, 3) of balls have been stored, the timing effect (operation effect) may be executed in the next round. This allows the player to more actively play a game in which the balls are stored in the storage channel 700e.

  Returning to FIG. 53, the description will be continued. In the processing of S2503, when it is determined that the hit related command received this time is not the round number command (S2503: No), it is then determined whether an interval command has been received (S2506). The interval command is a command output from the main control device 110 when each round in the jackpot is completed. In the process of S2506, when it is determined that the interval command is received (S2506: Yes), the number of completed rounds is calculated based on the value of the round number cumulative counter 223h, and the calculated result is the seventh or fifteenth round. It is determined whether it indicates the end (S2507).

  In the processing of S2507, when it is determined that the interval command received this time is the interval command indicating the end of the 7th or 15th round (S2507: Yes), it is determined whether the storage upper limit flag 223m is on (S2508). If it is determined to be on (S2508: Yes), the timing effect setting flag 223w is set to on (S2509), the corresponding display interval command is set (S2509), and this processing ends. That is, in the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 54, in the round (7th or 15th round) in which the notice effect is executed, whether or not a condition capable of executing the timing effect (operation effect) is established. Although it is determined that the timing effect setting flag 223w is set to ON, in addition to that, even at the timing when the round (7th or 15th round) before the timing effect (operation effect) is executed is finished, It is again determined whether or not the condition capable of executing the timing effect (operation effect) is satisfied, and the timing effect setting flag 223w can be set to ON based on the determination result.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to determine whether or not the condition for executing the timing effect (operation effect) is satisfied until immediately before the start of the round in which the timing effect (operation effect) is executed. It is possible to increase the opportunity to provide the timing effect (operation effect) to the player. In this case, the timing effect (operation effect) is executed without executing the notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to provide an unexpected timing effect (operation effect) to the player who is disappointed because the notice effect is not executed.

  Although not shown in detail, regarding the processing of S2507 to S2509, if the timing performance setting flag 223w has already been set to ON in the big hit medium performance processing (see S2504 of FIG. 54), that processing Is configured to be skipped. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary processing from being executed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2506, when it is determined that the interval command has not been received (S2506: No), it is determined whether the jackpot ending command has been received (S2511). In the processing of S2511, when the jackpot ending command is received (S2511: Yes), the ending command for display is set (S2512), the value of the round number cumulative counter 223h is cleared (S2513), and this processing ends. In addition, in the processing of S2511, even when it is determined that the jackpot ending command has not been received (S2511: No), this processing ends.

  Next, the variable display setting process (S2114) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S2114). The variable display setting process (S2114) is one process of the main process (see FIG. 49) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. As described above, the variable display setting process (see FIG. 55) is the first special symbol based on the variable pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to display the variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81. Alternatively, the display variation pattern command of the second special symbol is generated, and the process of transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. Further, based on the extracted stop type (completely out, reach out, big hit), a process of setting a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is executed.

  In the fluctuation display setting process (FIG. S2114), first, it is determined whether the fluctuation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2701). When it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223e is off (S2701: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main control device 110, and the process proceeds to S2709. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation start flag 223e is on (S2701: Yes), the detailed mode of the variation display of the special symbol this time is determined based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110. Each processing of S2702-S2708 for is performed.

  More specifically, first, the fluctuation start flag 223e is set to OFF (S2702), then the extracted fluctuation pattern is acquired (S2703), and it is determined whether the fluctuation pattern extracted this time is a chance pattern (S2704). ). In the process of S2704, in the special symbol variation start process of the main control device 110 (see S213 of FIG. 35), when the variation pattern command for which the variation type of the variation pattern is “miss chance” or “chance reach” is received Then, it is determined that the fluctuation pattern extracted this time is a chance pattern. In the process of S2704, when it is determined that the acquired variation pattern is the chance pattern (S2704: Yes), it is then determined whether the storage state flag 223k is on (S2705), and it is determined that it is on. In this case (S2705: Yes), the timing effect setting flag 223w is set to ON (S2706) on the assumption that the condition capable of executing the timing effect (operation effect) is satisfied.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, when the variation pattern command indicating the variation type of the variation pattern capable of executing the chance effect (operational effect) is received, it is established that the sphere is stored in the storage channel 700e. As a condition, the chance effect (operation effect) is executed, but the chance effect (operation effect) may be executed without determining the presence or absence of a sphere on the storage channel 700e. Accordingly, when a sphere flows into the storage channel 700e during the chance production, the sphere can be easily made to enter the specific general entrance 630.

  Then, the display variation pattern command is set (S2707), and then the corresponding special symbol holding sphere number counter (the first special symbol holding sphere number counter 223b or the second special symbol holding sphere number counter 223c is subtracted from 1 Then, based on the subtracted value, the data of the winning information storage area included in the command storage area is shifted (S2709), and the process proceeds to S2709. Meanwhile, in the process of S2704, the variation pattern acquired this time is the chance pattern. If it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is not ON (OFF) in the process of S2705 (S2705: No), that is, the variable display setting this time. In the process (S2114), the condition for executing the timing effect (operation effect) is satisfied. If it is determined that to not, skips the processing of S2706, the process proceeds to S2707.

  In the process of S2709, it is determined whether the stop type selection flag 223f of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2709). Then, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223f is off (S2709: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S2709, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223f is on (S2709: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223f is set to off (S2710), and then the command determination process (FIG. 50). In the process of S2206 of (see), the extracted stop type is acquired (S2711), and the acquired stop type is set (S2712). Then, based on the set stop type, a display stop type command for notifying the stop type to the display control device 114 is set (S2713), and this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the ball passage monitoring process (S2115) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 56 is a flow chart showing this ball passage monitoring processing (S2115). The ball passage monitoring process (S2115) is one process of the main process (see FIG. 49) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the storage channel 700e in the board unit 700 (see FIG. 3). This is a process for monitoring the passage of a sphere that has flowed down (see FIG. 3).

  In the ball passing monitoring process (S2115), first, it is determined whether the release state flag 223q is on (S2801). Here, if it is determined that the release state flag 223q is not on (off), the storage channel 700e is not in the release (open) state in which the sphere can flow down, so this processing ends. In the process of S2801, when it is determined that the release state flag 223q is on (S2801: Yes), it is then determined whether the ball passing flag 223n is on (S2802). In the processing of S2802, when it is determined that the sphere passage flag 223n is off (S2802: No), whether the sphere has passed the first sphere passage sensor S3 based on the detection result of the first sphere passage sensor S3. Is determined (S2803). In the processing of S2803, when it is determined that the sphere has passed (S2803: Yes), the sphere passage flag 223n is set to ON (S2804), "1" is set to the passage counter 223ae (S2805), and the processing of S2806. Move to.

  That is, in the above-described processing of S2801 to S2805, when the release state flag 223q is set to ON and the first ball passage sensor S3 detects the downward flow (passage) of the sphere stored in the storage channel 700e, the period The process of starting the measurement of is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S2802, when it is determined that the ball passing flag 223n is ON (S2802: Yes), the period measurement is already started, and therefore the processes of S2803 to S2805 are skipped. The process moves to S2806. In addition, in the processing of S2803, when it is determined that the first ball passage sensor S3 does not detect the passage of the sphere (S2803), immediately after the storage channel 700e is changed to the released state, the sphere still remains. Since it has not reached the first ball passage sensor S3, this processing is ended as it is.

  In the process of S2806, it is determined whether or not there is a ball entering the specific general entrance 630 (S2806). In the process of S2806, if it is determined that there is no ball entering the specific general entrance 630 (S2806: No), then it is determined whether the second ball passage sensor S4 detects passage of the ball ( S2807), if the passage of the ball is not detected (S2807: No), it is determined whether the value of the passage counter 223ae has reached the upper limit (the value corresponding to 1 second) (S2808). In the processing of S2808, when it is determined that the upper limit has not been reached (S2808: No), 1 is added to the value of the passage counter 223ae (S2809), and this processing is ended. Thus, in the process of S2805, when the value of the passage counter 223ae is set to "1", the ball enters the specific general entrance 630, or the second ball passage sensor S4 detects the passage of the ball, or The value of the passage counter 223ae is incremented by "1" every time this process is executed (every 1 ms) until the value of the passage counter 223ae reaches the upper limit (addition to a value indicating 1 second).

  On the other hand, in the processing of S2806, when it is determined that there is a ball entering the specific general entrance 630 (S2806: Yes), the passing period of the ball (the ball is the first value) based on the current value of the passage counter 223ae. The period from passing the one-ball passing sensor S3 to entering the specific general entrance 630 is calculated (S2811), and information indicating the calculated passing period is set in the ball passing information storage area 223ac (S2812). ), And proceeds to the processing of S2813. Also, in the processing of S2807, even when the second ball passage sensor S4 detects the passage of the sphere (S2812: Yes), the sphere passage period (the sphere is the first sphere passage sensor) based on the current value of the passage counter 223ae. The period after passing S3 until passing the second ball passage sensor S4 is calculated (S2811), the process of S2812 is executed, and the process proceeds to S2813.

  In the process of S2808, when it is determined that the value of the passage counter 223ae is the upper limit value (a value indicating 1 second) (S2808: Yes), the first sphere passage sensor S3 detects the passage of the sphere for a predetermined period. Since the ball has not entered the specific general entrance 630 during (1 second) and has not passed the second ball passage sensor S4, there is a possibility of ball clogging, so an error command Is set (S2810), and the process proceeds to S2813.

  In the process of S2813, since the process for the sphere whose passage is detected by the first sphere passage sensor S3 is completed, the sphere passage flag 223n is set to OFF (S2813), and the value of the passage counter 223ae is reset (S2814). , This process ends.

  In the present embodiment, in this ball passage monitoring process (S2115), a process of correcting the effect mode of the timing effect (operation effect) is executed based on the period information indicating the ball passage period stored in the ball passage information storage area 223ac. To be done. Specifically, based on the period until the ball that has flowed down the storage channel 700e passes through the specific general entrance 630 or the second ball passage sensor S4, the player is given the second time in the timing effect (operation effect). A correction process for changing the display timing of the effect pointer that indicates the timing of operating the frame button (release button) 22b is executed. The details of this correction processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 63, but by correcting the effect mode of the timing effect (operation effect) based on the passing period of the sphere, the timing effect (operation effect) is improved. It is possible to more closely associate the effect mode to be executed with the actual ball flow situation, and it is possible to provide an effect that does not give the player a feeling of strangeness.

  In the present embodiment, a reference period required for a ball that has passed the first ball passage sensor S3 to enter the specific general ball entrance 630 and a ball that has passed the first ball passage sensor S3 are specified general The mounting position of the second ball passage sensor S4 is determined so that the reference period required to enter the ball entrance 630 is the same. Thereby, using both the passing period calculated when the ball enters the specific general entrance 630 and the passing period calculated when the ball passes through the second ball passing sensor S4, It is possible to determine whether the timing effect needs correction.

  The method of measuring the passage period is not limited to the above-mentioned contents, and is based on, for example, the case where a predetermined condition is satisfied (when the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated). May be started, or the passage period may be measured only when the ball enters the specific general entrance 630. Further, the arrangement position of the second ball passage sensor S4 is not limited to the present embodiment, and the second ball passage sensor S4 is provided at a position having a passage period different from the passage period of the ball entering the specific general entrance 630. May be provided.

  Next, the storage state monitoring process (S2116) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the storage state monitoring process (S2116). The storage state monitoring process (S2116) is one process of the main process (see FIG. 49) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the storage channel 700e in the board unit 700 (see FIG. 3). (See FIG. 3) This is a process for determining that spheres are stored above.

  Here, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, a first storage device 770 and a second storage device 771 are provided as storage devices capable of storing balls on the game board 13, and a maximum of five storage devices are provided. It is configured to be able to store the ball. Each storage device has a first storage valve 770a and a second storage valve 771a, respectively. The first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a are second frame buttons (release buttons) that can be operated by the player. The operation is controlled so that the stored spheres flow down one by one, based on the operation (pressing) performed on 22b. Further, in this embodiment, the storage detection sensor S2 capable of detecting the presence of the first sphere stored when the second storage valve 771a is in the closed state, and the upper limit number of spheres (5 A storage upper limit sensor S1 capable of detecting that the individual balls are stored is provided, and the storage state of the spheres on the storage channel 700e can be determined.

  In the storage state monitoring process (S2116), first, it is determined whether the storage detection sensor S2 is on (S2851). When it is determined in the process of S2851 that the storage detection sensor S2 is on (S2851: Yes), it is determined whether the storage state flag 223k is on (S2852), and it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is not on. In the case (S2852: No), the storage state flag 223k is set to ON, and the process proceeds to S2856. On the other hand, in the process of S2852, when it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is on (S2852: Yes), the process of S2853 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2856.

  In addition, in the processing of S2851, when it is determined that the storage detection sensor S2 is off (S2851: No), it is then determined whether the storage state flag 223k is on (S2854), and it is determined that it is on. In this case, the storage state flag 223k is set to OFF (S2855), and the process proceeds to S2856. On the other hand, in the process of S2854, when it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is off (S2854: No), the process of S2855 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2856. In this way, the setting of the storage state flag 223k is updated at any time based on the detection result of the storage detection sensor S2.

  In the process of S2856, it is determined whether the storage upper limit sensor S1 is on (S2856). In the process of S2856, if it is determined that the storage upper limit sensor S1 is on, that is, if it is determined that the upper limit amount of balls is stored in the storage channel 700e (S2856: Yes), the storage upper limit flag It is determined whether 223m is set to on (S2857), and when the storage upper limit flag 223m is off (S2857: No), it is determined whether the storage state flag 223k is set to on (S2858), and storage is performed. When it is determined that the state flag 223k is ON (S2858: Yes), the storage upper limit flag 223m is set to ON (S2859), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, in the processing of S2858, when it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is off (S2858: No), the storage upper limit sensor S1 detects the sphere even though the storage detection sensor S2 does not detect the sphere. Since it is in the state of being detected, an error command is set (S2860), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2857, when the storage upper limit flag 223m is turned on (S2857: Yes), this process is ended as it is.

  In addition, in the processing of S2856, when it is determined that the storage upper limit sensor S1 is off (S2856: No), it is next determined whether the storage upper limit flag 223m is on (S2861), and it is not on (off. If it is determined to be (No) (S2861: NO), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2861 that it is on (S2861: Yes), the storage upper limit flag 223m is set to off (S2862), and this process is ended.

  As described above, in the storage state monitoring process (S2116) in the present embodiment, the storage state of the spheres on the storage channel 700e and the presence / absence of sphere storage are determined, and various flags (storage state flag 223k, storage state). Since the upper limit flag 223m) and the error command can be set, the effect based on the storage state of the storage channel 700e can be executed by the voice lamp control device 113.

  Next, the lamp output process (S2103) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing this lamp output processing (S2103). This lamp output process (S2103) is one of the main processes (see FIG. 49) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and sets the lamp lighting command transmitted to the lamp display device 227. This is processing for. Here, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 19, as a lamp display device 227, a decorative lamp 227a used for an effect or the like provided over the entire pachinko machine 10 and a board unit 700 (FIG. 3). (See) a cover member 710 provided so as to cover a part of the cover member 710, and a transmission lamp 227b for making the inside of the cover member 710 transparent so that the player can visually recognize it, and another lamp 227c. Has been.

  When the lamp output process (S2103) is executed, it is first determined whether or not it is within a predetermined period (30 seconds) after the startup process of the voice lamp control device 113 is currently executed (S2901). Here, the predetermined period is measured using a timer (not shown) clocked by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. In the process of S2901, when it is determined that the time is within 30 seconds (S2901: Yes), the transmission lamp lighting command is set (S2904), and the process proceeds to S2905.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the cover member 710 is provided in order to prevent the player from visually recognizing the operation status of the movable valve 750 in the normal game state. As described above, the cover member 710 is configured to irradiate a predetermined light (light of the transmission lamp) from the back surface so as to change from a shielded state where the inside is difficult to see to a transmitted state where the inside is visible. There is. Then, during a predetermined period after the power is turned on to the gaming machine (a predetermined period after the startup process is executed), the transparent lamp is turned on regardless of the gaming state. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, that is, at the timing when the pachinko machine 10 is inspected, the inside of the board unit 700 covered by the cover member 710 can be easily visually recognized.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2901, if it is determined that the current time is not within the predetermined period (30 seconds) after the startup process of the voice lamp control device 113 is performed (after the predetermined period (30 seconds) has elapsed) ( (S2901: No), next, it is determined whether the first ball passage sensor S3 detects the passage of a ball (S2902). In the process of S2902, when the first ball passage sensor S3 detects the passage of the ball (S2902: Yes), a transmission lamp lighting command is issued so that the player can visually recognize the ball having passed the first ball passage sensor S3. The setting is made (S2904), and the process proceeds to S2905. The transmission lamp lighting command in this case is set so that the transmission lamp 227b is lit for a sufficient time (for example, 0.7 seconds) for the sphere to pass through the area covered by the cover member 710. However, the transmission lamp 227b is turned off, for example, on condition that a ball has entered the specific general entrance 630 or that the second ball passage sensor S4 has detected the passage of the ball. You may. Accordingly, the period during which the cover member 710 is in the transparent state can be suppressed to a necessary minimum, and it is difficult for the player to grasp the operation status of the movable valve 750.

  Here, in the present embodiment, in the board unit 700, a region in which the balls stored in the storage channel 700e can flow down (a region in which the specific general ball inlet 630 and the movable valve 750 are provided) is difficult to visually recognize. Is covered by a cover member 710 (see FIG. 2). This makes it possible to prevent the player from visually recognizing the operation status of the movable valve 750. However, when the ball passes through the area covered by the cover member 710, the player can grasp the whereabouts of the ball. However, there is a fear that the player will be dissatisfied. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is determined that the sphere passes through the area covered by the cover member 710 by detecting the sphere by the first sphere passage sensor S3, and the cover member 710 is changed to the transparent state. With this configuration, the player can be surely grasped the passing (flowing-down) state of the ball, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind. Further, in a normal state (a state in which the transmission lamp is not lit), the cover member in which the inside cannot be visually recognized is changed to a transparent state in which the inside can be visually recognized, and thus the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 is provided. It is possible to make a change and make it easier for the player to notice that the ball passes through the portion covered by the cover member 710.

  In the process of S2902, when the first ball passage sensor S3 does not detect the passage of the ball (S2902: No), it is then determined whether or not the specific effect is executed (S2903). In the process of S2903, when it is determined that the specific effect is being executed (S2903: Yes), the transmission lamp lighting command is set based on the effect mode of the specific effect (S2904), and the process proceeds to S2905. Here, in the process of S2903, the determined specific effect is a case where the display variation pattern command set in the variable display setting process (S2114 of FIG. 55) of the voice lamp control device 113 is a specific effect. During the production, the production mode using the transmission lamp lighting command is executed. As a result, the cover member 710 can be changed to the transparent state only when the specific condition is satisfied in the variable effect indicating the lottery result of the special symbol, so that the player can grasp the operation state of the movable valve, It is possible to provide a game play in which the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated by itself. Further, to the player who has played the game in which the special symbol lottery is executed, regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery, it is possible to give a privilege that is advantageous to the player (a privilege that allows the cover member 710 to pass through). Therefore, there is an effect that the player's motivation for playing the game can be increased.

  In the present embodiment, the transmission lamp 227b is turned on when it is determined that the specific effect is being executed. However, for example, the specific effect is being executed (the specific effect is set. ) State, it is determined whether or not spheres are stored in the storage channel 700e, and only when it is determined that the spheres are stored, the effect of turning on the transmission lamp 227b is executed, and the spheres are not stored. If it is determined that, the effect of lighting the decorative lamp 227a provided near the cover member 710 instead of the transmission lamp 227b may be executed. With this configuration, the cover member 710 is unnecessarily changed to the transparent state, and thus it is possible to prevent the player from unnecessarily visually recognizing the operation status of the movable valve 750.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the variable display setting process (S2114 in FIG. 55) of the voice lamp control device 113, when the set display variation pattern command is a specific effect, the transmission lamp 227b is turned on. However, in addition to that, for example, after the last jackpot, for example, the special symbol lottery number (variation number) exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 500 times) without winning the jackpot. On the condition that the cover member 710 is in the transparent state, the cover member 710 may be in the transparent state while the cover member 710 is in the transparent state while a predetermined period is timed by the real time clock (RTC). The lighting control may be executed. In the case where the cover member 710 is configured to be transparent for a long period of time (a period in which the special symbol changes a predetermined number of times (for example, 30 times) or a timed period is a long period of time (for example, 10 minutes)), You may make it display the guide display which guides the game which hits a ball toward the storage channel 700e on the 3rd symbol display device 81. As a result, the player can be surely notified of the advantageous game.

  Returning to FIG. 58, the description will be continued. In the process of S2903, when it is determined that the specific effect is not executed (S2903: No), or after the process of S2904 is finished, the decoration lamp lighting command is set according to the current state (game state). Then (S2905), this processing ends. The decoration lamp lighting command is variously set according to the variation pattern to be executed, the current game state, and the like.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 59, the frame button input monitoring / effect process (S2107) will be described. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring / effect process (S2107). In this frame button input monitoring / production process (2107), the input of whether or not the frame buttons (the first frame button 22a and the second frame button 22b) operated by the player to enhance the production effect are pressed is monitored. However, this is a process of setting to produce an effect corresponding to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. In this process, when an operation on the frame button (first frame button 22a, second frame button 22b) is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated. Settings and various flags are set based on the operation contents.

  Specifically, it is determined whether or not the operation timing of the frame button (first frame button 22a, second frame button 22b) in the period in which the timing effect (operation effect) is executed is the pressing success period, and the determination result Frame buttons (first frame button 22a, second frame) during a period in which a display command for displaying effects (success effects, failure effects) based on is set or a difficulty level of timing effects (operation effects) is selected. Based on the operation of the button 22b), a process of setting the difficulty level of the timing effect (operation effect) is executed.

  When the frame button input monitoring / effect process (S2107) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the effect executing flag 223x is set to ON (S3001). When it is determined in the process of S3001 that the effect executing flag 223x is on (S3001: Yes), it is next determined whether the release operation flag 223p is on (S3002). In the process of S3002, when it is determined that the release operation flag 223p is ON (S3002: Yes), the release operation flag 223p is set to OFF (S3003), and the process proceeds to S3005. On the other hand, if it is determined that the release operation flag is off (S3002: No), then it is determined whether the second frame button 22a has been operated (pressed) (S3004).

  In the processing of S3004, when it is determined that the second frame button 22a has not been operated (pressed) (S3004: No), this processing ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3004 that the second frame button 22a has been operated (pressed) (S3004: Yes), the process proceeds to S3005.

  Here, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 19, the first frame button (effect button) 22a is configured to output an operation signal based on an operation to the audio lamp control device 113, The second frame button (release button) 22b is configured to output an operation signal based on an operation to the main control device 110. Then, the timing effect (operation effect) in which the effect mode is set by the voice lamp control device 113 is based on the operation on the first frame button (effect button) 22a and the second frame button (release button) 22b described above. The effect mode (effect result) is configured to be variable.

  Therefore, in the frame button input monitoring / production process (S2107) of FIG. 59, a process of determining whether or not there is an operation (press) on the first frame button (production button) 22a (S3004), and release from the main controller 110. A process (S3002) of determining whether or not the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated (pressed) based on the setting content of the release operation flag 223p that is turned on when the operation command is received is executed. It Thereby, the operation contents for the plurality of operation means (first frame button 22a, second frame button 22b) whose operation signals are output to different control means (main controller 110, voice lamp controller 113) are collected. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly perform the variable setting of the effect mode corresponding to the operation to each operation means (the first frame button 22a and the second frame button 22b), and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

  Further, in the present embodiment, before the process of determining the operation on the first frame button 22a (S3004), the process of determining the setting content of the release operation flag 223p indicating the operation status of the second frame button 22b (S3002). Is configured to run. This is because when both frame buttons (the first frame button 22a and the second frame button 22b) are simultaneously operated, the effect is executed based on the operation on the second frame button 22b. That is, in the present embodiment, the second frame button (release button) 22b changes the state of the storage device (first storage device 770, second storage device 771) from the closed (non-release) state to the open (release) state. It is an operation means provided for changing the value, and since it is possible to give a privilege to the player by operating the second frame button (release button) 22b, the first frame button simply provided for performance. The effect on the game is greatly different from that of the (production button) 22a. Therefore, in the timing effect (operation effect), the presence / absence determination of the operation of the second frame button (release button) 22b that may influence the result of the game is performed more than the presence / absence determination of the first frame button (production button) 22a. Higher priority. With such a configuration, an effect that is executed by using both an operation on the operation means that may affect the result of the game and an operation on the operation means for the effect that does not affect the result of the game ( In the timing effect (operation effect), it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the result of the game.

  Returning to FIG. 59, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S3005, the pressing period information corresponding to the button type of which the pressing is detected is read from the pressing period information storage area 223y (S3005). That is, in the process of S3002, when it is determined that the release operation flag 223p is ON and the process proceeds to S3005, the pressing period information corresponding to the second frame button 22b is read from the pressing period information storage area 223y, and S3004. When it is determined that the pressing of the first frame button 22a is detected in the process of step S3 and the process proceeds to step S3005, the pressed period information corresponding to the first frame button 22a is read from the pressed period information storage area 223y.

  Then, when the processing of S3005 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the frame button operation this time has been performed during the successful pressing period based on the pressing period information read by the processing of S3005 (S3006). If it is determined that it is not during the pressing success period (S3006: No), the display failure effect command is set (S3007), and the process proceeds to S3011. Here, when the display failure effect command is set, “bad” is displayed as the result display mode 720 as shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3006 that the pressing has been successfully performed (S3006: Yes), it is determined whether the operation determined in this process is the second frame button (release button) 22b. (S3008). In the process of S3008, if it is determined that the operation is the second frame button (release button) 22b (S3008: Yes), the display release button success effect command is set (S3009), and the process proceeds to S3011. . In the processing of S3008, when it is determined that the operation is not the operation of the second frame button (release button) 22b but the operation of the first frame button (production button) 22a (S3008: No), the display effect is displayed. A button success effect command is set (S3010), and the process proceeds to S3011.

  Here, when the display release button success effect command is set, as shown in FIG. 10B, “good” is displayed as the result display mode 720 and the second frame button 22b is schematically displayed. The left button display 715 shown is changed to the pressed state. Further, when the display effect button success effect command is set, as shown in FIG. 11A, “good” is displayed as the result display mode 720 and the first frame button 22a is schematically shown. The middle button display 716 is changed to the pressed state. Further, in the timing effect (operation effect) of this time, when a ball enters the specific general entrance 630, a specific entrance display mode 721 indicating that is displayed to the specific general entrance 630. It is displayed in a mode (“15” indicating the number of prize balls) showing a privilege given to the player by entering the ball.

  Returning to FIG. 59, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S3011, it is determined whether or not the difficulty level selection flag 223ab is set to ON (S3011). In the processing of S3011, if the difficulty level selection flag 223ab is off (S3011: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S3011, if the difficulty selection flag 223ab is turned on (S3011: Yes), it is determined whether the first frame button 22a is pressed (S3012), and if it is pressed (S3012: Yes). Next, the difficulty level information indicating the selected difficulty level is set in the difficulty level storage area 223aa (S3013), the difficulty level selection flag 223ab is set to OFF (S3014), and this processing is ended. Further, in the processing of S3012, when it is determined that the first frame button 22a is not pressed (S3012: No), this processing is directly terminated.

  Next, the timing effect setting process (S2111) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the contents of the timing effect setting process (S2111). This timing effect setting process (S2111) is a process for setting the content of the timing effect (operation effect) to be executed.

  When the timing effect setting process (S2111) is executed, it is first determined whether the timing effect setting flag 223w is on (S3101). In the process of S3101, when it is determined that the timing effect setting flag 223w is ON (S3101: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the present is a big hit (S3102), and when it is determined that a big hit is in progress. (S3102: Yes), the jackpot timing effect pre-setting process (S3103) for setting the effect mode of the timing effect (operation effect) executed during the jackpot is executed, and the process proceeds to S3105. This jackpot timing effect preset processing (S3103) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 61 (a).

  On the other hand, in the process of S3102, when it is determined that the big hit is not in progress (S3102: No), the normal timing effect presetting process for setting the effect mode of the timing effect (operation effect) based on the variable display of the special symbol. (S3104) is executed, and the process proceeds to S3105. This normal timing effect presetting process (S3104) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 61 (b).

  In the process of S3105, the timing effect common setting process that is commonly executed is executed regardless of the timing (between big hit and normal) of the timing effect (operation effect) (S3105), and then this process To finish. This timing effect common setting process (S3105) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  Further, in the process of S3101, when it is determined that the timing effect setting flag 223w is off (S3101: No), the timing effect correction process (S3106) for correcting the entry timing in the timing effect (operation effect). After that, this process ends. This timing effect correction process (S3106) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 63.

  Here, the jackpot timing effect presetting process (S3103) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61A is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot timing effect presetting process (S3103). This jackpot timing effect preset process (S3103) is a frame button (first frame button 22a, second frame button 22b) in the timing effect (operation effect) to be executed based on the difficulty level set during the jackpot. The sound (sound effect) output at the time of operation is set.

  When the jackpot timing effect presetting process (S3103) is executed, first, the difficulty level information set in the difficulty level storage area 223aa is read (S3131), and the pointer setting condition corresponding to the read difficulty level is acquired. (S3132). Specifically, from the difficulty level information set in the difficulty level storage area 223aa, the operation timing of the second frame button (release button) 22b and the timing at which the ball can enter the specific general entrance 630 The number of times of matching, the number of times of operation of the second frame button (release button) 22b, and the display mode information of the effect pointer corresponding to the difficulty level are acquired.

  When the process of S3132 is completed, it is then determined whether the read difficulty level information has a low difficulty level (S3133). In the processing of S3133, when it is determined that the difficulty level information is low difficulty level (S3133: No), the range 1 data 222c2 indicating the low level of difficulty is read from the music information storage area 222c (S3134), and corresponds to the range 1. A voice command is set (S3135), and this processing ends. As the voice command set here, since the tone range 1 indicates the high tone range in the music information, the high tone sound (sound effect) is set to correspond to it.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S3133, when it is determined that the difficulty level information is high difficulty level (S3133: No), the range 2 data 222c3 indicating the high level of difficulty is read from the music information storage area 222c (S3136), and the range 2 is set. The corresponding voice command is set (S3137), and this processing ends. As the voice command set here, since the sound range 2 indicates the low sound range in the music information, a low sound (sound effect) is set to correspond to it.

  Next, the normal timing effect presetting process (S3104) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61B is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal timing effect presetting process (S3104). In the normal timing effect presetting process (S3104), based on the fact that the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated during the successful press period when the lottery result of the target special symbol is a hit. The setting is made so that the lottery result is notified.

  When the normal timing effect preset process (S3104) is executed, first, the pointer setting condition of low difficulty is acquired (S3151), and then it is determined whether or not the change of the special symbol this time is a hit change ( S3152). When it is determined in the process of S3152 that the hit is changing (S3152: Yes), the hit pointer setting flag 223af is set to ON (S3153), and the pointer display number is acquired from the pointer setting condition acquired in the process of S3151. Is subtracted by 1 (S3154), and this processing ends.

  Next, the timing effect common setting processing (S3105) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the content of the timing effect common setting process (S3105). This timing effect common setting process (S3105) is the above-described jackpot timing effect pre-setting process (see S3103 of FIG. 61 (a)) or normal timing effect pre-setting process (see S3104 of FIG. 61 (b)). ), The process for determining the effect mode of the timing effect (operation effect) is performed based on the pointer setting condition of the timing effect (operation effect) and the operating condition of the movable valve 750.

  When the timing effect common setting process (S3105) is executed, first. Based on the current movable state (movable state) of the movable valve 750 stored in the movable valve state storage area 223s, the closing timing information up to 30 seconds later is read from the closing timing storage area 223v (S3201). Then, the entry timing information stored in the entry timing storage area 223ad is read, and the entry possible timing information is calculated by subtracting the entry timing information from the closing timing (S3202).

  Then, it is determined whether or not there is a timing at which the pointer setting condition of the current timing effect (operation effect) matches the entry possible timing information calculated in the process of S3202 (S3203). Specifically, a location where the effect pointer displayable area (see FIG. 27) corresponding to the musical range data of the music set as the pointer setting condition and the entry possible timing information match is set as the pointer setting condition. It is determined whether or not there is a matching portion for the number of matching times. In this case, since the possible entry information is calculated based on the closing timing of the movable valve 750 whose operation is controlled according to a predetermined rule, the musical piece executed in the timing effect (operation effect). It is determined whether or not there is a matching timing by shifting the start timing of (1) within a predetermined period (10 seconds at maximum) (see FIG. 16).

  In the process of S3203, when it is determined that there is a matching timing (S3203: Yes), the start timing of the timing effect (operation effect) is set based on the matching timing (S3204), while in the process of S3203, If it is determined that there is no matching timing (S3203: No), a special pointer display position is set in a region other than the effect pointer displayable region (see FIG. 27) corresponding to the musical range data of the music set as the pointer setting condition, Match timing is created (S3205). After that, the effect start timing is set based on the created matching timing (S3204).

  When the process of S3204 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the hit pointer setting flag 223af is set to ON (S3206). In the process of S3206, when it is determined that the hit pointer setting flag 223af is turned on (S3206: Yes), that is, the timing effect (operation effect) of this time is executed based on the variation effect of the special symbol that is won per hit. If it is, the second frame button (release button) is set to a non-match point at which the pointer setting condition of the current timing effect (operation effect) does not match the entry possible timing information calculated in the process of S3202. One display pointer for operating 22b is set (S3207), the hit pointer setting flag 223af is set to OFF (S3208), and the process proceeds to S3209. On the other hand, in the process of S3206, when it is determined that the hit pointer setting flag 223af is off (S3206: No), the processes of S3207 and S3208 are skipped and the process proceeds to S3209.

  With this configuration, in the timing effect (operation effect) executed during the change of the special symbol, the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated at a non-matching point that does not match the possible entry timing information. It is possible to set a display pointer for As a result, even if the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated at an appropriate timing with respect to the display pointer for operating the second frame button (release button) 22b, the specific general entrance 630 When the ball does not enter, it is possible to make the player expect the lottery result of the changing special symbol to be a big hit, and to improve the interest of the game.

  In the case of using such a configuration, when it is determined that the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated at an appropriate timing with respect to the display pointer set to the non-match point described above, You may comprise so that the 3 symbol display device 81 may be notified of the lottery result of a special symbol. Thereby, the operation of the second frame button (release button) 22b can be used as means for informing the lottery result of the special symbol.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display pointer is set to the non-matching point described above only when the special symbol lottery result is a win, but in other cases, that is, the special symbol lottery result is a win. Even if not, the non-match point may be set.

  In the process of S3209, display pointers for the number of times of matching set in the pointer setting condition are set (S3209), and the set display pointer (the display pointer set in the process of S3207 and the display pointer set in the process of S3209) are set. The successful press period is determined in association with the display pointer) and set in the press period information storage area 223y (S3210). When the process of S3210 is finished, it is then determined whether the present is a big hit (S3211), and when it is determined that a big hit is made (S3211: Yes), various contents set in the present process are temporarily rendered. The data is stored in the storage area 223r (S3215), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S3211, when it is determined that the present is not a big hit (S3211: No), the display timing effect command is set based on the various contents set in this process (S3212), and the effect is being executed. The flag 223x is set to ON (S3213), the timing effect setting flag 223w is set to OFF (S3214), and this processing is ended.

  Next, the timing effect correction process (S3106) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the content of the timing effect correction process (S3106). In this timing effect correction process (S3106), a process for correcting the timing at which the ball can enter the specific general entrance 630 set in the timing effect (operation effect) is executed based on the actual ball passing period. . Here, in the present embodiment, as a ball entry timing, a ball entry timing in which a ball passage period is set to 0.5 seconds (normal) and a ball entry timing in which a ball passage period is set to 0.4 seconds (early). It is configured such that any one of the ball entry timings (delays) in which the ball passing period is set to 0.6 seconds can be selected and set in the ball entry timing storage area 223ad. Then, based on the ball entry timing information set in this process, the passing period of the ball corresponding to the ball entry timing information set in the ball entry timing storage area 223ad is subtracted from the closing timing information of the movable valve 750. Then, the timing at which the ball can enter the specific general entrance 630 is set.

  When the timing effect correction process (S3106) is executed, first, the passage period set in the ball passage information storage area 223ac is read (S3301), the read passage period is analyzed, and the passage period (short) and The number of pieces of information for the period (normal) and the passing period (long) are calculated (S3302). Then, it is determined whether the calculated number of pieces of passing period information is greater than the number of pieces of passing period (long) information (S3303). In the process of S3303, when it is determined that the number of pieces of information in the passage period (long) is smaller than the number of pieces of information in the passage period (short) (S3303: No), the calculated number of pieces of passage period information is the passage period (normal). It is determined whether the number of items of information is greater than or equal to the number of information of the passing period (short) (S3304). In the process of S3304, when it is determined that the number of pieces of information in the passing period (normal) is equal to or more than the number of pieces of information in the passing period (short) (S3304: Yes), the present process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3304, when it is determined that the number of pieces of information in the passing period (short) is larger (S3304: No), it is determined whether the currently set entrance timing information is the entrance timing (late). It is determined (S3305). In the process of S3305, when it is determined that it is not the entrance timing (late) (S3305: No), the timing (early) is selected as the timing at which the specific general entrance 630 can be entered, and the entrance timing is stored. The area is set (S3306), and then this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S3305, when it is determined that it is the entrance timing (late) (S3305: Yes), the timing (normal) is selected as the timing at which the specific general entrance 630 can enter, and the entrance The timing storage area is set (S3310), and then this processing ends.

  In addition, in the processing of S3303, when it is determined that the number of pieces of information in the passage period (long) is greater than or equal to the number of pieces of information in the passage period (short) (S3303: Yes), the calculated number of pieces of passage period information is the passage period. It is determined whether the number of pieces of information (normal) is equal to or larger than the number of pieces of information in the passage period (long) (S3307). In the process of S3307, when it is determined that the number of pieces of information in the passage period (normal) is equal to or larger than the number of pieces of information in the passage period (long) (S3307: Yes), the present process is directly terminated.

  In the process of S3307, when it is determined that the number of pieces of information in the passing period (normal) is smaller than the number of pieces of information in the passing period (long) (S3307: No), then the currently set entrance timing information is entered. It is determined whether it is timing (early) (S3308). In the process of S3308, when it is determined that it is not the entrance timing (early) (S3308: No), the timing (late) is selected as the timing at which the specific general entrance 630 can be entered, and the entrance timing is stored. The area is set (S3309). On the other hand, in the process of S3308, when it is determined that it is the ball entry timing (early) (S3305: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S3310 described above, and then this process ends.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the sphere passes through the predetermined section (the section from the first sphere passage sensor S3 to the specific general entrance 630 or the second sphere passage sensor S4). The timing at which the ball can be entered into the specific general entrance 630 is corrected by changing the ball entry timing period that is subtracted from the closing timing of the movable valve 750 based on the passage period information obtained by measuring the period required for However, other configurations may be used, for example, the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated at an appropriate timing in the release of the storage device or in the timing effect (operation effect). This may be set as the start condition, and the period from the setting of the start condition to the passage of the specific general entrance 630 or the second ball passage sensor S4 may be measured. Even with this configuration, the same effect as that of the present embodiment can be obtained.

  Further, instead of changing the entry timing period, by changing the degree of progress of the effect executed based on the passing period information, even if the correction processing is performed so that the display pointer is displayed at an appropriate timing. good.

  Next, the movable valve operation counter updating process (S2112) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the contents of the movable valve operation counter updating process (S2112). In this movable valve operation counter update processing (S2112), processing for updating the movable valve operation counter 223t for updating the operation scenario of the movable valve 750 is executed.

  When the movable valve operation counter updating process (S2112) is executed, it is first determined whether or not a movable valve operation scenario is set (S3401). If it is determined that there is no setting in the process of S3401 (S3401: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting is made (S3401: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the movable valve operation counter is the upper limit value (S3402). Here, the value of the movable valve operation counter is a value necessary to execute the 24 operation scenarios set in the movable valve operation scenario table 202f, and the value of the counter corresponding to 732 seconds is set as the upper limit value. Has been done.

  In the process of S3402, when it is determined that the value is not the upper limit value (S3402: No), 1 is added to the value of the movable valve operation counter 223t (S3403), and this process is ended. On the other hand, in the processing of S3402, when it is determined that the value is the upper limit value (S3402: Yes), the value of the movable valve operation counter is set to 1 (S3404), and this processing is ended. As a result, the operation status of the movable valve 750 can be grasped at any time on the side of the voice lamp control device 113.

<Regarding Control Process of Display Control Device in First Embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 to 78. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and one frame from the image controller 237. There is V interrupt processing executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes a main process, and executes a command interrupt process or a V interrupt process in accordance with reception of a command or detection of a V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main processing is for executing initialization processing when the power is turned on.

  The activation of the main process is specifically performed according to the following flow. When the display control device 114 is powered on from the power supply device 115 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts execution of processing according to the fetched instruction, thereby activating the main processing.

  Here, if the boot program first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read the data and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address “0000H” and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H”. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, in the boot program, the NOR ROM 234d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Since this is a memory capable of reading data, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” within a short time after the address “0000H” is designated, the MPU 231 can activate the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S5001), and various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed so that the display control device 114 can be executed. To start.

  Here, the boot process (S5001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the boot process (S5001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the fixed value data are not stored in the dedicated program ROM provided by the conventional game machine, but are stored in the third symbol display device 81. The data of the image to be displayed is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored, while the control can be performed. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a low read speed particularly when performing random access. Therefore, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in the present boot processing, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing it is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d after the system reset is released and set in the buffer RAM 234c, Of the control programs stored in the 2 program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S5101). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the leading address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S5102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts execution of the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S5101.

  Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S5102, the MPU 231 can execute various processing while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetches the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute the processing corresponding to the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S5102, subsequently, the instruction pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs that are being stored are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S5103). Specifically, the control program and a part of fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) described above among the fixed value data are data tables. It is transferred to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S5104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of this boot processing (see S5001 in FIG. 65). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization processing (see S5002 in FIG. 65) (S5105), the execution of the boot program is completed, and the boot processing is completed.

  As described above, by executing the boot process (S5001), the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 loads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed by using.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and the fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect unit.

  On the other hand, instead of storing all boot programs in the NOR ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after system reset release are stored, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR ROM 234d having an extremely small capacity, it is possible to suppress the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time. You can

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 66, the predetermined amount of the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S5101 includes all the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although the configuration is not limited to this, the predetermined amount of the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S5101 is a boot program that executes the boot processing that should be processed subsequent to the processing of S5102. May be a part of. The boot program transferred here transfers a control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, by this, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is designated by an instruction pointer. Alternatively, the processing set in 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S5103 to S5105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Further, the boot program transferred by the processing of S5101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, by this, the top of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, a part of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, to the program storage area 233a. A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a process of transferring a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount and subsequently setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S5101. Alternatively, the processing of S5103 to S5105 may be executed after repeating the processing a plurality of times including the processing of S5102.

  As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case where a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released is stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described. It may be stored in the one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S5103 to S5105 without performing the processes of S5101 and S5102. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, and reduces the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the processing time of the boot process. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect part in the MPU 231 that can be performed after the boot process can be started earlier.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 65. When the boot process is completed, next, the initial setting process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S5002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. In addition, processing such as clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. As the initial value of each flag, “OFF” or “0” is set unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, immediately after the power is turned on, by checking whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the pachinko machine 10 is It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the activation can be started normally.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S5003). The transfer instruction includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the power-on main image area 235a is included. According to this transfer instruction, the image controller 237 outputs image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image of the resident video RAM 235. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating the transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a partial area of the internal memory. It may be written. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby recognizing that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do it.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S5003, the power-on fluctuation image is then generated. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S5004). The transfer instruction includes the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235). , The start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b which is the transfer destination, and the image controller, in accordance with this transfer instruction, outputs image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. It is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S5004, then the simple image display flag 233c is set. Is turned on (S5005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 76A) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image is executed (see S6502 in FIG. 76A).

  Further, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. Accordingly, during that time, the simple command determination process (see FIG. 67) is performed so that the power-on image (power-on main image or power-on variation image) is drawn in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 67B). 67 (b) S5308) and the simple display setting process (see S5309 of FIG. 67 (b)) are executed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to its slow reading speed, It takes a long time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, like the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on variation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the rest of the image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall-related person, when the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player stays resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without having to worry about whether the operation is stopped.

  Also, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without any problem when the power is turned on. That is, it is possible to immediately confirm that the operation efficiency is deteriorated by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed for the character ROM 234.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on main image is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after power-on, so the power-on main image is the third pattern. When the player starts the game while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball (start prize) into the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, and the start instruction of the variation effect is given. When it is received from the main control unit 110 via the voice lamp control unit 113, that is, when the display variation pattern command is received, the power-on variation image is immediately displayed during the variation effect period, and a simple variation is performed. You can direct. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image at power-on continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234. Since it is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it takes a long time to transfer the data, so that the main image continues to be displayed when the power is turned on after the power is turned on. However, since the pachinko machine 10 can perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after power-on, immediately after power-on, for example, power failure recovery. Immediately after that, even when the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing of S5005, the interrupt permission is set (S5006), and thereafter, the main processing executes the infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thereby, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S5006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, the command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 67A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when the command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S5201), and the process ends. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 67 (b) is a flowchart showing this V interrupt processing. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 32) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and display process of the image.

  As described above, the V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, the drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the image drawing process and the display process have not been completed, so that the drawing of a new image is started during the drawing of an image, It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed in response to a new drawing instruction.

  Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 67 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S5301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S5301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so not the power-on image but the normal effect image is the third symbol. In order to display on the display device 81, the command determination process (S5302) is executed, and then the display setting process (S5303) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S5302), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and the process according to the command is executed and the display demo command and the demo command are displayed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer data corresponding to the set display data table is set. The table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination processing, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the processing is executed. This is because the command determination processing is performed at 20 millisecond intervals when the V interrupt processing is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 millisecond. is there. Particularly, in the main controller 110, when the start of the variation effect is determined, it is highly possible that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the variation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and an effect image corresponding to the mode can be displayed. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 68 to 72.

  In the display setting process (S5303), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S5302) and the like, an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81. The content of is specifically specified. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing situation and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 73 to 75.

  After the display setting process is executed, next, a task process is executed (S5304). In this task process, the image is constructed based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, which is specified by the display setting process (S5303) or the simple display setting process (S5309). The type of the sprite (display object) to be specified is specified, and various parameters necessary for drawing such as the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S5305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Also, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 for normal use is sent to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. When a transfer instruction for transferring to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set, and even when a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously connected. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview production and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 76 and 77.

  Next, drawing processing is executed (S5306). In this drawing process, from the types of various sprites that make up one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite determined in the task process (S5304), and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S5305). , The drawing list shown in FIG. 32 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 78.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S5307). Then, the V interrupt process ends. Examples of the counter updated by the process of S5307 include a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop types indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, out-of-front / rear reach, reach other than out-of-front / reach, complete) The stop type table corresponding to (off, chance) is compared with the stop type counter, and the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S5301, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S5301: YES), it means that transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S5308) is executed, then the simple display setting process (S5309) is executed, and the process proceeds to S5304.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 68 to 72, the details of the above-described command determination processing (S5302) which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination processing, as shown in FIG. 68, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S5401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S5401: No), The command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S5401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S5403) that the new command is processed in the ON state is set to ON (S5402), and then the command For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S5403).

  Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S5404), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S5404: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S5405), the process returns to S5401.

  Details of the variation pattern command processing (S5405) will be described below with reference to FIG. FIG. 69A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This fluctuation pattern command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. The data is set in the buffer 233d (S5501).

  Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made in the main controller 110 for several seconds or more, no more than two display fluctuation pattern commands are received within 20 milliseconds. It is not possible for two or more display variation pattern commands to be stored in the command buffer area when executing, but some commands may change due to the influence of noise, etc. It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the processing of S5501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a feeling of strangeness.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d, in reality, fluctuations longer than the set display data table are set. Even if the time-varying fluctuating effect is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the fluctuating effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main control device 110 displays the next display. Until the pattern command is received, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuations in the design.

  Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S5501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5502). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each variable display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table determination flag corresponding to the variable display data table set by the processing of S5501 is turned on, and other variations The data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S5503). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table discrimination flag set in the process of S5503, it is possible to easily determine which fluctuation pattern the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. You can judge.

  Next, based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S5501, time data representing the variation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S5504), and the pointer is set. 233f is initialized to 0 (S5505). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S5506), the fluctuation pattern command process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S5505 is updated, while the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S5501 is updated. , The drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the processing of S5502. The transfer data information defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the table 233f, and the necessary sprite image data in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 for normal video R. To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  Further, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S5504 is used to measure the time of the variable effect specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable effect in the variable display data table ends. When it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main controller 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 68. In the processing of S5404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S5404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S5406), If there is a display variation type command (S5406: Yes), a stop type command process is executed (S5407), and the process returns to S5401.

  Details of the stop type command processing (S5407) will be described with reference to FIG. 69 (b). FIG. 69B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. The stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (big hit A, big hit B, out-of-front / rear reach, reach other than out-of-front / outside, complete disconnection, chance line) indicated by the display stop type command. Is determined (S5601), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 67 (b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device is displayed. The stop symbol after the variable effect displayed in 81 is finally set (S5602).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S5602 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are turned off. (S5603), and this processing ends.

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for identifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after the lapse of a predetermined time after the variation based on the data table is started. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S5602 is described. In the above-described task process (S5304), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the fluctuation was started, the stop symbol set by the process of S5602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S5603, and the specification thereof is performed. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the stopped symbol. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

  It should be noted that the main controller 110 always makes a determination of the start of fluctuations at a distance of several seconds or more, so that no two or more display stop type commands are received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination processing is executed. In this case, it is not possible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some commands change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command erroneously stops display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the processing of S5601, in case of determining that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out, and the stop type Determine the table. Thereby, the stop symbol corresponding to complete disengagement is set by the process of S5602.

  If the stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the "special symbol" is actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the "special symbol is out". The stop symbol corresponding to "the jackpot" is displayed, and the player may misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol jackpot", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the stop symbol corresponding to complete disengagement is set, and in reality, if the “special symbol jackpot”, the complete disengagement stop on the third symbol display device 81. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "special symbol jackpot", so that the player can be pleased.

  Returning to FIG. 68, the description will be continued. In the process of S5406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S5406: No), then it is determined whether or not the unprocessed command includes a display opening command (S5408), and If there is an opening command for use (S5408: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S5409), and the process returns to S5401.

  Details of the opening command process (S5409) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 70A is a flowchart showing the opening command process. The opening command process is a process corresponding to the display opening command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the opening command process, first, the opening display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5701). Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in the process of S5701 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5702).

  Then, based on the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S5701, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S5703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S5704). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S5705), the opening command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this opening command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S5704, from the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S5701, The drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and at the same time, in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the processing of S5702. The transfer data information defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the set transfer data table, and the necessary sprite image data in the set opening display data table is stored in the character ROM 234 in advance. As will be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, and controls the image controller 237.

  When the opening command process is executed, the opening transfer data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Thereby, the image data required for the round effect and the ending effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 while the opening effect is being performed on the third symbol display device 81. As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, the read speed is slow, so that the jackpot effect (opening effect, round effect, ending effect) is effected. It takes a long time before the image data used for the above is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The display round number command indicating the newly started round number is transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 in synchronization with the timing at which the opening effect in the third symbol display device 81 ends, and thus indicates the first round. When the image data necessary for the round effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after receiving the display round number command, a lot of waiting is required from the end of the opening effect to the start of the round effect. There is a possibility that time will be generated and the player may feel uncomfortable as to whether or not the movement is stopped.

  Further, the display ending command for instructing the start of the ending effect is transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 in synchronization with the timing when all the round effects (for 15 rounds) in the third symbol display device 81 are completed. If the image data required for the ending effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the display ending command is received, a lot of waiting time is required from the end of the round effect to the start of the ending effect. This may cause the player to feel uncomfortable as to whether or not the operation has stopped, and may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the opening command for display is received, the transfer of the data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is started from there, and by the end of the jackpot variation display on the third symbol display device 81. The control is performed so that the transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is completed. Thereby, when the opening effect is finished on the third symbol display device 81, the round effect can be immediately started on the third symbol display device 81, and all the round effects on the third symbol display device 81 (for 15 rounds). ) When it ends, the ending effect can be immediately started on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable as to whether the operation is stopped, or a sense of discomfort. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

  Returning to FIG. 68, the description will be continued. In the process of S5408, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S5408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command in the unprocessed commands (S5410), and the display is performed. If there is a use round number command (S5410: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S5411) and the process returns to S5401.

  Here, the details of the round number command process (S5411) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 70B is a flowchart showing the round number command processing. This round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data is displayed. The table buffer 233d is set (S5701). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S5702).

  Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S5701, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S5703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S5704). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S5705), the number-of-rounds command process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 68. In the processing of S5410, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S5410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S5412), and display is performed. If there is an ending command for use (S5412: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S5413), and the process returns to S5401.

  Here, the details of the ending command processing (S5413) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the ending command processing. This ending command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the ending command for display is determined, the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S5901). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S5902).

  Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S5901, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S5903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S5904). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S5905), the ending command process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 68. In the processing of S5412, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S5412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command in the unprocessed commands (S5414), and the back image is displayed. If there is a change command (S5414: Yes), the back image change command process is executed (S5415), and the process returns to S5401.

  Here, the details of the back image change command processing (S5415) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 72A is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing. This back image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the back image change command processing, first, the back image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S6503) of the change of the back image due to the reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S6001). . Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and the back images corresponding to other back image types are turned on. The determination flag is set to OFF (S6002), the back image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set in the process of S6001 is turned on, the changed back image type is specified from the back image determination flag set in the process of S6002. . If the specified back image type is the back image B or the back image C, as described above, a part of the image data corresponding to those back images is made resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the rear image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the task processing, when it is specified that any one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed depending on the back surface type of the back surface image defined in the display data table, the back surface image determination flag set in the processing of S6002 is changed. The RAM type in which the back image type to be displayed at that time is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified in accordance with the passage of time, and the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored. (The resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, no more than two back surface image change commands are received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination processing is executed. If there are two or more backside image change commands stored in the command buffer area, some commands may change due to the influence of noise and another command may change the backside image by mistake. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S5702, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Further, it is also possible to extract an arbitrary one of the back image change commands and turn on the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command. Since this change of the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set it according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 68. In the process of S5414, if it is determined that there is no back image change command (S5414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S5416), and there is an error command. If (S5416: Yes), the error command process is executed (S5417), and the process returns to S5401.

  Here, the details of the error command processing (S5417) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 72B is a flowchart showing the error command processing. This error command process is to execute a process corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S6101). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are turned off (S6102), and the error command The process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S6101, the error type generated is judged from the error determination flag set by the process of S6102, and the error type is dealt with. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the processing of S6102, the error determination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player or the person involved in the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence status of the error.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 68. In the process of S5416, if it is determined that there is no error command (S5416: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S5418), and the process returns to S5401.

  In the processing of S5401, which is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S5401: Yes). ), And the processes of S5402 to S5418 are executed again. Then, the processes of S5401 to S5418 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S5401 that there are no unprocessed new commands, this command determination The process ends.

  Note that the simple command determination process (S5309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 67B) is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, only the commands necessary for displaying the image at power-on, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command are displayed. While extracting and executing the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 69 (a)) and the stop type command processing (see FIG. 69 (b)), which are the processing corresponding to the respective commands, regarding other commands, The process corresponding to the command is discarded without being executed.

  Here, in the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 69 (a)) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on becomes the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S5501. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S5502, a process of writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing its contents is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 73 to 75, details of the above-described display setting process (S5303) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting processing, as shown in FIG. 73, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S6201), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S6201: No), In the command determination process executed first, it is determined that the new command has not been processed, the processes of S6202 to S6204 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S6205. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S6201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and the new command flag is set to off (S6202), and then S6203 to S6204. The process corresponding to the new command is executed by the process.

  In the process of S6203, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S6203). If the error occurrence flag is on (S6203: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S6204).

  Here, details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, referring to the error determination flag, all the error determinations that are set to ON The warning image data for displaying the warning image of the error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S6301).

  In task processing, based on this expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that composes the warning image is specified, and it is necessary to draw the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc. for each sprite. Determine various parameters.

  Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S6301, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S6302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 73. After the warning image setting process (S6204) or in the process of S6203, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S6203: No), the process proceeds to S6205.

  In S6205, pointer update processing is executed (S6205). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the pointer updating process. This pointer update processing acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the respective buffers of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

  In this pointer update processing, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S6401). That is, in principle, the updating process is performed so that the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address “0000H”, and the entity of each data is defined after the address “0001H”, the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 while being stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer updating process, so that the value is updated in order from the address "0001H". Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S6401, whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is then End information. Is determined (S6402). As a result, if it is End information (S6402: Yes), it means that in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the pointer 233f is updated past the address at which the actual data is described.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is the demo display data table (S6403), and if it is the demo display data table (S6403: Yes), the display data table buffer is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demo display data table set in 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S6404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S6405), and this processing is finished and displayed. Return to the setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the beginning of the demo display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S6403, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S6403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 (S6406). ), This processing is ended and it returns to display setting processing. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the address of the immediately preceding address in which the End information is written is stored. Since the drawing content is constantly expanded, the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S6402, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the End information (S6402: No), this process ends and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 73, the description is continued. After the pointer update processing, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update processing is expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6206). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is specified based on the rendering content developed in the processing of S6206 along with the warning image previously developed, and the display coordinate position is determined for each sprite. It determines various parameters necessary for drawing, such as, magnification, and rotation angle.

  Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S6207), and it is determined whether or not the value of the clock counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S6208). When the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S6208: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S6208: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing for ending the variable display and performing the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmed display flag is on. (S6209).

  As a result, if the finalized display flag is ON (S6209: Yes), the finalized display effect is not yet effected, and it is the time to effect the finalized display. First, the finalized display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The data is set (S6210), and then the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S6211). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time in the confirmed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S6212), and the value of the pointer 233f is further initialized to 0 (S6213). Then, after setting the fixed display flag indicating that the fixed display effect is being turned on in the ON state (S6214), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S6215), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  Thereby, in the case where the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fixed display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. As described above, the drawing content can be set. In addition, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the fixed display effect simply by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the fixed display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by activating another program as in the related art, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 is not heavily loaded. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S6215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the variation effect performed next. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the fluctuating effect is changed according to the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect that was performed immediately before, and in the fluctuating display data table, fluctuation based on the data table From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task process (S5304), until the predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation, the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is specified from the last stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S6215. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the identified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is identified. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop design in the immediately preceding variation effect.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S6209, if the confirmed display flag is not on but is off (S6209: No), it is determined whether the demo display flag is on (S6216). If the demo display flag is off (S6216: Yes), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h has become 0 or less due to the end of the fixed display effect, so that the demo display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer. 233d (S6217) and then Null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S6218). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demo display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S6219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6220), the demo display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is in the ON state is set to ON (S6221), the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  As a result, after the fixed display effect is finished, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the opening command is not received, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can be set so that is displayed.

  In the process of S6216, if the demo display flag is turned on (S6216: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the finalized display effect is finished, and the demonstration effect is finished, so the display setting process is finished as it is. Then, the procedure returns to the V interrupt processing. Then, in this case, various settings are performed so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process executed in the next V interrupt process. Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The same processing as the display setting processing is performed in the simple display setting processing (S5309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 67 (b)). However, in the simple display setting process, after the production time of the variation effect by the power-on variation image is finished, the variation image at power-on according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command is stopped for a predetermined time. A process of setting a display data table that defines display in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 76 and 77, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S5305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 76A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6501). If the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S6501: YES), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (S6502), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for causing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S6501, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S6501: No), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Have been transferred to. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S6503), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thereby, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 77.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S6502) that is one process of the transfer setting process (S5305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76B is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S6502).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer image data that has not been transferred is issued to the image controller 237 (S6601), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S6601: Yes). ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S6602). In the process of S6602, after the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data and then a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. . If it is determined by the processing in S6602 that the transfer processing is not completed (S6602: No), the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S6602: Yes), the process proceeds to S6603. Further, as a result of the processing of S6601, even when the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S6601: No), the processing proceeds to S6603.

  In the processing of S6603, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S6603). If there is untransferred resident target image data (S6603: No), the A transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S6604), and the resident image transfer setting process ends.

  As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and transfer destination (transferred here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. Then, it is transferred to the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  If all the resident target image data have been transferred as a result of the processing in S6603 (S6603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S6605), and the resident image transfer setting processing ends. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 67B), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S5308 in FIG. 67B) and the simple display setting process (see S5309 in FIG. 67B). Since the determination processing (see FIGS. 68 to 72) and the display setting processing (see FIGS. 73 to 77) are executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed on the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 77) (see S6601: No in FIG. 76 (a)).

  By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is retained without being overwritten during power-on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process becomes resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed at. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be immediately displayed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently-displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timing are performed. The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 77, a normal image transfer setting process (S6503) which is one process of the transfer setting process (S5305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting processing (S6503).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, the pointer 233f updated from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the pointer update process (S6205) of the display setting process (S5303) previously executed. The information described in the indicated address is acquired (S6701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S6702), and if it is transfer data information (S6702: Yes), the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data from the transfer data information. Of the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) and the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S6703, a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S6704), and the process proceeds to step S6705.

  In the process of S6702, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S6702: No), the processes of S6703 and S6704 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S6705. In the process of S6705, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set to the image controller 237 after the last transfer of the image data has been completed (S6705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S6705: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S6706).

  In the process of S6706, after the transfer instruction of the image data is set to the image controller 237, and when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is ended. . If it is determined by the processing in S6706 that the transfer processing is not completed (S6706: No), the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so this normal image transfer setting processing is executed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S6706: Yes), the process proceeds to S6707. Further, as a result of the processing of S6705, even if the image data transfer instruction has not been set to the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S6705: No), the process proceeds to S6707.

  In the process of S6707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S6707). If the transfer start flag is on (S6707: Yes), there is image data to be transferred. Is turned off (S6708), the image data of the sprite indicated by various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S6703 is set as the transfer target image data, and then the processing proceeds to S6713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but on (S6707: No), then it is determined whether the rear image change flag is on (S6709). If the back image change flag is not on but on (S6709: No), there is no image data to start transfer, and thus the normal image transfer setting process ends.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S6709: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag is set off (S6710), the back image provided for each back image type is set. Of the discrimination flags, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S6711). Furthermore, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image indicated by the back image discrimination flag and the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored. The head address is acquired (S6712), and the process proceeds to S6713.

  In the process of S6713, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S6713). The determination in the processing of S6713 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data determination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "ON", the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. If the storage state is "OFF", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  Then, as a result of the processing in S6713, if the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S6713: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is. As a result, it is possible to prevent wasteful transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and reduce the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S6713, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S6713: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S6714). As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information of the transfer target image data, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start and end addresses of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the transfer target image is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (transfer here). The sub address provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the transfer target image is included. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Transfer to the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the processing of S6714, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated (S6715), and this normal transfer setting processing is ended. As described above, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “ON”, and also in the same image storage area 236a sub as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the area to "off".

  As described above, by executing this normal-use image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination process, and as a result, the display stop type command is executed. When it is determined that the indicated stop type information is the big hit stop type, the image data used in the opening effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. When the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination process, the back image of the resident video RAM 235 is included in the image data used for the back image. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is the display data table buffer 233d according to the command (for example, the display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110. When the display data table is set to, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to cause the image controller 237 to follow the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d should be surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. You can

  Here, in the transfer data table, image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified in accordance with the display data table. When the sprite is drawn, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image necessary for display from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, the transfer data table defines transfer data information so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the process related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in the unit of sprite, the transfer of the image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 78, details of the above-described drawing process (S5306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, the types of various sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S5304) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information) , Color information, filter designation information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S5305), the drawing list shown in FIG. 32 is generated (S6801). That is, in the processing of S6801, the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of the various sprites that form one frame determined in the task processing (S5304). The parameters required for the sprite determined in the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order from the rearmost sprite in the one frame image to the frontmost sprite, and the sprite order after the rearrangement is detailed for each sprite. As the drawing information (detailed information), the drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. If a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S5305), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the last address (the storage source last address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S6802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information for instructing to develop the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information Includes information for instructing to develop an image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the beginning of the drawing list, and develops the image by overwriting it in the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  If the drawing list includes transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored are calculated from the transfer data information. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source end address are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is in the unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 237 reads out the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while the image drawn in one frame buffer is expanded, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the drawing process and the display process are simultaneously processed in parallel. be able to.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S6802, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S6803). Then, the drawing process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and setting it to "0" when it is "1". Done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the embedding process (see FIG. 67B) is executed, the drawing process is performed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of 1 frame are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image of 1 frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of 1 frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . After that, a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame will be replaced by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating the image for one frame, the display process for the image for one frame can be continuously performed in units of 20 milliseconds.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the ball reaches the movable valve 750 at the timing when the movable valve 750 is in the guiding state (closed state) in which the ball can be guided to the specific general entrance 630. By operating the second frame button (release button) 22b that changes the storage state of the storage device (the first storage device 770 and the second storage device 771) to the release state, the storage device (the first storage device 770 and The balls stored in the second storage device 771) can be inserted into the specific general ball entrance 630. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to play the game while adjusting the timing of operating the second frame button (release button) 22b, and the player can be eager to participate in the game.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the movable valve 750 is set to operate in various predetermined patterns, and most of the operation contents of the movable valve 750 are in the induction state (closed state). Is set as a period (0.1 second) in which only one sphere can be guided. Therefore, accuracy is required for the timing at which the balls stored in the storage device (the first storage device 770 and the second storage device 771) can be guided to the specific general entrance 630, so that the player is more motivated. Can be played.

  In the present embodiment, by operating the operation means (second frame button (release button) 22b), the balls stored in the storage device (first storage device 770 and second storage device 771) one by one. Since the movable valve 750 is configured to be allowed to flow down toward the specific general entrance 630, the movable valve 750 is in a guided state (closed state) during which only one ball can be guided (0.1 second). ) Is continuously set, by operating the second frame button (release button) 22b at an appropriate timing, the storage device (the first storage device 770 and the second storage device 771) can be operated. It becomes possible to make all the stored balls enter the specific general entrance 630. Therefore, the player can be actively involved in the game in order to obtain more prize balls.

  Note that a plurality of balls may be made to flow out from the storage device in response to the operation of the operation means, and further, the number of balls to be made to flow out from the storage device may be changed based on the operation content of the operation means by the player. You may do it. As a result, it is possible to provide a variety of games to the player and improve the interest of the game.

  In the present embodiment, the cover member 710 is covered with the cover member 710 in the board unit 700 (see FIG. 2) from the back surface side (the game board 13 side with respect to the cover member 710) to the cover member 710. Transmission lamps 227ba to 227be, which are light emitting means for irradiating light with respect to, are provided. The transmission lamps 227ba to 227be irradiate the cover member 710 with light, so that the player can see the inside covered with the cover member 710 in a transparent state. As will be described in detail later, the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be are controlled to emit light when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the storage device is in the released state and the ball flows down). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from performing the releasing operation of the storage device while grasping the operation status of the movable valve 750 during the normal game in which the predetermined condition is not satisfied. Further, when the storage device is released and the ball flows down near the movable valve 750, the cover member 710 is in a transparent state, so that the player can visually recognize the situation where the ball flows down near the movable valve 750. You can

  Further, in the present embodiment, since the cover member 710 is provided as a shielding means for making it difficult for the player to grasp the operating condition of the movable valve 750, the second frame button is pressed while grasping the operating condition of the movable valve 750. It is possible to prevent the act of operating the (release button) 22b. In addition, the cover member 710 which is the shielding means is a half mirror so that the cover member 710 is switched to a transparent state in which the inside can be visually recognized based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition (for example, when the storage device is in the released state and the sphere flows down). Since it is configured, when the game ball flows down near the movable valve 750, the cover member 710 is switched to the transparent state. Therefore, the player can be informed of the flow-down situation of the ball flowing down near the movable valve 750.

  In the present embodiment, the cover member 710 as the shielding means is switched to the transmissive state by irradiating the cover member 710 with light (transmission lamp), but other configurations may be used. Well, for example, when the cover member 710 is configured to be movable so that the incident angle of the light emitted to the cover member 710 from the light emitting means (LED) that is constantly lit is switched, and the cover member 710 is located at a predetermined position. It may be configured such that only the inside is in a transparent state in which the inside is visible.

  Further, the movable valve 750 is made of a transparent resin material (for example, polycarbonate, ABS, etc.), the cover member 710 is made of a transparent color whose inside can be visually recognized, and the surface thereof is subjected to diffuse reflection of irradiated light (for example, , Texture treatment) may be applied. Accordingly, while the game is being executed in the pachinko machine 10, the light emitted from the decoration lamp 227a makes it difficult to visually recognize the inside of the cover member 710, and the pachinko machine 10 is powered off (that is, for decoration). The inside of the cover member 710 may be made visible when the lamp 227a is not lit. Thereby, even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, a store clerk can easily inspect the inside of the cover member 710.

  When such a configuration is used, a shield wall is provided to shield the cover member 710 from being irradiated with the light emitted from the decoration lamp 227a, and the shield wall can be changed between a shielded state and a non-shielded state. Should be provided. This allows the player to visually recognize the inside of the cover member 710 even while the game is being played. Further, similarly to the first embodiment, by providing a dedicated light emitting means (lamp) for irradiating the cover member 710 with light and performing light emission control on the light emitting means, the inside of the cover member 710 is controlled. May be switched between a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize (a state in which light is emitted) and a visible state (a state in which light is not emitted).

  Further, a movable member for decoration is provided on the cover member 710 whose inside is visible, and the operation of the movable member is controlled, so that the inside of the cover member 710 can be visually recognized (the movement of the decorative movable member is small. The state) and the state in which it is difficult to visually recognize the inside of the cover member 710 (the state in which the decorative movable member often operates) may be switched.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the timing for operating the operation means (the second frame button (release button) 22b) is set based on the operation content of the movable valve 750, and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is set. It is configured to display an effect. As a result, by operating the second frame button (release button) 22b in accordance with the effect display executed on the third symbol display device 81, the player is provided with a privilege (a prize based on the entrance into the specific general entrance 630). It is possible to give a ball, and the player can participate in the game eagerly.

  In the present embodiment, the above-described effect (timing effect) is configured to be executed during the jackpot game or when a specific variation pattern is selected, but is described above when other predetermined conditions are satisfied. The effect (timing effect) may be configured to be executed. For example, when it is determined that the upper limit amount of spheres is stored in the storage channel 700e, or when it is specified by the timing means (RTC or the like). When the time is counted, or in the effect (so-called mini game or the like) for operating the effect button (first frame button) 22a executed during special symbol fluctuation or jackpot game, a specific condition (for example, mission It may be configured such that the predetermined condition is satisfied when, for example, clearing is satisfied. Thereby, it becomes possible to execute the timing effect (operation effect) at various timings, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

  In addition, when a predetermined winning command (a command output when a ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640) is received from the main control device 110, it corresponds to the winning command. The timing effect (operation effect) may be executed by using a period of effect (so-called prefetch effect) that is executed until the change of the special symbol is started.

  In the present embodiment, by operating the second frame button (release button) 22b, one ball is made to flow down toward the movable valve 750, and further, the second frame button (release button). ) 22b is configured to perform the releasing operation of the storage device only once every two seconds at the shortest. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10, the ball cannot be inserted into the specific general entrance 630 unless the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated (pressed) at a timely timing, and the second frame button ( Operation accuracy of the release button) 22b is required. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a timing effect (operation effect) that suggests the timing of operating the second frame button (release button) 22b is configured to be executed by the third symbol display device 81. By operating the second frame button (release button) 22b in accordance with the timing effect (operation effect), the ball can be easily made to enter the specific general entrance 630. There is. This allows the player to motivate the second frame button (release button) 22b.

  In the timing effect (operation effect) in the present embodiment, an effect is performed in which the player operates the first frame button (effect button) 22a and the second frame button (release button) 22b. With this configuration, the number of times the player performs the button operation can be increased and the effect of the effect can be enhanced, as compared with the case of performing the effect of operating only the second frame button (release button) 22b. You can

  In the present embodiment, in the timing effect (operation effect) that is executed when the special symbol lottery result is changing, the display pointer that scrolls in the sub display area Ds4 coincides with the bar display portion 717. By operating the second frame button (release button) 22b, as shown in FIG. 14, the special symbol lottery results are displayed in the sub display area Ds2. With such a configuration, the second frame button (release button) 22b for releasing the storage state of the storage device can be used to notify the lottery result of the special symbol.

  Further, when the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated to notify the lottery result of the special symbol, the ball flowing out from the storage device enters the specific general entrance 630 based on the operation. Difficult timing is set. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being unnecessarily provided with a privilege (a prize ball for a ball entering the specific general entrance 630). In addition, when setting such timing, it is good to give a notification indicating that a big hit if the ball does not enter the specific general entrance port 630. As a result, the player is provided with a sense of security because a privilege is given to the player regardless of whether or not the leaked ball enters the specific general entrance 630.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of music pieces are configured to be usable in the timing effect (operation effect), and a display pointer 719 can be displayed (settable) for each music piece in advance. This is for operating the operation means at a timing that matches the rhythm of each song in the timing effect (operation effect). With this configuration, the display pointer can be entered at the specific general entrance 630. Even if 719 is set, the operation means can be operated in accordance with the rhythm of the music being executed in the timing effect (operation effect), and the timing effect (operation effect) can be provided without giving a sense of discomfort to the player. Can be run.

  In the present embodiment, in the timing effect (operation effect), the timing of operating the second frame button (release button) 22b is set from a position where a display pointer preset for each song can be displayed (set). Although it is configured to be selected, the above-described configuration may be used in the operation effect of operating only the first frame button (effect button) 22a. As a result, various effects can be executed as the operation effect for operating the first frame button (effect button) 22a.

  In the present embodiment, in the jackpot confirmation display screen for notifying the third symbol display device 81 that the special symbol lottery result has been won, the movable valve 750 is operated during the jackpot game based on the jackpot. It is possible to determine whether or not the operation is variable in an operation pattern (operation scenario) that is advantageous to the player, and the result of the determination can be notified on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the player can understand that the movable valve 750 is executed in the operation pattern (operation scenario) advantageous to the player during the jackpot game, before the jackpot game is executed, and during the jackpot game. The game can be motivated.

  In the present embodiment, the player can select the difficulty level of the timing effect (operation effect) according to his / her skill level, and by varying the privilege to be granted according to the difficulty level, various players can be provided. On the other hand, the timing effect (operation effect) can be motivated to be executed.

  Further, the content described above is the content indicating both the selection of the music and the selection of the difficulty level in the timing effect (operation effect) executed in the present embodiment, but only the music without changing the difficulty level. In the case of selecting, since the interval of the display pointer 719 can be displayed (set) is different between the music A and the music B, the player who wants to enjoy the timing effect (operation effect) with the interval is A player who selects A and wants to enjoy timing effect (operation effect) at short intervals can select song B. As a result, it is possible to execute the timing effect (operation effect) desired by the player without changing the difficulty level, and various players are motivated to execute the timing effect (operation effect). You can

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the interval of the displayable (set) position of the display pointer 719 is changed depending on the music, and the player selects the music. Although a configuration for narrowing or widening the display interval is used, as another configuration, a selection means for selecting the display interval of the display pointer 719 executed by the player in the timing effect (operation effect). Setting means for setting the display position of the display pointer 719 based on the display interval of the display pointer 719 selected by the selecting means may be provided, or the same music piece can be reproduced by changing the reproduction speed of the music piece. A setting means for setting the display interval of the display pointer 719 may be provided. Even when such a configuration is used, it is possible to execute a timing effect (operation effect) desired by the player without changing the difficulty level, and various players are motivated. A timing effect (operation effect) can be executed.

  In the present embodiment, in order for the voice lamp control device 113 to be able to grasp the operating state of the movable valve 750, the movable valve operation scenario 222b is stored in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113, and the information of the movable valve operation scenario 222b is stored. Is updated at any time to grasp the current operation status and future operation content of the movable valve 750 and set the timing at which the ball can enter the specific general entrance 630. Based on the information of the movable valve operation scenario 222b, an execution scenario for executing the movable operation of the decorative movable member, the output of the decorative lamp, the sound (sound effect), etc. is generated, and based on the generated execution scenario. The timing at which the ball can enter the specific general entrance 630 may be indirectly set. Further, in this case, it is preferable that the moving operation of the decorative movable member, which is executed based on the execution scenario, and the output of the decorative lamp, the sound (sound effect), and the like are executed in a place where the player cannot easily grasp.

  In the first embodiment, two storage devices (the first storage device 770 and the second storage device 771) are provided in the storage channel 700e to store up to 5 balls, and the second frame button 22b is operated. On the basis of the above, the storage device is changed to the released (open) state so that the spheres flow out from the storage channel 700e, but other configurations may be used, for example, shown in FIG. Thus, a plurality of storage channels 700e and 700g may be provided. Here, with reference to FIG. 79, a modification of the configuration for storing the balls on the game board 13 will be described. In this modification, the same elements as those in the first embodiment described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 79 is a partial front view of the game board 13 showing a modified example of the first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 79, the present modification is different from the above-described first embodiment in that a second storage channel 700g is provided above the storage channel 700e and that the storage channel 700e is provided. The second storage valve 771a, which is provided in the storage channel 700g, and the second storage upper limit sensor S5 and the second storage detection sensor S6 that detect the sphere stored in the storage channel 700g. The difference is that. Although detailed description is omitted, in the above-described first embodiment, the operation of the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a is controlled by using one storage valve solenoid 770b. However, there is a difference in that each storage valve is individually provided with a storage valve solenoid, and a release button is provided corresponding to each storage device (storage valve) (see, for example, FIG. 87 described later).

  The second storage channel 700g newly provided in the present modification is formed so that the spheres are less likely to flow into the second storage channel 700e than the storage channel 700e, and the balls that collide with the first adjusting member 701a and bounce off It is formed so that it can flow in. Specifically, of the spheres flowing down the distribution channel 700d, about 1 sphere is formed into 30 of the spheres distributed in the lower right direction (the storage channel 700e direction). There is. The ratio of the spheres flowing into the second storage channel 700g can be adjusted by adjusting the angle or position of the adjusting member 701a.

  As shown in FIG. 79, in this modification, five spheres can be stored in the storage channel 700e and five spheres can be stored in the second storage channel 700g so that a total of 10 spheres can be stored. There is. Furthermore, the sphere that has flowed into the second storage flow path 700g, which is less likely to flow into the storage flow path 700e, is flowed down toward the specific general entrance 630 without being affected by the variable operation of the movable valve 750. Thus, the exit is provided so as to face the specific general entrance 630. As a result, when the sphere is stored in the flow path that is difficult to store the sphere (the second storage flow path 700g), it is ensured that the player has the privilege (the sphere has entered the specific general entrance 630). Based prize balls) can be given. Therefore, the player always plays the game while expecting the spheres to flow into the second storage channel 700g, so that he can be prevented from getting tired of the game early.

  Here, the flow of the game when the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 87 is used in this modification will be described. First, the pachinko machine 10 of FIG. 87 will be described. FIG. 87 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 provided with a plurality of release buttons for releasing the storage device. This pachinko machine is different from the above-described pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment in that a third frame button (second releasing button) 22c is provided and that the first storage device 770 is released (opened). ) The control contents are different such that the control is executed based on the operation of the second frame button 22b and the release (open) control of the second storage device 771 is executed based on the operation of the third frame button 22c. Is different. The other elements are the same, the same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 87, the pachinko machine 10 includes a second frame button (release button) 22b on the left side of the lower plate unit 15 and a third frame button (second release button) on the right side of the lower plate unit 15. Button) 22c is provided. Since the second frame button (release button) 22b and the third frame button (second release button) 22c are arranged in the lower plate unit 15 with a space of about 20 cm therebetween, the player It is difficult to operate with one hand at the same time. Further, the first frame button (production button) 22a is provided between the second frame button (release button) 22b and the third frame button (second release button) 22c, and the second frame button (release). Button) 22b and the third frame button (second releasing button) 22c are arranged so as to project out so as to block the straight line connecting the button surfaces, and the player simultaneously holds the second frame button (for releasing) with one hand. It is more difficult to operate the button) 22b and the third frame button (second releasing button) 22c.

  Further, when the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated (pressed), control for changing the storage state of the first storage device 770 (first storage valve 770a) to the release (open) state is performed. When executed and the third frame button (second release button) 22c is operated (pressed), the storage state of the second storage device 771 (second storage valve 771a) is changed to the release (open) state. The control is configured to be executed.

  As a result, the player operates the second frame button (release button) 22b and the third frame button (second release button) 22c at a desired timing, and the storage according to the operation content of the player. The device release control can be executed, and the player can be actively involved in the game.

  In addition, since it is difficult for the player to operate the second frame button (release button) 22b and the third frame button (second release button) 22c at the same time with one hand, it is difficult to play the game. (That is, while operating the operation handle 51 with one hand), the second frame button (release button) 22b and the third frame button (second release button) 22c are simultaneously operated, and a plurality of Processing load due to simultaneous execution of storage device release control (eg, movable valve movement control using an electric drive source), or simultaneous drive of an electric drive source (eg, solenoid, motor, etc.) It is possible to suppress a temporary increase in power consumption. If the player simultaneously operates the second frame button (release button) 22b and the third frame button (second release button) 22c with both hands, the operation handle 51 is not operated. From the state, even if the release control of the plurality of storage devices is executed at the same time, since the game control for the operation on the operation handle 51 (for example, the firing control using the electric drive source) is not executed, It is possible to suppress a temporary increase in power consumption due to the processing load of the entire pachinko machine 10 or the simultaneous driving of an electric drive source (for example, a solenoid, a motor, etc.).

  That is, by using this configuration, the release control for the two storage devices (the first storage device 770 and the second storage device 771) and the game control for the operation on the operation handle 51 (for example, the firing control) are performed at the same time. The pachinko machine 10 can be prevented from being damaged, and the processing load (control processing using an electric drive source) and power consumption (power used to drive the electric drive source) in the pachinko machine 10 temporarily increase. It can be suppressed.

  Returning to FIG. 79, the description will be continued. In the modified example of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 79 (the configuration in which the storage channel 700e and the second storage channel 700g are provided), the configuration of FIG. 87 described above (second frame button (release button)) 22b and the third frame button (second release button) 22c are used), the first storage device 770 (first storage valve 770a) is operated based on the operation on the second frame button 22b. ) Is opened (released), the sphere flows out from the storage channel 700e, and the second storage device 771 (second storage valve 771a) is opened (released) based on the operation on the third frame button 22c. The spheres will flow out of the storage channel 700g.

  As shown in FIG. 79, the sphere flow path is formed so that the spheres flowing out from the storage flow path 700e and the second storage flow path 700g can enter the specific general ball entrance 630. A ball channel is formed above the ball entrance 630 so that the ball flowing out from the storage channel 700e and the ball flowing out from the second storage channel 700g merge. Thereby, it is determined whether or not the ball enters the specific general ball entrance 630 depending on the flow-down state of the ball that has flowed out from each storage channel (storage channel 700e, second storage channel 700g). Therefore, the player can enjoy the game by paying attention to the movement of the ball.

  Further, according to the configuration shown in FIG. 87, since the second frame button 22b and the third frame button 22c are arranged at positions where it is difficult to operate them with one hand at the same time, the ball is located above the specific general ball entrance 630. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the balls cannot enter the specific general entrance 630 due to collision between them.

  A second storage upper limit sensor S5 and a second storage detection sensor S6 are provided in the second storage flow passage 700g, and when the second storage upper limit sensor S5 detects a sphere, that is, the second storage flow passage. When it is detected that the upper limit amount of balls is stored in 700 g, even if the game (right-handed game) is executed in this state, the balls cannot be stored in the second storage channel 700 g any more. , A notification prompting the player to operate the third frame button 22c (for example, a display prompting the user to press the third frame button 22c on the third symbol display device 81, a third frame button on the audio output device 226) 22c, a voice output prompting the user to press the second frame button 22c, and a voice output prompting the user to press the third frame button 22c by causing the third frame button 22c (or the periphery thereof) to emit light are performed. As a result, the outflowed balls are likely to enter the specific general ball entrance 630, and the game is continued in the state where the storage amount of the balls in the second storage channel 700g is the upper limit, which is a disadvantageous game for the player. It is possible to suppress what is done.

  Also in the configuration of this modification, the contents described in the description of the first embodiment described above may be appropriately combined, and for example, based on one operation on the second frame button 22b or the third frame button 22c. Alternatively, the operation of the first storage valve 770a or the second storage valve 771a may be controlled so that only one ball flows out, or the operation may be performed once for the second frame button 22b or the third frame button 22c. Based on this, the stored spheres may be controlled to flow out. Further, the number of spheres to be discharged and the sphere outflow timing may be different based on the operation content of the operation on the second frame button 22b or the third frame button 22c (for example, normal pressing or long pressing). Thereby, the operating means (the second frame button 22b, the third frame button) operated by the player to let the balls stored in the storage device (the first storage device 770, the second storage device 771) flow out from the storage device. It is possible to diversify the operation timing and operation content of 22c), and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

  In the present modification, the second storage channel 700g is configured so that the stored spheres are discharged to a position facing the specific general entrance 630, so that the storage flow is advantageous to the player. Although a channel (second storage channel 700g) and a storage channel (first storage channel 700e) that is more disadvantageous than the channel are provided, one storage channel and the other storage channel are provided. Advantageous and disadvantageous conditions are set in and, and the storage channel that is advantageous may be configured so that spheres are less likely to flow in than the storage channel that is disadvantageous.

  For example, a second movable valve is provided between the ball outlet of the second storage channel 700 g and the specific general ball inlet 630, and the second movable valve has a ball more specific than the movable valve 750. It may be configured such that the ratio of the inductive state in which the vehicle can be guided to is increased. Also, the upper limit of the number of balls stored in each storage channel may be different for each storage channel.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 80 to 83. In the above-described first embodiment, the first frame button (effect button) 22a and the second frame button (release button) 22b are separately configured as operation means that can be operated by the player. Further, as a timing effect (operation effect) for causing the player to operate the operation means, a display pointer is provided for each operation means (first frame button (production button) 22a and second frame button (release button) 22b). It was configured to execute the effect display for scrolling.

  On the other hand, in the second embodiment, the first frame button is replaced with the operation means (the first frame button (production button) 22a and the second frame button (release button) 22b in the first embodiment. A (production button) 1122a and a second frame button (release button) 1122b are provided. Then, interlocking means for causing the second frame button (release button) 1122b to be pressed down in conjunction with the operation of the first frame button (production button) 1122a is provided, and the interlocking device is connected to the first frame button ( The interlocking state in which the second frame button (release button) 1122b is operated based on the operation of the effect button 1122a, and the second frame button (release button) based on the operation of the first frame button (production button) 1122a ) 1122b is provided with a variable control means for changing to a released state in which it is not operated.

  Thereby, the player performs the timing effect (operation effect) for operating the first frame button (effect button) 1122a, and the player operates the first frame button (effect button) 1122a. The second frame button (release button) 1122b can be operated by simply executing it. Therefore, the storage device can be released without giving the player a feeling of strangeness.

  The difference between the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in configuration is that instead of the first frame button 22a and the second frame button 22b, a first frame button 1122a and a second frame button 1122a are provided. The point is that the frame button 1122b is provided. For other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 80. As shown in FIG. 80, a first frame button 1122a and a second frame button 1122b are provided in the central portion of the lower plate unit 15 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment. Next, with reference to FIG. 81, configurations of the first frame button 1122a and the second frame button 1122b provided in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described. 81 (a) is a schematic view of the first frame button 1122a and the second frame button 1122b in plan view, and FIG. 81 (b) shows the interlocking operation configuration of the first frame button 1122a and the second frame button 1122b. It is a schematic diagram which shows.

  As shown in FIG. 81A, the first frame button 1122a and the second frame button 1122b are configured to be connectable via the interlocking means 1125. Further, the second frame button 1122b is formed in a shape slightly smaller than the first frame button 1122a, and a regulation wall 1123 is provided around it. This prevents the player from accidentally pressing the second frame button 1122b and touching the second frame button 1122b when the player does not intend to operate the first frame button 1122a.

  Next, detailed configurations of the first frame button 1122a and the second frame button 1122b will be described with reference to FIG. 81 (b). It should be noted that the first frame button 1122a and the second frame button 1122b have a returning means (for example, an elastic member using a spring member, a rubber member or the like) for returning the pressed button to a normal position, or a button can be operated. Although a light emitting means or the like for notifying that it is a different period is provided, the above-mentioned restoring means and light emitting means and the like employ well-known techniques that are generally used. Detailed description is omitted.

  A detection switch S22a for detecting the pressing operation is provided below the first frame button 1122a, and a detection switch S22b for detecting the pressing operation is provided below the second frame button 1122b. Has been. Thereby, it is detected that each frame button is operated (pressed). Further, between the first frame button 1122a and the second frame button 1122b, interlocking means 1125 that can engage with both frame buttons is provided, and when this interlocking means 1125 is projected to the engaging position. The second frame button 1122b is pressed in conjunction with the pressing operation of the first frame button 1122a. Since the interlocking means 1125 is configured not to be pressed by the pressing operation of the second frame button 1122b, the first frame button 1122a is not pressed in conjunction with the pressing operation of the second frame button 1122b. Absent.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 82, the pressing operation of the first frame button 1122a and the second frame button 1122b will be described. FIG. 82 (a) is a schematic diagram showing a state where the first frame button 1122a is pressed in the released state in which the interlocking means 1125 is buried, and FIG. 82 (b) is an interlocking means in which the interlocking means 1125 is projected. It is a schematic diagram which shows the state which pressed down the 1st frame button 1122a in a state.

  As shown in FIG. 82 (a), while the interlocking means 1125 is in the released state, the first frame button 1122a and the interlocking means 1125 are not engaged, so that the first frame button 1122a is pressed. The interlocking means 1125 does not move in conjunction with each other. Therefore, the second frame button 1122b is not pressed. On the other hand, while the interlocking means 1125 is in the interlocked state, the first frame button 1122a and the interlocking means 1125 engage with each other as shown in FIG. 82 (b), so that the first frame button 1122a is pressed. The interlocking means 1125 moves downward in conjunction with. Then, the second frame button 1122b engaged with the interlocking means 1125 also moves downward, and the detection switch S22b detects that the pressing operation has been performed.

  Further, the restriction wall 1123 provided around the second frame button 1122b is positioned around the second frame button 1122b even when the second frame button 1122b shown in FIG. 82 (b) is pressed down. The lower plate unit 15 is provided so as to project inside. As a result, the returning operation for returning the second frame button 1122b from the pressed position (the position shown in FIG. 82B) to the normal position (the position shown in FIG. 82A) can be smoothed. Further, it is possible to smooth the pressing operation in the one-side gripping state when the pressing operation is performed in conjunction with the pressing operation of the first frame button 1122a.

  In the present embodiment, each frame button (first frame button 1122a, second frame button 1122b) is operated by the player from an initial position (see FIG. 81 (b)) where the player is not operating. Although the moving distances to the detected positions (see FIG. 82 (b)) are the same, the description is given in the frame button input monitoring / effect process (see S2107 of FIG. 59) of the first embodiment described above. As described above, since the processing based on the operation of the second frame button 1122b is preferentially executed (see S3002 in FIG. 59), the interlocking unit 1125 is in the interlocking state, and the first frame button 1122a and the second frame button When 1122b and 1122b are pressed at the same time, an effect based on the pressing operation of the second frame button 1122b is executed. Therefore, since the effect based on the operation of the operation means (second frame button 1122b) different from the operation means (first frame button 1122a) operated by the player is executed, the player is provided with an unexpected effect. can do.

  In the present embodiment, the control process is configured such that when the first frame button 1122a and the second frame button 1122b are simultaneously pressed, the effect based on the second frame button 1122b is executed. However, a configuration other than that may be used, for example, rather than a distance for moving the first frame button 1122a from the initial position (see FIG. 81 (b)) to the detection position (see FIG. 82 (b)). The two-frame button 1122b may be configured so that the distance from the initial position (see FIG. 81 (b)) to the detection position (see FIG. 82 (b)) is shorter. As a result, when the interlocking means 1125 is in the interlocking state and the first frame button 1122a and the second frame button 1122b are simultaneously pressed, the pressing operation of the second frame button 1122b is detected first. The effect based on the two-frame button 1122b can be preferentially executed.

  Next, the control content for variably controlling the interlocking means 1125 in the second embodiment will be described. The interlocking means 1125 is variably operated between an interlocking state (protruding state) in which each frame button (first frame button 1122a and second frame button 1122b) is engaged and a released state (buried state) in which the engagement is released. The second frame button (release button) 22b set in the pressing period information storage area 223y of the above-described first embodiment is set to be in the linked state in correspondence with the pressing successful period. It Thereby, in the timing effect (operation effect) of the above-described first embodiment, the second frame button (release button) 1122b is pressed at the same timing as when the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated. Can be made.

  The interlocking means may be changed to the interlocking state at a timing other than the above-described timing, and for example, the player may be able to set the state of the interlocking means. This makes it possible to match the period during which the player sets the interlocking device in the interlocked state with the display period of the display pointer indicating the operation timing of the second frame button (release button) 1122b in the timing effect (operation effect). Depending on whether or not the game result is affected, the interest of the game can be improved.

  Next, the display content of the timing effect (operation effect) using the first frame button (effect button) 1122a in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 83. FIG. 83 is a schematic diagram showing the display content of the timing effect (operation effect). The same elements as those of the first embodiment described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. As described above, in the second embodiment, the middle button display mode 716 for prompting the operation of the first frame button (production button) 1122a and the timing of operating the first frame button (production button) 1122a are set. A sub display area Ds5 for displaying the suggested display pointer is displayed. That is, in the first embodiment, the display pointer 719 is displayed for each of the first frame button (production button) 22a and the second frame button (release button) 22b, and each frame button is displayed for the player. Although it is operated, in actuality, only the display pointer corresponding to the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated at the timing matching the bar display portion 717, and the advantageous privilege is given to the player. Therefore, there is a problem that the player who understands the mechanism does not participate in the game eagerly.

  On the other hand, according to the timing effect (operation effect) of the second embodiment, only the effect for causing the player to operate the first frame button 1122a is executed, and the plurality of display pointers 719 displayed by the effect. Among them, the timing at which any of the display pointers 719 coincides with the bar display portion 717 coincides with the ball entry possible timing, and when the display pointer 719 passes near the bar display portion 717, the interlocking means 1125 is brought into the interlocked state. By controlling the first frame button 1122a at the timing when the display pointer 719 coincides with the bar display portion 717, the second frame button 1122b at the timing when the ball can enter the specific general entrance 630. Can be pressed. As a result, the timing effect (operation effect) can be executed without knowing which of the display pointers 719 scroll-displayed indicates the entry possible timing. Therefore, it is possible to operate the first frame button (effect button) 1122a in a state where the display pointer 719 is scroll-displayed in the timing effect (operation effect) so as to match the bar display portion 717. The player can be actively involved in the game.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, the interlocking means 1125 for engaging the first frame button 1122a and the second frame button 1122b, and the interlocking means 1125 are connected to the first frame button 1122a. A variable control means is provided that is variable between an interlocking state in which the two-frame button 1122b is engaged and a released state in which the first frame button 1122a and the second frame button 1122b are in the disengaged state, and the interlocking means 1125 is interlocked. When the player operates the first frame button 1122a while the state is being changed, by using a configuration in which the second frame button 1122b is pressed in conjunction with the operation (pressing operation), the game is played. Although it is possible to operate the second frame button 1122b without giving an uncomfortable feeling to a person, a different configuration having the same effect as the second embodiment may be used.

  For example, if the interlocking means 1125 is made of a magnetic material and the interlocking means 1125 is in an excited state, a plurality of operating means (the first frame button 1122a and the second frame button 1122b) operate in an interlocked state, By setting the interlocking means 1125 to be in the demagnetized state, the plurality of operating means (the first frame button 1122a and the second frame button 1122b) may be configured to be in the released state in which they do not operate in conjunction with each other. Means capable of switching between the interlocked state and the released state may be used by using a structure different from that of the second embodiment. Furthermore, in the above-described second embodiment, a configuration is used in which two operating means can be interlocked, but it may be configured to interlock three or more operating means, or among three or more operating means. It may be configured to be controllable such that the combination of the plurality of operating means in the linked state is different. As a result, it is possible to execute various combinations of operation effects based on the operations performed by the player on the operation means, and thus it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected game (effect).

  Further, for example, a frame button unit 1022 as shown in FIGS. 84 to 86 may be provided as a modified example of the second embodiment. The frame button unit 1022 is a unit structure including a second frame button 1022b which is a release button so as to surround the first frame button 1022a which is a production button.

  As shown in FIG. 84, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present modification, a frame button unit 1022 is provided at the center of the lower plate unit 15. In this way, by using a plurality of frame buttons (first frame button 1022a, second frame button 1022b) as a unit configuration and arranging them in one place, the limited space of the pachinko machine 10 can be effectively used. You can

  Next, the configuration of the frame button unit 1022 in this modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86. FIG. 85 (a) is a schematic diagram showing a state where the player operates the frame button unit 1022, and FIG. 85 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the frame button unit 1022. FIG. 86 (a) is a schematic view showing a state where the frame button unit 1022 is operated (pressed) in a state in which the pressing operation of the second frame button 10222b of the frame button unit 1022 is restricted, and FIG. 10B is a schematic diagram showing a state where the frame button unit 1022 is operated (pressed) in a state in which the pressing operation of the second frame button 1022b of the frame button unit 1022 is released.

  First, as shown in FIG. 85 (a), in the frame button unit 1022 of the second embodiment, when the player presses down, the player's hand holds the first frame button 1022a and the second frame button 1022b. The first frame button 1022a is formed into a circular shape having a diameter of 5 cm so as to abut both of them, and the second frame button 1022b is formed into a circular ring having a diameter of 7 cm in which the first frame button 1022a is embedded. There is. That is, the frame button unit 1022 has a circular unit structure with a diameter of 7 cm as a whole.

  Next, the configuration of the frame button unit 1022 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 85 (b), the frame button unit 1022 is provided so as to project to the surface side of the pachinko machine 10 (upper side from the viewpoint of FIG. 85 (b)) with respect to the lower plate unit 15. Further, in the frame button unit 1022, the first frame button 1022a is configured to project to the front surface side of the pachinko machine 10 (upper side in the viewpoint of FIG. 85B) than the second frame button 1022b. . With this configuration, even when the pressing operation of the second frame button 1022b is restricted, the first frame button 1022a can be operated (pressed).

  A detection switch S22a for detecting that the first frame button 1022a is pressed is provided in the pressing direction of the first frame button 1022a (downward from the viewpoint of FIG. 85B), and the second frame is pressed. A detection switch S22b for detecting that the second frame button 1022b is pressed is provided in the pressing direction of the button 1022b (downward in the viewpoint of FIG. 85B). Further, a restriction member 1023a is provided as a restriction means for restricting the pressing operation of moving the second frame button 1022b located in the non-pressed state (normal state) to the pressed state (pressed state). By the operation of the solenoid 1023, which is a dynamic drive source, it is configured to be variable between a restriction position that restricts the pressing operation of the second frame button 1022b and a release position that does not restrict the pressing operation of the second frame button 1022b.

  FIG. 85B shows a state in which the regulation member 1023a is located at the regulation position, and the regulation member 1023a regulates the movement of the second frame button 1022b from the normal state to the pressed state. . The restricting member 1023a is made of an elastically changeable material (for example, rubber), and when the restricting member 1023a is located at the restricting position, the restricting member 1023a is compared with the restricting member 1023a located at the releasing position. The detection switch S22b cannot detect the pressing operation of the second frame button 1022b unless the pressing operation is performed with a strong force. With this configuration, the second frame button 1022b can always be pressed, but the pressing force required for the pressing operation is changed according to the state (depending on the state of the regulating member 1023a). Is possible. As for the pressing force required for the pressing operation of each frame button, the second frame button 1022b, the first frame button 1022a, and the restriction member 1023a are in the restricted position when the restriction member 1023a is in the release position. The second frame button 1022b in the state of being positioned is configured such that the pressing force required for the pressing operation becomes stronger in order. Accordingly, when the second frame button 1022b is in the restricted state, only the first frame button 1022a is easily pressed, and when the second frame button 1022b is in the released state, the first frame button 1022a is pressed based on the pressing operation. It is possible to easily press the second frame button 1022b.

  In this modification, the second frame button 1022b is always depressed, but other configurations may be used. For example, the regulating member 1023a may be made of a material that does not elastically change (for example, metal or The second frame button 1022b may be made of high-hardness resin (polycarbonate) or the like so that the second frame button 1022b cannot be pressed down when the restriction member 1023a is located at the restriction position.

  Further, in the present modification, as shown in FIG. 85B, the distance (first frame button pressing stroke) until the first switch 1022a is pressed and detected by the detection switch S22a is the second frame button. It is configured to be longer than the distance (second frame button pressing stroke) from when 1022b is pressed down to when it is detected by the detection switch S22b. As a result, even when the pressing operation of the second frame button 1022b is restricted, the pressing operation can be performed on the first frame button 1022a without a feeling of strangeness.

  As described above, in each of the embodiments described above, the first storage device 770 (first storage valve 770a) and the second storage device (second storage valve 771a) are provided as storage means for storing spheres in the storage channel 700e. Although the variable operation of the storage means is provided so that one sphere flows out (flows down) one by one each time the second frame button 22b is operated, the storage for storing the sphere in the storage channel 700e. As a means, only the first storage device 770 (first storage valve 770a) may be provided.

  In this case, when the second frame button 22b is normally operated (normally pressed), the storage device is set to be in an opened (released) state for a period (for example, 0.2 seconds) for about one ball to flow out. When controlled and long-pressing the second frame button 22b, the open (release) state may be continued until all the balls stored in the storage unit flow out. Here, as a method for determining that the second frame button 22b is being pressed for a long time, the first pressing operation performs the same processing as the normal pressing, and the opening period of the first storage device 770 based on the normal pressing is The operation status of the second frame button 22b may be discriminated again at the timing of the end, and if the second frame button 22b is continuously pressed at that time, it may be discriminated as a long press operation. As a result, when it is determined that the continuous pressing for the predetermined period is being performed, the first storage is performed in quick response to the operation of the second frame button 22b, as compared with the case where the opening operation of the first storage device 770 is performed. The device 770 can be opened.

  Further, by using such a configuration, in the timing effect (operation effect), in order to cause all the balls stored in the first storage device 770 to enter the specific general entrance, the second frame button 22b A player who wants to enter a specific general entrance into at least one of the balls stored in the first storage device 770 can select the long-press operation. It becomes possible, and it is possible to execute the effect game according to the skill of the player.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the operation pattern of the movable valve 750 is provided with an operation scenario 3 (see FIG. 23A) in which the movable valve 750 is changed to a plurality of induction states in a short period of time. Therefore, when the long press operation is selected at the timing when the movable valve 750 executes the operation scenario 3, a large number of balls can enter the specific general entrance.

  In addition, when the frame button 22b capable of performing the long press operation is provided as described above, a notification effect indicating the timing at which the operation scenario 3 is executed may be executed. As a result, the player can select the normal operation or the long-press operation while inferring the normal operation or the long-press operation based on the content of the notification effect, and can prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

  In addition, when the frame button 22b is pressed for a long time, the first storage device 770 is controlled not to be continuously opened (released) but to be opened and closed at a specific interval. Good. In this case, the specific interval may be set based on the operation scenario (operation pattern) of the movable valve 750. Accordingly, when the first ball that has flown out based on the long press operation enters the specific general ball entering means, the remaining balls can also be flowed out at a timing at which it is easy to enter.

  As described above, in each of the embodiments described above, the storage using the storage valve variably operated between the storage state and the release state by the electric drive source is configured to store the spheres in the storage channel 700e or the storage channel 700g. Although the device is provided, a configuration other than that may be used, for example, a configuration in which spheres are stored by magnetic force may be used. In this case, a variable member that changes a magnetic substance having a magnetic force between a storage position that approaches a sphere and a release position that moves away from the sphere, or a member that generates a magnetic force when energized (a so-called electromagnet) is used, The state and the released state may be variably controlled.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, a configuration in which a ball that has flown out of the storage means (storage device) can be changed between a guiding state in which it can be guided to a specific ball entering means (specific general ball entrance 630) and a difficult state in which it is difficult to guide the ball. As an example, a movable valve 750 that is variably operated between a protruding position and a buried (retracted) position is provided in a predetermined variable pattern (operation scenario). Other configurations may be used as long as they can be changed between a guiding state in which they can be guided to the ball means and a difficult state in which they are difficult to guide, for example, a rotating body having a plurality of openings for guiding the balls. When a sphere enters a predetermined opening of the plurality of openings, the sphere is guided to the specific general entrance 630, and when a sphere enters another opening, the general The ball is not guided to the entrance 630. The rotating body may be used.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the frame button that is used to determine that the operating means has been operated by the player's pressing operation is used as the operating means that can be operated by the player. It may be used, and it is possible to determine that the player has operated the lever-like operation means that can be operated by tilting left or right or front and back, or that the player has operated by touching or approaching. A touch sensor type operation means, a wireless operation means capable of discriminating the operation by transmitting a predetermined radio wave, or the like may be used. Further, each of the movable valve 750, the storage device (the first storage device 770, the second storage device 771), the second frame button (release button) 22b (1022b, 1122b), and the third frame button (release button) 22c. A part or all of the operation control may be executed by the voice lamp control device 113 side instead of the main control device 110.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, among the balls launched by the right-handed game, the balls that flow into the inlet 700a of the board unit 700 and do not enter the variable winning device 65 and the second inlet 640 are for storage. It is configured to flow into the flow path 700e, and about one out of about 30 spheres hit by the right-handed game is structured so that one ball flows into the storage flow path 700e, but it is launched by the right-handed game. The rate at which the spheres flow into the storage channel 700e may be appropriately determined, and the configuration of the game board right side region may be appropriately changed. For example, as shown in FIG. 88, the arrangement of each component in the board unit 700 may be different from that in each of the above-described embodiments so that the ratio of the gas flowing into the storage channel 700e is high.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 88, another example of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 88 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in another example. The game board 13 in this other example and the game board 13 used in each of the above-described embodiments are different from each other in the arrangement relationship of each component in the board surface unit 700 provided in the right area of the game board, and other elements are the same. It is the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 88, in the game board 13 of this another example, right-handed by the arrangement of the nails provided above the inflow port 700a of the board unit 700 as in the game board 13 shown in FIGS. 2 and 3 described above. About 95% (about 95 balls out of 100 balls) of the balls launched into the right game area by the game flow into the inflow port 700a of the board unit 700, and about 93% of the balls that flow into the inflow port (launched by the right hit game). After passing through the through gate 67, about 90% of the hit balls flow down toward the variable winning device 65.

  When the variable winning device 65 is in the open state (open state), the ball that has flowed down toward the variable winning device 65 enters the variable winning device 65 and the variable winning device 65 is in the closed state (closed state). In the case of, it passes through the variable winning device 65 and flows down toward the electric accessory 640a.

  The ball that has reached the electric accessory 640a at the timing when the electric accessory 640a is closed flows down on the electric accessory 640a in the closed state and flows into the distribution channel 700d (see FIG. 3). An adjusting member (nail or the like) is arranged so that about 1 out of every 9 balls flows into the storage channel 700e. That is, in the configuration of the game board 13 in this another example, one out of about 10 balls that are hit in the right game area by the right hitting game, one ball flows into the storage channel 700e (that is, inside the board unit 700). (The number of balls (10 balls) less than the number of prize balls (15 balls) of the specific general ball entrance 630 (see FIG. 3)) provided in the above is set so that the balls flow into the storage channel 700e). It is configured.

  According to the game board 13 configured as described above, the ball hit to the right during the jackpot game can be efficiently put into the variable winning device 65, and the variable winning device 65 is closed during the jackpot game. Since the balls that have passed through the variable winning device 65 without efficiently entering the variable winning device 65 at the timing (interval between rounds) can be efficiently flown into the storage channel 700e, the jackpot game can be advantageously executed by the player. be able to.

  However, in the case of using the game board 13 configured as described above, by striking a ball toward the right side area of the game board during the normal game, the storage board 13 is stored as compared with the structure of the game board 13 shown in FIG. Since the spheres easily flow into the flow path 700e, there is a risk that an action of inserting the sphere into the specific general entrance 630 will be performed during the normal game.

  On the other hand, in this another example, as described above with reference to FIG. 2, since the cover member 710 is provided so that the movable state of the movable valve 750 is difficult to visually recognize from the outside, Even if a sphere is made to flow into the storage channel 700e during a game, the storage device (the first storage device 770 and the first storage device 770 and the first storage device 770) so that the sphere stored in the storage channel 700e enters the specific general ball entrance 630. It is possible to make it difficult to grasp the timing of releasing the second storage device 771). Therefore, it is possible to suppress an act of executing a game in which a ball is inserted into the specific general ball entrance 630 during a normal game and acquiring a large amount of balls.

  Further, as described above in each of the above-described embodiments, the movable valve 750 is configured to move in various operation patterns, so a game in which a ball is inserted into the specific general ball entrance 630 during a normal game can be performed. It is possible to further suppress the act of executing and acquiring a large number of balls.

  In the case of using the game board 13 configured as in this another example, if the predetermined condition is satisfied even during the normal game, the sphere stored in the storage channel 700e is the specific general entry ball. The timing (the timing at which the frame button 22 is operated) for releasing the storage device (the first storage device 770 and the second storage device 771) so as to enter the mouth 630 may be notified. Specifically, if the special symbol lottery result is out of a predetermined number of times (for example, 500 times) continuously, or if a predetermined time (for example, 3 hours) has elapsed since the game started, When a specific variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern executed by the three-symbol display device 81, or the pachinko machine 10 is provided with means (for example, a real-time clock) capable of determining the current time, and the current time is predetermined. When the time (for example, noon) is reached, timing notification for notifying the player of the above timing may be executed.

  As a result, it is possible to provide the player who has not won the jackpot of the special symbol with a game that can be advantageous to the player for a predetermined period, so that the player can win the game without winning the jackpot. It is possible to suppress getting tired. Further, the timing notification continuation period from the execution of the above-described timing notification to the end thereof may be set to be always a fixed time, or a different time may be set each time. Further, not only the passage of time as the termination condition of the timing notification but also the termination of the predetermined number (for example, 2) of balls entering the specific general entrance 630 during the period when the timing notification is being executed. It may be a condition. With this configuration, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to enter the specific general entrance 630 during the period when the timing notification is executed.

  In addition, when such timing notification is executed, since the game that is advantageous to the player becomes the right-handed game, in order to guide the right-handed game to the sub display area Ds3 of the third symbol display device 81. "Aim for the right" is displayed as the guidance display for. This guide display is set to be displayed in the sub display area Ds3 of the third symbol display device 81 from a predetermined period before the timing notification is actually executed (for example, 30 seconds before). This is a preliminary notification for the purpose of storing spheres in the storage channel 700e before the timing notification is executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the situation in which the spheres are not stored in the storage channel 700e in the state where the timing notification is executed.

  Furthermore, whether or not to execute the above-described notification for preparation is determined based on the determination result of the determination means (the storage upper limit sensor S1, the storage detection sensor S2) that determines the presence or absence of the spheres stored in the storage channel 700e. You should decide. Specifically, when the storage upper limit sensor S1 detects a sphere, it may be set so that the preparation notification is not executed. As a result, by executing the preparation notification in a state where the ball cannot be newly introduced into the storage channel 700e, it is possible to prevent the player from unnecessarily executing the right-handed game. it can. Further, the period during which this preparation notification is executed may be set appropriately, but for example, the number of balls stored in the storage channel 700e or a new inflow into the storage channel 700e (storable) The length of the preparation notification period may be variable based on the number of balls. As a result, in the state where the timing notification is executed, it is possible to prevent the situation where the balls are not stored in the storage flow path 700e, and to execute the right-handed game to the player in vain. It is possible to suppress that.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 using the configuration of this another example shown in FIG. 88, the configuration of the game board 13 in which the spheres easily flow into the storage channel 700e, specifically, The number of balls (for example, 15 balls) smaller than the number of balls (for example, 15 balls) paid out when the balls enter the specific general ball entrance 630 causes the balls to be stored in the storage channel 700e. Even if the inflowable structure is used, since the cover member 710 is provided to make it difficult to visually recognize the operating condition of the movable valve 750 from the outside, the spheres stored in the storage channel 700e are stored in the specific general inlet 630. It is possible to make it difficult to release the storage device (the first storage device 770 and the second storage device 771) at the timing of entering the ball.

  Further, in this another example, the number of balls (10 balls) less than the number of prize balls (15 balls) paid out when the balls enter the specific general ball entrance 630 is set to the storage channel 700e. Since it can be made to flow in, the ball is stored in the storage channel 700e during the normal game (that is, the variable winning device 65 is not in the open state and the electric accessory 640a is difficult to open). Even if there is no state, even if the above-mentioned timing notification is executed to store the sphere in the storage channel 700e and then the sphere enters the specific general entrance 630, a game advantageous to the player ( It is possible to provide a game in which the number of balls to be paid out is larger than the number of balls to be launched).

  As a result, it is possible to provide the player who has not won the jackpot of the special symbol with a game that can be advantageous to the player for a predetermined period, so that the player can win the game without winning the jackpot. It is possible to suppress getting tired.

  The present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from those of the above embodiments. For example, a pachinko machine that raises the expectation value for a jackpot once it hits the jackpot multiple times (for example, twice or three times) including that (commonly known as a two-time right-of-use property, a three-time right-of-use property, etc.) May be implemented as). Further, after the jackpot pattern is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine for generating a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be implemented in a pachinko machine which is in a special game state, having a winning device having a special area such as a V zone, and winning a ball in the special area is a necessary condition. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as arepaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, and game machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where the coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and by operating the stop button, the symbol is stopped and confirmed. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is that “a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information sequence including a plurality of identification information is provided, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started by the operation of the stop operating means (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses, the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed, and the stop is displayed. It becomes a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player, provided that the combination of identification information at the time is specific ".In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for confirming and displaying a symbol after variably displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols is provided, and a handle for ball launching is provided. Some of them are not. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started due to, for example, the operation of the operation lever, and due to, for example, the operation of the stop button or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the definite symbol at the time of stop is a so-called big hit symbol, and the player is caused to do so. Is a large amount of balls dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve problems such as a burden on equipment and a restriction on a place where a game machine is installed due to separate handling of a medal and a ball.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown below.

<Characteristic A group> (Stimulation of storage device release timing is suggested by the effect)
A game area where the balls can flow down, a storage means that is provided in the game area and can store the balls that have entered, and a specific entry that gives advantageous benefits to the player based on the entry of the game balls. Based on the ball means, the operation means operable by the player, and the operation on the operation means, storage control for changing the storage means from a storage state in which the ball can be stored to a release state in which the storage state is released. Means, and a first state in which a ball that has flowed out of the storage means is easily entered into the specific ball entering means by being changed to the release state by the storage control means, and the ball that has flowed out is the specific ball entering A game machine characterized by having variable means that can be changed to a second state in which it is difficult to enter the means, and variable control means that variably controls the variable means according to a predetermined variable pattern. A1.

  Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a holding device that can hold the game ball that has been launched on the game board is provided, and the game ball that is held in the hold device by the player performing the release operation is input to the ball entrance. There is one that has a configuration that allows it to flow down. (For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-95235).

  In such a conventional type gaming machine, it is possible for the player to determine the timing at which the game ball held in the holding device is made to flow down, but the player is determined according to the timing at which the game ball decided by the player is made to flow down. There is a problem that the player cannot motivate the timing of the release operation because the privilege given to the player cannot be different, and the player's motivation is lowered.

  According to the gaming machine A1, when the storage means is changed to the release state by the operation of the operation means and the outflowing ball is moved to the changing means changed to the first state, the specific entering means is entered. It is configured to be easily handled. Thereby, when the game balls are stored in the storage means, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of operating the operation means at a timing at which the variable means makes it easy to enter the specific ball entering means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the willingness to play the game is reduced.

  As the above-mentioned variable means, other than a member (for example, a movable valve) that can be variably moved between a protruding position and a buried position by driving an electric drive source, the variable means can be changed between the first state and the second state described above. It may be a rotatable body or a switching member that switches the flow path of the sphere. Further, it may be a switching member that switches the flow direction of the next ball to be flowed down by the flowed down ball without using an electric drive source.

  In the gaming machine A1, a storage unit storing a plurality of the variable patterns for variably controlling the variable unit by the variable control unit, and one variable pattern from the plurality of variable patterns stored in the storage unit. A game machine A2 having a variable pattern setting means for setting.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A1, the variable means sets and changes one variable pattern from a plurality of variable patterns. Therefore, the variable pattern is stored in the player, and the first state is stored. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress an inconvenience that becomes excessively advantageous to the player by easily targeting the timing at which

  Here, the storage means that stores a plurality of variable patterns stores a plurality of types of variable patterns that define a first period in which the variable means is in the first state and a second period in which the variable means is in the second state. Is a means of being. In this variable pattern, the minimum unit for changing the variable means may be one variable pattern, or when the same operation in the first period and the second period is performed a plurality of times in succession, the plurality of times may be used. The operation may be one variable pattern. In the former case, since one variable pattern is set for one operation of the variable means, the operation of the variable means is set in detail, and the timing when the variable means is in the first state for the player Can be difficult to grasp. Further, in the latter case described above, the execution period of one variable pattern can be lengthened, so that the frequency of setting the variable pattern can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine A2, the variable pattern setting means repeatedly sets the variable pattern in a predetermined order after power is turned on.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A2, the variable patterns after the power is turned on are repeatedly set in a predetermined order, so that one variable pattern is biasedly selected, which is advantageous. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the disadvantage that the disadvantage is biased.

  Here, after the power is turned on, it means that the power is turned on to the gaming machine and the variable operation of the variable means is executed, and the variable pattern of the variable means is set in a predetermined order. By doing so, the above-described effects are achieved.

  It should be noted that this game machine A3 is added with a process for changing the period from when the game machine is powered on until the execution of the variable operation of the variable means is started, and one variable pattern is biasedly selected. While suppressing the malfunction, the variable operation executed after a predetermined time from the power being turned on may be different. In other words, by varying (delaying) the period from when the power is turned on until the execution of the variable operation is started, for example, by 3 seconds, the variable operation is performed after a predetermined time after the power is turned on and the variable operation is performed for 3 seconds. Can be shifted (delayed). Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the time elapsed after the power is turned on from being measured, and the timing at which the variable means enters the first state from being grasped based on the measurement result. In this case, as a method of varying the variable operation executed after a predetermined time has passed since the power was turned on, in the process executed after the power is turned on, the timing to start the control for the variable operation is determined by a lottery or is determined in advance. It is conceivable that the start timings may be sequentially executed.

  Further, in the case where the setting order storage means is provided in which the order of setting the variable pattern of the variable means is predetermined, and the variable pattern is set to repeatedly execute the order stored in the setting order storage means. The variable pattern determining means may determine which variable pattern stored in the setting order storage means is set as the variable pattern to be executed first when the variable operation of the variable means is started. As a result, it is possible to change the variable operation that is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, while suppressing the problem that one variable pattern is biasedly selected.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, a suggestion effect executing means for executing an suggestion effect suggesting the operation timing of the operation means that is advantageous to the player, and a mode of the suggestion effect executed by the suggestion effect executing means are provided. A gaming machine A4, comprising: a suggestive effect mode setting means for setting based on a variable pattern executed by the variable control means.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the mode of suggestive effect is set based on the variable pattern in which the variable means is variable, so that the variation is easily executed. There is an effect that it is possible to set the execution of the suggestive effect according to the pattern.

  When the configuration of the gaming machine A4 is used, it is preferable that the player does not predict the timing when the variable means is in the first state. Specifically, it is preferable to provide a shielding member (blind member) for making it difficult to visually recognize the variable operation of the variable unit. Thereby, the player can grasp the timing when the variable means is in the first state based on the suggested effect to be executed, without directly looking at the variable means, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  Further, when the configuration of the gaming machine A2 is provided, it is difficult for the player to predict the timing when the variable means is in the first state, so that the player should pay attention to the suggested effect to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game at an early stage.

  In the gaming machine A4, the mode of the suggestive effect set by the suggestive effect mode setting means is set corresponding to each of the plurality of variable patterns. A game machine A5.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A4, the mode of the suggestive effect is set corresponding to each of the plurality of variable patterns, so that the suggestive effect that is advantageous to the player even if the variable pattern is switched. Has an effect that can be easily executed.

  In addition, as a suggestive effect that suggests the operation timing of the operation means, an effect in which the moving body is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device, and the timing when the moving body is located at a specific position matches the operation timing, or an effect It is conceivable that there is an effect in which the timing at which the voice executed as a predetermined voice coincides with the operation timing. In this case, it is advisable to use pre-production that allows the player to know that the operation timing is approaching. Specifically, it is preferable to use an effect of moving and displaying a moving body on a straight line toward a specific position at a constant speed, or an effect using a sound that counts down a number toward a specific number (for example, 0). With this, the timing of operating the operating means can be grasped in advance to some extent, and thus the operating means can be appropriately operated even when the operating timing is set only for a short period.

  On the other hand, in order to make it difficult for the player to operate the operation means at an operation timing that is advantageous, it is preferable to execute an obstruction effect different from the above-described pre-effect. As this obstructive effect, it is conceivable to execute the pre-effect at different timings. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to operate the operation means at an operation timing that is advantageous to the player.

  The gaming machine A4 or A5 has a discriminating means for discriminating the content of the variable pattern being executed by the variable control means, and the suggestive effect executing means is at a start timing based on the content discriminated by the discriminating means. A gaming machine A6, which starts the suggestive effect.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A4 or A5, the suggestive effect is started at a start timing based on the variable contents of the variable pattern that is actually being performed, so that the progress of the variable pattern is matched. There is an effect that the suggestive effect can be executed.

  Here, as the content of the variable pattern, content information indicating whether or not the variable pattern is a variable pattern advantageous to the player, content information indicating a period during which the variable means is actually in the first state, and variable Content information or the like indicating the remaining period until the pattern is switched can be considered.

  In the gaming machine A6, the varying means has a period determining means for determining a period during which the variable state is in the first state, and the suggestive effect executing means produces the suggestive effect at a timing based on the determination result of the period determining means. A gaming machine A7 characterized by being started.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A6, the suggestive effect is started at a timing based on the result of determining the period in which the game machine A6 is in the first state. Therefore, when the operation means is operated, the storage means is operated. There is an effect that the suggestive effect can be easily executed at a timing when the sphere that has flowed out of can be moved to the variable means during the period when the ball is changed to the first state.

  In any of the gaming machines A3 to A7, the operation timing of the operation means suggested by the suggestion effect is at least one ball flowing out from the storage means when the operation means is operated based on the operation timing. Is set to be movable up to the changing means that is changed to the first state. A gaming machine A8.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines A3 to A7, by operating the operating means at a timing based on the suggested effect, it is possible to easily enter the game ball into the specific ball entering means. There is an effect that the interest of operating the operating means can be further improved.

  In any of the gaming machines A2 to A8, based on the variable pattern stored in the storage means, timing specifying means for specifying the timing at which the variable means changes to the first state, and outflow from the storage means The period setting means for setting a period until the sphere reaches the variable means, and the timing obtained by subtracting the period set by the period setting means from the timing specified by the timing specifying means by the operating means. A game machine A9, characterized in that it has an operation timing setting means to be set as the operation timing of and a suggestion effect executing means to execute an effect suggesting the operation timing set by the operation timing setting means.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A2 to A8, the timing of changing to the first state is specified, and from the specified timing, the ball flowing out from the storage means reaches the changing means. It is set as a value obtained by subtracting the period until it is set as the operation timing, and the effect that suggests the operation timing is executed, so the accuracy of the effect that suggests the operation timing can be improved, and the player willingly participate in the effect. The effect is that it can be done.

  In the gaming machine A9, a measuring means for measuring a period until the ball flowing out from the storing means reaches the varying means, a measuring period measured by the measuring means, and a period set by the period setting means. A gaming machine A10, characterized in that it has a period determining means for determining, and a period correcting means for correcting the setting content of the period setting means based on the determination result of the period determining means.

  According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A9, the period until the ball actually arrives can be measured, and the set period can be corrected based on the measurement result. There is an effect that it can be further increased and the player can be actively involved in the production.

  In any of the gaming machines A4 to A10, a ball entering means provided in the game area and capable of entering a ball, and a determining means for executing a determination when the ball enters the ball entering means, It has an effect executing means for executing an effect for suggesting the determination result by the determining means, and a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game based on the determination result by the determining means being a specific determination result. The gaming machine A11 is characterized in that the suggestion effect execution means executes the suggestion effect on the basis of the result of the decision made by the decision means.

  According to the gaming machine A11, since the suggestion effect is executed based on the determination result of the determination means that determines whether or not the privilege game is executed, the player is identified as the game aiming for the privilege game. There is an effect that it is possible to associate the game with which the ball is entered to the ball entering means, and to increase the player's motivation for the game.

  Here, as the condition for executing the suggestive effect, for example, a case where the determination result of the determination means is a specific determination result in which the privilege game is executed, or a determination result in which the privilege game is not executed (so-called, deviation) is predetermined. A case where the number of times is consecutive may be considered.

  In addition, the timing at which the suggestive effect is executed may be a period before the determination result of the determination means is notified to the player, the timing at which the determination result is notified, or the determination result is the specific determination result. In this case, the privilege game may be executed after the determination result is notified. If the suggestive effect is executed during the bonus game, it is possible to allow the player to simultaneously perform the bonus game and the game in which the ball is put into the specific entry means, which is more advantageous to the player. A gaming state can be provided.

<Characteristics B group> (execution using release operation)
A game area where the balls can flow down, a storage means that is provided in the game area and can store the balls that have entered, and a specific entry that gives advantageous benefits to the player based on the entry of the game balls. Based on the ball means, the operation means operable by the player, and the operation on the operation means, storage control for changing the storage means from a storage state in which the ball can be stored to a release state in which the storage state is released. Means, and a first state in which a ball that has flowed out of the storage means is easily entered into the specific ball entering means by being changed to the release state by the storage control means, and the ball that has flowed out is the specific ball entering A game machine characterized by having variable means that can be changed to a second state in which it is difficult to enter the means, and variable control means that variably controls the variable means according to a predetermined variable pattern. B1.

  Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a holding device that can hold the game ball that has been launched on the game board is provided, and the game ball that is held in the hold device by the player performing the release operation is input to the ball entrance. There is one that has a configuration that allows it to flow down. (For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-95235).

  In such a conventional type gaming machine, it is possible for the player to determine the timing at which the game ball held in the holding device is made to flow down, but the player is determined according to the timing at which the game ball decided by the player is made to flow down. There is a problem that the player cannot motivate the timing of the release operation because the privilege given to the player cannot be different, and the player's motivation is lowered.

  According to the gaming machine B1, when the storage means is changed to the release state by the operation of the operation means and the outflowing ball is moved to the changing means which is changed to the first state, the specific entering means is entered. It is configured to be easily handled. Thereby, when the game balls are stored in the storage means, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of operating the operation means at a timing at which the variable means makes it easy to enter the specific ball entering means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the willingness to play the game is reduced.

  As the above-mentioned variable means, other than a member (for example, a movable valve) that can be variably moved between a protruding position and a buried position by driving an electric drive source, the variable means can be changed between the first state and the second state described above. It may be a rotatable body or a switching member that switches the flow path of the sphere. Further, it may be a switching member that switches the flow direction of the next ball to be flowed down by the flowed down ball without using an electric drive source.

  In the gaming machine B1, a ball entering means that is provided in the game area and into which a ball can enter, a determining means that performs a determination when the ball enters the entering means, and a determination result by the determining means The effect executing means for executing an effect for suggesting, and the privilege game executing means for executing the privilege game based on the determination result by the determining means being the specific determination result, the effect executing means The game machine B2, which executes a specific effect suggesting that it is the operation timing of the operation means when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B1, as an effect for suggesting the determination result of the determination means for determining whether or not the privilege game is executed, the operation is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Since the specific effect suggesting the operation timing of the means is executed, the bonus game or the specific effect can be given to the player based on the determination result of the determination means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's willingness to play the game can be increased.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, the storage unit has a storage determination unit that determines that the storage unit stores the sphere, and the storage determination unit determines that the storage unit stores the sphere. A gaming machine B3, which is at least one of the conditions for satisfying a predetermined condition.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B1 or B2, the specific effect is executed at least when the storage determining means determines that the sphere is stored in the storing means, so the specific effect is suggested. It is possible to suppress the situation in which the balls do not flow out from the storage means despite the operation means being operated at the operation timing. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect of production can be enhanced.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, when the effect execution means is executing an effect for suggesting the specific determination result, an effect for suggesting a determination result different from the specific determination result is produced. A gaming machine B4 characterized in that it is easier to execute the specific effect than when it is being executed.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, when the discrimination result by the discriminating means is the specific discrimination result in which the privilege game is executed, the discrimination result is other than the specific discrimination result. Since the specific effect is more easily executed than in some cases, it is possible to easily give both the bonus game and the specific effect to the player at once. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's willingness to play the game can be increased.

  In any one of the gaming machines B2 to B4, the operation timing suggested by the specific effect executed by the effect executing means is at least one ball flowing out from the storing means when the operation is executed at the operation timing. Is set to be movable up to the changing means that is changed to the second state. A gaming machine B5.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines B2 to B4, the operation timing at which at least one ball discharged from the storage means reaches the variable means changed to the second state is determined by the specific effect. Therefore, when the sphere stored in the storage means is caused to flow out from the storage means while the effect suggesting the determination result of the determination means is being executed, the sphere enters the specific ball input means. It can be suppressed.

  In any of the gaming machines B2 to B5, the effect executing means notifies the information based on the determination result by the determining means based on the operation means being operated during the period in which the specific effect is being executed. A gaming machine B6, which is for performing a notification effect.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines B2 to B5, information based on the determination result of the determining means is provided based on the operation means being operated during the period when the specific effect is being executed. Since the notification effect for notification is executed, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the notification effect. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the operation of causing the balls stored in the storage means to flow out from the storage means.

  In the gaming machines B2 to B6, an advantage suggestion effect executing means for executing an advantage suggestion effect suggesting the operation timing of the operation means that is advantageous to the player while the privilege game is being executed by the privilege game execution means. A gaming machine B7 characterized by having.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines B2 to B6, during the period during which the privilege game is being executed, the operation timing of the operation means that is advantageous to the player is suggested by the advantage suggestion effect, It is possible to increase the value of the game while the game is being executed, and to increase the player's willingness to play the game.

<Characteristic C group> (makes the operation of the movable valve difficult to see)
A ball entering means capable of entering a ball, a first state in which the ball easily enters the ball entering means, and a second state in which the ball is less likely to enter the ball entering means than the first state. The variable means that can be varied, the switching means that can switch at least a part of the variable means to a difficult state in which it is difficult to visually recognize from the outside, and an easy state in which it is easier to visually recognize than the difficult state, and the predetermined condition is satisfied In this case, the gaming machine C1 has a switching control means for switching from the difficult state to the easy state by the switching means.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, variable means is provided which is variable between an allowable position for allowing a game ball hit on a game board to enter a specific area and a restricting position for restricting the variable means. There is a system in which a ball passes through a variable area in a state in which is a permissible position so that the ball passes through a specific area and a privilege is given to a player. (For example, JP-A-2005-083161).

  In such a conventional game machine, whether or not the ball enters the specific area is determined by the timing at which the game ball shot on the game board reaches the movable means. It was possible to entertain when and when the variable means was reached. However, since it is configured so that the player can grasp the operation status of the movable means, there is a problem in that the action of causing the game ball to reach the variable means in synchronization with the timing when the movable means reaches the allowable position occurs. there were. Further, since the player can grasp the operation status of the movable means, the player's motivation for the game is lowered by the player's early detection that the launched game ball does not enter the specific entrance. There was a problem that it would end up.

  According to the gaming machine C1, it is possible to change between a first state in which the ball easily enters the ball entering means and a second state in which the ball is less likely to enter the ball entering means than the first state. At least a part of the variable state of the means can be switched between a difficult state in which it is difficult to visually recognize it from the outside and an easy state in which it is easier to see than the difficult state by the switching means, so that the player does not know the state of the variable means. The state and the state to be grasped can be set. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play a game due to the early detection by the player that the launched game ball does not enter the specific entrance. .

  In the gaming machine C1, the switching means has a shield member arranged on the front side of the variable means, and an irradiation means capable of irradiating the shield member with light of a specific color from the rear side. However, the shielding means is configured to be in the difficult state when not irradiated by the irradiation means, and to be changed to the easy state by being irradiated by the irradiation means. Characteristic game machine C2.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1, it is possible to switch between the difficult state and the easy state by the irradiation of light by the irradiation means, so that the switching means can be easily designed. .

  In the gaming machine C1, the switching means has a movable member movable between a front side position of the variable means and a retracted position retracted from the front side of the variable means, and the switching control means changes the movable member. A gaming machine C3, characterized in that it is switched to the difficult state by moving it to the front side position, and is switched to the easy state by moving the movable member to the retracted position.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1, it is possible to switch between the difficult state and the easy state by moving the movable member, so that the switching means can be easily designed. is there.

  In the gaming machine C1, the switching means includes a shielding member arranged on the front side of the variable means, an irradiating means capable of irradiating the shielding member with light, and the irradiating means for irradiating the shielding member. A variable means for varying the incident angle of the light radiated thereto, and the shielding means varies the incident angle of the light to the first angle by the varying means to the easy state. A gaming machine C4, which is configured as described above.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1, it is possible to change the shielding member to the easy state only by changing the incidence of light on the shielding member. Therefore, the switching means can be easily designed. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine C4, the variable means is a movable means for moving the shield member, and the incident angle of the light is made the first angle by moving the shield member by the movable means. A gaming machine C5 characterized by the above.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C4, by moving the shielding member, each incident of light is set to the first angle, so that the shielding member is brought into the easy state without moving the irradiation means. Since it can be changed, there is an effect that the switching means can be easily designed.

  Any one of the gaming machines C1 to C5 has a ball detecting means capable of detecting a ball flowing down toward the variable means, and the predetermined condition is satisfied when the ball detecting means detects the ball. A gaming machine C6 characterized by being present.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, when it is detected that the ball flows down toward the variable means, a predetermined condition is satisfied, so that the shielding member controls the ball. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the situation where the flow-down cannot be visually recognized.

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C6, a ball entering means which is provided in the game area and into which a ball can enter, and a judging means which executes a judgment when the ball enters the ball entering means, Effect executing means for executing an effect for suggesting the determination result by the determining means, privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game based on the determination result by the determining means being a specific determination result, and the determining means And a measuring unit for measuring the number of times of determination, wherein the measuring unit continuously determines the number of times of determination of the determination result of the determination unit other than the specific determination result by a predetermined number of times, A gaming machine C7, characterized in that the predetermined condition is met.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the shielding member can be brought into the easy state when the discrimination result of the discriminating means is a predetermined discrimination number other than the specific discrimination result. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be prevented from being extremely disadvantageous.

  In any of the gaming machines C2 to C7, with respect to either the irradiation means or the second irradiation means, based on the establishment of the second irradiation means that emits light different from the irradiation means and the first condition. Irradiation control means for executing irradiation control, and second condition satisfaction determination means for determining satisfaction of a second condition different from the first condition based on satisfaction of the first condition, The irradiation control means executes the irradiation control with respect to the irradiation means when the second condition is satisfied, and when the second condition is not satisfied, the irradiation control means performs the irradiation control with respect to the second irradiation means. On the other hand, a gaming machine C8, which executes the irradiation control.

  According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C2 to C7, based on the determination result of whether or not the second condition is satisfied when the first condition for executing the irradiation control is satisfied. Since the target for which the irradiation control is executed is different, the irradiation effect by the second irradiation means is executed even when the shielding member is not brought into the easy state, and thus the effect of the irradiation of light is reduced. There is an effect that can suppress.

  By arranging the irradiation means and the second irradiation means in the vicinity, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the effect produced by the irradiation of light. Further, when the configuration of the gaming machine C8 is used, the contents of the irradiation control by the irradiation control unit are made the same, and the switching control for switching only the output destination for executing the control to the irradiation unit and the second irradiation unit is configured to be executable. Good to do. As a result, it is possible to reduce the control load of the irradiation control means and prevent the production effect from decreasing.

<Characteristic D group> (A rhythm game is set to operate the operation means at a specific timing)
A game area where the balls can flow down, a storage means that is provided in the game area and can store the balls that have entered, and a specific entry that gives advantageous benefits to the player based on the entry of the game balls. Based on the ball means, the operation means operable by the player, and the operation on the operation means, storage control for changing the storage means from a storage state in which the ball can be stored to a release state in which the storage state is released. Means, and a first state in which a ball that has flowed out of the storage means is easily entered into the specific ball entering means by being changed to the release state by the storage control means, and the ball that has flowed out is the specific ball entering A game machine characterized by having variable means that can be changed to a second state in which it is difficult to enter the means, and variable control means that variably controls the variable means according to a predetermined variable pattern. D1.

  Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a holding device that can hold the game ball that has been launched on the game board is provided, and the game ball that is held in the hold device by the player performing the release operation is input to the ball entrance. There is one that has a configuration that allows it to flow down. (For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-95235).

  In such a conventional type gaming machine, it is possible for the player to determine the timing at which the game ball held in the holding device is made to flow down, but the player is determined according to the timing at which the game ball decided by the player is made to flow down. There is a problem that the player cannot motivate the timing of the release operation because the privilege given to the player cannot be different, and the player's motivation is lowered.

  According to the gaming machine D1, when the storage means is changed to the release state by the operation of the operation means and the outflowing ball is moved to the changing means changed to the first state, it is entered into the specific entering means. Easy to configure. Thereby, when the game balls are stored in the storage means, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of operating the operation means at a timing at which the variable means makes it easy to enter the specific ball entering means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the willingness to play the game is reduced.

  As the above-mentioned variable means, other than a member (for example, a movable valve) that can be variably moved between a protruding position and a buried position by driving an electric drive source, the variable means can be changed between the first state and the second state described above. It may be a rotatable body or a switching member that switches the flow path of the sphere. Further, it may be a switching member that switches the flow direction of the next ball to be flowed down by the flowed down ball without using an electric drive source.

  In the gaming machine D1, among the effect execution means capable of executing an operation effect whose effect mode is changed according to the operation on the operation means, and the operation effect executed by the effect execution means, the operation is performed within a specific period. And a specific timing setting means for setting a specific timing on the basis of the state of the variable means varied by the variable control means when the means is operated. A gaming machine characterized by having an operation effect setting means for setting the specific period in the operation effect based on the specific timing set by the specific timing setting means when a specific condition is satisfied. D2.

  According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effect produced by the game machine D1, the effect execution means executes an operation effect in which the effect mode is changed in accordance with the operation corresponding to the operation means, and the operation means changes during the operation effect. Since the specific period in which the effect mode is changed to the specific effect mode based on the operation can be set at the specific timing set based on the state of the variable means, the operation effect and the state of the variable means can be set. It becomes possible to relate. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can enthusiastically operate the operation means.

  In the gaming machine D2, the specific timing is a timing at which, when the operating means is operated, at least one ball flowing out from the storing means can be moved to the changing means which is changed to the first state. A gaming machine D3 characterized by being set in.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D2, the timing at which at least one ball flowing out from the storing means when the operating means is operated can be moved to the variable means in which the first state is changed to a specific timing Therefore, by operating the operation means so as to change the effect mode to the specific effect mode in the operation effect, it is possible to facilitate the ball stored in the storage means to enter the specific ball entering means. it can. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to participate in the operation effect and the player's motivation for the game can be increased.

  In the gaming machine D2 or D3, operation determining means for determining whether the operating means has been operated within the specific period, storage means for storing information updated based on the determination result of the operation determining means, and A game machine D4, comprising: frequency changing means for changing the frequency of establishment of the specific condition based on the information stored in the storage means.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D2 or D3, the frequency with which the specific condition is satisfied is varied depending on whether or not the operating means is operated within a specific period in the operation effect, so that the player Can be actively participated in the operation production. Therefore, the effect of the operation effect can be enhanced.

  In this case, it is desirable to increase the frequency with which the specific condition is satisfied as the number of times the operating means is operated increases within the specific period set during the operation effect. With this configuration, it is possible to allow the player to enthusiastically operate the operation means within a specific period, and it is possible to further enhance the effect of the operation effect.

  In any of the gaming machines D2 to D4, a second operation means different from the operation means is provided, and the operation effect executed by the effect execution means is in accordance with the operation on the operation means or the second operation means. A gaming machine D5, wherein the effect mode is variable.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines D2 to D4, it is possible to increase the number of operating means that can be operated by the operational effect, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  In any one of the gaming machines D2 to D5, the operation effect executed by the effect execution means is such that the specific period is set based on a predetermined music, and corresponds to the progress of the predetermined music. A specific period settable area storage means storing a plurality of specific period settable areas capable of setting the specific period, and the plurality of specific period settable areas stored in the specific period settable area storage means, And a matching portion discriminating unit that discriminates a portion that coincides with the specific timing, and a specific period setting unit that sets the specific period of the operation effect to the portion discriminated by the coincident portion discriminating unit. A gaming machine D6 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in the operation effect in which the specific period is set based on the music, the specific period of the operation effect is set at a position where the specific period settable area corresponding to the progress of the music matches the specific timing. Therefore, it is possible to operate the operation means at a specific timing using a specific period corresponding to the music used for the operation effect, and it is possible to further enhance the effect effect of the operation effect.

<Characteristic E group> (correct the operation effect based on the ball flow situation)
A sphere path through which the sphere can pass, a sphere passage detection means for detecting that the sphere has passed a specific position in the sphere path, and the sphere passage detection means detects the sphere after a predetermined condition is satisfied. Period setting means for setting the first period as the period until, and notification timing setting means for setting the notification timing for notifying the specific effect mode based on the first period set in the period setting means, and Performance notification means for notifying the specific performance mode at the notification timing set by the notification timing setting means, and a period specification for specifying a passage period from when the predetermined condition is satisfied until the ball passage detection means detects a ball Means, a period determining means for determining the passing period specified by the period specifying means, and the first period set by the period setting means, and the period determining means. That determination based on the result, the period duration to correct the first period set in the setting means correcting means and characterized by having a game machine E1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, in order to inform the player of the flowing state of the gaming ball in an easy-to-understand manner, there is one that executes an effect corresponding to a period during which the gaming ball flows down. The variable means is provided with a variable means that is variable between a permissible position that allows a game ball that has been launched on the production game board for a predetermined period at a specific timing to enter the specific ball entrance, and a restricting position that regulates it. In some cases, when the ball passes through the variable means in the allowed position, the ball enters the specific entrance and the privilege is given to the player. (For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-23501).

  In such a conventional type gaming machine, it is determined whether or not a ball enters the specific entrance depending on the timing at which the game ball launched on the game board reaches the movable means. It was possible to entertain at which timing the game ball reached the movable means. However, since it is configured so that the player can grasp the operation status of the movable means, there is a problem in that the action of causing the game ball to reach the variable means in synchronization with the timing when the movable means reaches the allowable position occurs. there were. Further, since the player can grasp the operation status of the movable means, the player's motivation for the game is lowered by the player's early detection that the launched game ball does not enter the specific entrance. There was a problem that it would end up.

  According to the gaming machine E1, it is possible to correct the first period referred to when the notification timing for notifying the specific effect mode is set, based on the passing period during which the ball actually passes. It is possible to easily match the situation with the execution situation of the specific effect mode. This has the effect of enhancing the effect of production.

  Here, when the configuration of the gaming machine E1 is used in a gaming machine in which an effect for suggesting whether or not a ball passes a specific ball path is executed as a specific effect mode, when the ball passes, It is possible to suppress the problem that the notification timing of the specific presentation mode is deviated, and after the sphere passes the specific sphere path, the production for suggesting that the sphere passes the specific sphere path is executed. You can

  In the gaming machine E1, the specific effect mode notified by the effect notifying means suggests that a ball passes through the specific position.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E1, the timing at which the effect suggesting that the ball passes the specific position is notified can be corrected according to the actual passing period of the ball. There is an effect that the staging effect can be further enhanced.

  In the gaming machine E1 or E2, the gaming machine E1 or E2 has a ball passage judging means for judging that the ball has passed a predetermined position on the upstream side of the specific position in the ball path, and the predetermined position is determined by the ball passage judging means. The gaming machine E3, wherein the predetermined condition is met when it is determined that the ball has passed.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E1 or E2, the notification timing preset based on the period from the passage of the ball through the predetermined position to the passage of the specific position in the ball path is set. Since the correction can be made based on the actual passing period of the sphere, there is an effect that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine E3, the case where the sphere has passed the predetermined position has been shown as the trigger for the establishment of the predetermined condition. However, as a method of determining that the sphere has passed, a means for actually detecting the passage of the sphere (for example, a proximity In addition to the method of detecting with a sensor, for example, a method of detecting that the restricting member that restricts the flow of the sphere toward the predetermined position is changed from the restricting position to the release position for canceling the restricting can be considered. In this case, even if the restricting member is changed to the release position, the sphere does not always flow down toward the predetermined position immediately.For example, if the sphere is allowed to flow down toward the predetermined position upstream of the restricting member. It is preferable to use a method of providing a staying means for staying and determining that the restricting member has changed to the release position in a state where the ball is staying in the staying means. Even if such a method is used, it is possible to indirectly determine that the ball has passed a predetermined position, and it is possible to achieve the same effect as that of the gaming machine E3.

  In the gaming machine E3, the ball path has a first ball path in which the specific position is provided and a second ball path that branches from the first ball path in a section between the predetermined position and the specific position. A gaming machine E4 characterized by being a thing.

  According to the gaming machine E3, the ball that has passed the predetermined position may pass the second ball route without passing the identification. Therefore, the player can determine which ball route the ball actually passes. There is an effect that it can be entertained and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine E4, the ball path is divided into a first state in which a ball passing through the ball path easily passes through the first ball path and a second state in which the ball easily passes through the second ball path than the first state. Whether the sphere that has passed the predetermined position can pass through the first sphere route based on the route state of the sphere route that is variable by the variability unit When the route state determination unit determines that the ball that has passed the predetermined position is in a route state in which the ball can pass the first ball route. In addition, the gaming machine E5 for notifying the specific effect mode.

  According to the gaming machine E5, when the ball is in a state where the ball can pass through the specific position, the specific effect mode is notified, so that the player is informed of the specific effect mode so that the ball passes the specific position. There is an effect that it can be expected that the effect can be enhanced.

  Further, in this case, if the predetermined first period and the period actually spent for the ball to actually pass from the predetermined position to the specific position are different, despite the notification of the specific effect mode, A problem occurs that the ball does not pass through the first ball path frequently, but according to the gaming machine E5, based on the period required for the ball to actually pass from the predetermined position to the specific position. Since the first period can be corrected, there is an effect that the reliability of the specific effect mode can be increased and the effect of the effect can be increased.

  In any one of the gaming machines E3 to E5, a second ball passage detecting means for detecting that the ball has passed a second specific position in the second ball path, and a ball passing the predetermined position. To a second pass period from when the second pass period is detected by the second sphere pass detecting unit, and the period discriminating unit includes a previous pass period and the second pass period, and A gaming machine E6, which is for determining the first period.

  According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines E3 to E5, it is possible to correct the first period by using the period required to pass through the second ball passage, and thus the first ball passage is passed. It is possible to increase the information for correcting the first period and to improve the correction accuracy, as compared with the case where the first period is corrected based on only the spheres. Therefore, there is an effect that the reliability of the specific effect mode can be increased and the effect of the effect can be increased.

  In addition, in the configuration of the gaming machine E6, the second specific position may be provided at a position that requires the same period as the time required for the ball to pass from the predetermined position to the specific position. Accordingly, it is possible to collect the information regarding the passage period identified by the period identifying unit and the information regarding the second passage period identified by the second period identifying unit without being divided, and it is possible to reduce the control load. The effect is that you can do it.

  Further, in the gaming machine E6, the period determining means uses the passing period and the second passing period, but may use only the second passing period.

<Feature F group> (making it possible to operate a plurality of operating means with the same operation)
A first operation means operable by the player, a first determination means for determining that the first operation means is operated, and a second operation means different from the first operation means operable by the player Rendering for performing a predetermined rendering based on the operating means, the second determining means for determining that the second operating means is operated, and the determination result by the first determining means or the second determining means. In a gaming machine having an executing means, an interlocking means for variably operating the second operating means in conjunction with a variable operation of the first operating means, and the interlocking means, with respect to the first operating means. Variable control means for varying the interlocking state in which the second operation means is interlocked and the released state in which the connection state is released, the variable control means is configured to operate the interlocking means when a predetermined condition is satisfied. It can also be changed to the linked state Gaming machine F1, characterized in that it.

  Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a plurality of operating means that the player can operate are provided, and an operation effect is executed based on the operation of each operating means. (For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-55481).

  In such a conventional type gaming machine, since the player performs the operation effect by operating the operation means corresponding to the effect among the plurality of operation means, the operation means of the plurality of operation means is provided to the player. Among them, it is necessary to select and operate the corresponding operation means, which causes a problem that the motivation to operate the operation means is lowered. Further, by operating one of the plurality of operating means, an effect corresponding to the operation on the one operating means is executed, and therefore, an unexpected effect is provided to the player. There was a problem that I could not do it.

  According to the gaming machine F1, when the player operates the first operating means, either the effect based on the determination result of the first determining means or the effect based on the determination result of the second determining means is executed. Therefore, it is possible to perform the same effect as when a plurality of operating means is operated by only operating one operating means, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in motivation to operate the operating means. is there.

  Further, when the first operation means is operated, since the effect based on the determination result of the second determination means can be executed, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect, and the effect There is an effect that can increase.

  In the gaming machine F1, when the first operation means is operated while the interlocking means is being changed to the interlocking state by the variable control means, the effect execution means is discriminated by the second discriminating means. A game machine F2, characterized in that the predetermined effect is executed based on a result.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F1, by changing the interlocking means to the interlocked state, an effect based on the discrimination result of the second discriminating means is executed when the first operating means is operated. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect and to enhance the effect of the effect.

  In the gaming machine F2, the first operating means and the second operating means are configured to be movable from the first position to the second position, and the first determining means and the second determining means are The first operation means or the second operation means corresponding to each is determined to be moved to the second position, and the first operation means is moved from the first position to the second position. A gaming machine F3 characterized in that a distance for moving the second operating means from the first position to the second position is shorter than a distance for moving the second operating means.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F2, the second operating means shortens the distance until it is determined that the second operating means has operated, so that the interlocking means is provided. In the interlocked state, it is possible to surely execute the effect based on the determination result of the second determining means when the first operating means is operated. Therefore, there is an effect that an unexpected effect can be executed with a simple configuration.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the interlocking means is provided inside the gaming machine that is difficult to be visually recognized from the outside.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, since the interlocking means is provided at a position where it is difficult to visually recognize from the outside, it is difficult for the player to grasp the state of the interlocking means. You can Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect and to enhance the effect of the effect.

  In any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, a game area in which a ball can flow down, a storage means provided in the game area and capable of storing a ball that has entered, and a player based on entering a game ball Based on an operation on the specific ball-in means with which an advantageous advantage is given and the second operation means, the storage means is changed from a storage state in which the balls can be stored to a release state in which the storage state is released. The storage control means, a first state in which a sphere that has flowed out of the storage means is easy to enter the specific ball entering means by being changed to the release state by the storage control means, and the outflowing ball is the specific state. A game machine F5, characterized in that the game machine F5 has variable means that can be changed into a second state in which it is difficult to enter the ball.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines F1 to F4, when the first operating means is operated, the storage control means may change from the stored state to the released state. On the other hand, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a surprising game and enhance the effect of production.

  In the gaming machine F5, a timing setting means for setting the operation timing of the second operating means that makes it easy for a ball flowing out from the storage means to enter the specific ball entering means, and an operation timing set by the timing setting means. A game machine F6 characterized by comprising: an operation effect executing means for executing an operation effect for operating the first operation means based on the above.

  According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F5, by operating the first operating means in accordance with the operation effect of operating the first operating means, it is possible to enter the ball into the specific ball entering means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can enthusiastically participate in the operation effect.

  In the gaming machine F6, the operation effect is an effect in which the operation timing for operating the first operation means is informed a plurality of times, and at least one of the operation timings informed a plurality of times is the timing setting means. A gaming machine F7 characterized in that the operation timing is set by.

  According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F6, any one of the plurality of operation timing notifications executed during the operation effect can be used as the second operation means for easily entering the specific ball entering means. Since it is possible to indicate the operation timing, it is possible to operate the first operation means for all of the plurality of operation timings executed during the operation effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect of production can be enhanced.

<Characteristic G group> (Preliminary notification of the advantageous state of the movable valve)
A game area where the balls can flow down, a storage means that is provided in the game area and can store the balls that have entered, and a specific entry that gives advantageous benefits to the player based on the entry of the game balls. Based on the ball means, the operation means operable by the player, and the operation on the operation means, storage control for changing the storage means from a storage state in which the ball can be stored to a release state in which the storage state is released. Means, and a first state in which a ball that has flowed out of the storage means is easily entered into the specific ball entering means by being changed to the release state by the storage control means, and the ball that has flowed out is the specific ball entering A game machine characterized by having variable means that can be changed to a second state in which it is difficult to enter the means, and variable control means that variably controls the variable means according to a predetermined variable pattern. G1.

  Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a holding device that can hold the game ball that has been launched on the game board is provided, and the game ball that is held in the hold device by the player performing the release operation is input to the ball entrance. There is one that has a configuration that allows it to flow down. (For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-95235).

  In such a conventional type gaming machine, it is possible for the player to determine the timing at which the game ball held in the holding device is made to flow down, but the player is determined according to the timing at which the game ball decided by the player is made to flow down. There is a problem that the player cannot motivate the timing of the release operation because the privilege given to the player cannot be different, and the player's motivation is lowered.

  According to the gaming machine G1, when the storage means is changed to the release state by the operation of the operation means and the outflowing ball is moved to the changing means which is changed to the first state, the specific entering means is entered. It is configured to be easily handled. Thereby, when the game balls are stored in the storage means, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of operating the operation means at a timing at which the variable means makes it easy to enter the specific ball entering means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the willingness to play the game is reduced.

  As the above-mentioned variable means, other than a member (for example, a movable valve) that can be variably moved between a protruding position and a buried position by driving an electric drive source, the variable means can be changed between the first state and the second state described above. It may be a rotatable body or a switching member that switches the flow path of the sphere. Further, it may be a switching member that switches the flow direction of the next ball to be flowed down by the flowed down ball without using an electric drive source.

  In the gaming machine G1, in the variable pattern in which the variable means is variably controlled by the variable control means, at least a first period in which the variable means is likely to be in the first state, and the variable means more than the first period. Has a second period that is unlikely to be in the first state, and a period determination unit that determines the timing at which the first period is set as the variable control of the variable unit by the variable control unit, and the period determination unit. And a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect when the timing for setting the first period is determined by the gaming machine G2.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G1, by executing the specific effect, the player is made to understand that the first period in which the variable means is likely to be in the first state is set. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can enthusiastically play the game.

  In the gaming machine G2, when a predetermined condition is established, the gaming machine G2 has an advantage suggestion effect executing means for executing an advantage suggestion effect suggesting the operation timing of the operation means which is advantageous to the player, and the specific effect execution means, A gaming machine G3, wherein the specific effect is executed during a period from when the predetermined condition is satisfied to when the advantageous suggestion effect is executed.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G2, it is possible to inform the player that the present advantageous suggestion effect may be executed during the first period, so that the player can be notified. There is an effect that a game can be motivated.

  In the gaming machine G3, the specific effect executing means executes the specific effect when the first period is set within a period in which the advantageous suggestion effect is executed. Machine G4.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G3, it is possible to notify the player that the present advantageous suggestion effect will be executed during the first period, so that the player is more willing to play the game. The effect is that it can be done.

  In any of the gaming machines G2 to G4, the storage means has a storage determination means for determining that the storage means is storing a ball, and the specific effect execution means is at least the storage determination means causes the storage means to be a sphere. A gaming machine G5, which is capable of executing the specific effect when it is determined that the game is stored.

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines G2 to G4, the specific effect is executed only when the balls are stored in the storing means, so that the player can positively operate the operating means. Can be operated. Moreover, since the specific effect is prohibited from being executed in a state where the balls are not stored in the storage means, the specific effect is unnecessarily executed, and the player recognizes the variable pattern of the variable member. This has the effect of suppressing this.

  In any of the gaming machines G2 to G5, a ball entering means provided in the game area and capable of entering a ball, and a determining means for executing a determination when the ball enters the ball entering means, It has an effect executing means for executing an effect for suggesting the determination result by the determining means, and a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game based on the determination result by the determining means being a specific determination result. The gaming machine G6 is characterized in that the specific effect executing means executes, as the specific effect, a specific fusion effect which also notifies that the determination result by the determining means is the specific determination result.

  According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines G2 to G5, it is possible to execute an effect that fuses the fact that the privilege game is executed and the fact that the first period is set, and thus is more advantageous to the player. It is possible to inform that a different gaming state is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game while having a sense of expectation.

  In any of the gaming machines G2 to G6, the specific effect execution means changes the notification mode for notifying the operation timing of the operation means that is advantageous to the player suggested during the advantage suggestion effect to the specific notification mode. A gaming machine G7 characterized by being a thing.

  According to the gaming machine G7, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines G2 to G6, it is possible to inform the player that the first period is set by the notification mode during the suggestion suggestion effect, and thus the effect of the effect. There is an effect that can increase.

<Characteristic H group> (allowing selection of difficulty level for suggesting cancellation)
A game area where the balls can flow down, a storage means that is provided in the game area and can store the balls that have entered, and a specific entry that gives advantageous benefits to the player based on the entry of the game balls. Based on the ball means, the operation means operable by the player, and the operation on the operation means, storage control for changing the storage means from a storage state in which the ball can be stored to a release state in which the storage state is released. Means, and a first state in which a ball that has flowed out of the storage means is easily entered into the specific ball entering means by being changed to the release state by the storage control means, and the ball that has flowed out is the specific ball entering A game machine characterized by having variable means that can be changed to a second state in which it is difficult to enter the means, and variable control means that variably controls the variable means according to a predetermined variable pattern. H1.

  Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a holding device that can hold the game ball that has been launched on the game board is provided, and the game ball that is held in the hold device by the player performing the release operation is input to the ball entrance. There is one that has a configuration that allows it to flow down. (For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-95235).

  In such a conventional type gaming machine, it is possible for the player to determine the timing at which the game ball held in the holding device is made to flow down, but the player is determined according to the timing at which the game ball decided by the player is made to flow down. There is a problem that the player cannot motivate the timing of the release operation because the privilege given to the player cannot be different, and the player's motivation is lowered.

  According to the gaming machine H1, when the storage means is changed to the release state by the operation of the operation means and the outflowing ball is moved to the changing means changed to the first state, it is entered into the specific entering means. Easy to configure. Thereby, when the game balls are stored in the storage means, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of operating the operation means at a timing at which the variable means makes it easy to enter the specific ball entering means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the willingness to play the game is reduced.

  As the above-mentioned variable means, other than a member (for example, a movable valve) that can be variably moved between a protruding position and a buried position by driving an electric drive source, the variable means can be changed between the first state and the second state described above. It may be a rotatable body or a switching member that switches the flow path of the sphere. Further, it may be a switching member that switches the flow direction of the next ball to be flowed down by the flowed down ball without using an electric drive source.

  Advantageous suggestion effect executing means for executing an advantageous suggestion effect suggesting the operation timing of the operation means, which is advantageous to the player, on the basis of the variable pattern of the variable means executed by the variable control means in the gaming machine H1. , A selection means capable of selecting the effect mode of the advantage suggestion effect executed by the advantage suggestion effect execution means, and an effect for setting the effect mode of the advantage suggestion effect based on the effect mode selected by the selection means A mode setting means, and a gaming machine H2.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H1, the advantage suggestion effect is executed in the effect mode selected by the player, so that the advantage suggestion effect can be executed in the effect mode desired by the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the staging effect can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine H2, the advantage suggestion effect executed by the advantage suggestion effect executing means is capable of suggesting the operation timing of the operation means, which is advantageous to the player, a plurality of times, and the effect mode setting means, Based on the effect mode selected by the selecting means, the suggestion number setting means for setting the suggestion number of the advantage suggesting effect, and the suggestion suggesting effect based on the suggestion number set by the suggestion number setting means. A gaming machine H3 comprising: a suggestion mode setting means for setting a suggestion mode.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H2, the suggestion frequency and suggestion mode of the advantageous suggestive effect are set based on the effect mode selected by the selection means, and thus the player is motivated. There is an effect that the selection means can be selected.

  In the gaming machine H3, when the suggestion number is set to be a predetermined number or more by the suggestion number setting means, the suggestion mode set by the suggestion mode setting means is set from the first mode in which the player can visually recognize the suggestion mode. Also, the gaming machine H4 is characterized in that the second mode, which is more difficult to visually recognize than the first mode, is set easily.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H3, when the selecting means selects a performance mode in which a large number of suggestion times are set, the operating means is operated at an operation timing of the operating means that is advantageous to the player. The second mode in which it is difficult to operate is set. As a result, is it possible to select an effect mode corresponding to the suggestion number less than the predetermined number of times for the player and execute the advantageous suggestion effect in which the first mode is easily set. It is possible to select the effect mode corresponding to the suggestion number of times greater than or equal to the predetermined number and select whether to execute the advantageous suggestion effect in which the second mode is easily set. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can select an advantageous suggestion effect according to his / her skill and can participate in the effect eagerly.

  In the gaming machine H3 or H4, when the suggestion number is set to a predetermined number or more by the suggestion number setting means, the suggestion mode setting means is set to be more than when the suggestion number is set to be less than the predetermined number. The gaming machine H5 is characterized by facilitating setting of a short interval as the interval at which the suggestion mode is set.

  According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H3 or H4, when the effect mode in which a large number of suggestion times is set is selected by the selecting means, an inspiratory mode in which a suggestion number less than a predetermined number is set Since it is easier to set a shorter interval as the interval for setting the suggestion mode than when is selected, the player can select an advantageous suggestion effect according to his / her skill, and participate in the effect eagerly. The effect is that it can be done.

  In any of the gaming machines H3 to H5, the operation content determination means for determining the operation content of the operation means and the operation content determined by the operation content determination means while the advantageous suggestion effect is being executed, A gaming machine H6, characterized in that, when a predetermined operation condition is satisfied, there is a production mode changing means for changing the production mode of the advantageous suggestion production to a special production mode advantageous to the player.

  According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines H3 to H5, the special suggestion mode in which the effect mode of the advantageous suggestion effect is advantageous to the player is based on the operation content of the operation means in the advantageous suggestion effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can operate the operation means eagerly.

  In the gaming machine H6, the operation content determination means determines the number of times the operation means has been operated at the operation timing of the operation means that is advantageous to the player. The gaming machine H7 characterized in that, when the number of operations reaches the predetermined number, the effect mode changing means changes the effect mode of the advantageous suggestion effect to the special effect mode.

  According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H6, it is possible to change the effect mode of the advantage suggestion effect to a special effect mode that is advantageous to the player, based on the number of times the operating means is operated at an appropriate timing. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can operate the operation means more enthusiastically.

<Feature group I> (Valve operation monitoring on the sub side)
A game area where the balls can flow down, a storage means that is provided in the game area and can store the balls that have entered, and a specific entry that gives advantageous benefits to the player based on the entry of the game balls. Based on the ball means, the operation means operable by the player, and the operation on the operation means, storage control for changing the storage means from a storage state in which the ball can be stored to a release state in which the storage state is released. Means, and a first state in which a ball that has flowed out of the storage means is easily entered into the specific ball entering means by being changed to the release state by the storage control means, and the ball that has flowed out is the specific ball entering A game machine characterized by having variable means that can be changed to a second state in which it is difficult to enter the means, and variable control means that variably controls the variable means according to a predetermined variable pattern. I1.

  Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a holding device that can hold the game ball that has been launched on the game board is provided, and the game ball that is held in the hold device by the player performing the release operation is input to the ball entrance. There is one that has a configuration that allows it to flow down. (For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-95235). In such a conventional type gaming machine, it is possible for the player to determine the timing at which the game ball held in the holding device is made to flow down, but the player is determined according to the timing at which the game ball decided by the player is made to flow down. There is a problem that the player cannot motivate the timing of the release operation because the privilege given to the player cannot be different, and the player's motivation is lowered.

  According to the gaming machine I1, when the storage means is changed to the release state by the operation of the operation means and the outflowing ball is moved to the changing means which is changed to the first state, it is entered into the specific entering means. Easy to configure. Thereby, when the game balls are stored in the storage means, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of operating the operation means at a timing at which the variable means makes it easy to enter the specific ball entering means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the willingness to play the game is reduced.

  As the above-mentioned variable means, other than a member (for example, a movable valve) that can be variably moved between a protruding position and a buried position by driving an electric drive source, the variable means can be changed between the first state and the second state described above. It may be a rotatable body or a switching member that switches the flow path of the sphere. Further, it may be a switching member that switches the flow direction of the next ball to be flowed down by the flowed down ball without using an electric drive source.

  The gaming machine I1 has main control means for executing game control, and sub-control means for executing game control based on a control signal from the main control means. Storage control means, the variable control means, and variable control information generating means for generating variable control information for notifying the slave control means of the control content of the variable control means. A display means for executing a predetermined effect, a variable information storage means for storing variable information corresponding to a predetermined variable pattern in which the variable means is variably controlled, and the variable information storage means for outputting from the main control means. Based on the variable control information, using the variable information stored in the variable information storage means, the variable control status specifying means for specifying the variable control status of the variable means and the variable control status specifying means Based on the variable control situation that has been set, there is provided an effect setting means for setting an effect to be displayed on the display means, and an effect executing means for executing the effect set by the effect setting means. Characteristic game machine I2.

  According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine I1, the sub-control means is output from the main control means when executing an effect based on the variable status of the variable means which is variably controlled by the main control means. Since the effect is executed based on the variable control information and the variable information stored in the variable information storage means of the slave control means, the control load of the main control means can be reduced. .

  In the gaming machine I2, the variable control information generation means includes at least start timing information for starting a variable operation of the variable means in the variable control information that is first generated after the power of the gaming machine is turned on. A gaming machine I3 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine I2, start timing information for starting the variable operation of the variable means is included in the variable control information that is first generated after the gaming machine is powered on. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the accuracy of specifying the variable control status by the secondary control unit.

  In the gaming machine I3, the main control means has an operation start period setting means capable of setting a different period as an operation start period from when the gaming machine is powered on until the variable operation of the varying means is started. A gaming machine I4 characterized by being a thing.

  According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine I3, it is possible to change the period from when the gaming machine is powered on until the variable operation of the variable means is started, so that the variable means It is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping the variable motion of.

  In the gaming machines I2 to I4, the main control means is a storage means in which a plurality of the variable patterns for variably controlling the variable means by the variable control means are stored, and when the power is turned on to the gaming machine. And an initial variable pattern setting means for setting a variable pattern to be executed first from the plurality of variable patterns, wherein the variable control means preliminarily stores the plurality of variable patterns stored in the storage means. The variable control information generating means is repeatedly executed in a predetermined order, and the variable control information generating means is set at least by the initial variable pattern setting means in the variable control information to be generated first after the game machine is powered on. A gaming machine I5, which includes initial variable pattern setting information.

  According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines I2 to I4, even if the variable means is variably controlled so that a plurality of variable patterns are repeatedly executed in a predetermined order, When the power is turned on, the variable pattern to be executed first can be set from a plurality of variable patterns, so that it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping the variable operation of the variable means. The effect is that you can do it. Further, since the variable means is variably controlled so that the plurality of variable patterns are repeatedly executed in a predetermined order, there is an effect that the processing load of the variable control can be reduced.

<Characteristic J group> (In the operation effect of operating the operation means a predetermined number of times, the player can select the operation interval)
A game area where the balls can flow down, a storage means that is provided in the game area and can store the balls that have entered, and a specific entry that gives advantageous benefits to the player based on the entry of the game balls. Based on the ball means, the operation means operable by the player, and the operation on the operation means, storage control for changing the storage means from a storage state in which the ball can be stored to a release state in which the storage state is released. Means, and a first state in which a ball that has flowed out of the storage means is easily entered into the specific ball entering means by being changed to the release state by the storage control means, and the ball that has flowed out is the specific ball entering A game machine characterized by having variable means that can be changed to a second state in which it is difficult to enter the means, and variable control means that variably controls the variable means according to a predetermined variable pattern. J1.

  Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a holding device that can hold the game ball that has been launched on the game board is provided, and the game ball that is held in the hold device by the player performing the release operation is input to the ball entrance. There is one that has a configuration that allows it to flow down. (For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-95235).

  In such a conventional type gaming machine, it is possible for the player to determine the timing at which the game ball held in the holding device is made to flow down, but the player is determined according to the timing at which the game ball decided by the player is made to flow down. There is a problem that the player cannot motivate the timing of the release operation because the privilege given to the player cannot be different, and the player's motivation is lowered.

  According to the gaming machine J1, when the storage means is changed to the release state by the operation of the operation means and the outflowing ball is moved to the changing means which is changed to the first state, it is entered into the specific entering means. Easy to configure. Thereby, when the game balls are stored in the storage means, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of operating the operation means at a timing at which the variable means makes it easy to enter the specific ball entering means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the willingness to play the game is reduced.

  As the above-mentioned variable means, other than a member (for example, a movable valve) that can be variably moved between a protruding position and a buried position by driving an electric drive source, the variable means can be changed between the first state and the second state described above. It may be a rotatable body or a switching member that switches the flow path of the sphere. Further, it may be a switching member that switches the flow direction of the next ball to be flowed down by the flowed down ball without using an electric drive source.

  Advantageous suggestion effect executing means for executing an advantageous suggestion effect suggesting the operation timing of the operation means, which is advantageous to the player, based on the variable pattern of the variable means executed by the variable control means in the gaming machine J1. , A selection means capable of selecting the effect mode of the advantage suggestion effect executed by the advantage suggestion effect execution means, and an effect for setting the effect mode of the advantage suggestion effect based on the effect mode selected by the selection means A mode setting means, and a gaming machine J2.

  According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine J1, the advantage suggestion effect is executed in the effect mode selected by the player, so that the advantage suggestion effect can be executed in the effect mode desired by the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the staging effect can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine J2, the advantage suggestion effect executed by the advantage suggestion effect executing means is to notify the operation timing of the operation means at a predetermined interval, and is a notification interval at which the operation timing of the operation means is notified. , And an interval setting means capable of setting a first interval and a second interval having a notification interval shorter than the first interval, and the selection means is at least the first mode as the effect mode of the advantageous suggestion effect. A gaming machine J3, characterized in that a first effect mode corresponding to the interval and a second effect mode corresponding to the second interval can be selected.

  The gaming machine J3 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J2. That is, the length of the notification interval at which the operation timing of the operation means is notified can be changed by selecting the effect mode of the advantageous suggestion effect by the selection means. As a result, the player can select an effect mode corresponding to the operation interval according to his skill, and thus can actively participate in the effect using the operation means. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect of production can be enhanced.

  The gaming machine J3 has display means for displaying the advantageous suggestion effect and selection display control means for causing the display means to display a plurality of the effect modes selectable by the selecting means as selection screens. The display control means causes the display means to display the notification intervals corresponding to the plurality of selectable presentation modes, and the gaming machine J4.

  The gaming machine J4 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J3. That is, it is possible to select one effect mode from the plurality of effect modes displayed on the display device by the selecting device after grasping the notification interval at which the operation timing of the operation device is notified. As a result, the player can easily select the effect mode in which the operation timing is notified at the intended notification interval, so that an easy-to-understand game can be provided and the interest of the game can be increased. is there.

  In the gaming machine J4, the selection display control means displays number-of-times information indicating the number of times the operation timing of the operating means is notified, in correspondence with the plurality of effect modes. J5.

  According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J4, the following effects are produced. That is, it is possible to select one effect mode from the plurality of effect modes displayed on the display means by the selection means after grasping the number of times the operation means should be operated. Thereby, when the number of operations is small, the notification interval for notifying the operation timing of the operation means is shortened, and when the number of operations is large, the notification interval for notifying the operation timing of the operation means is lengthened. It is possible to easily select a combined presentation mode. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can enthusiastically participate in the game.

  The gaming machine Z1 according to any one of the above gaming machines, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is started due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the confirmed identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, etc. are typical examples of the game medium.

  The gaming machine Z2 according to any one of the above gaming machines, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, which shoots a ball to a predetermined game area in response to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is operated at an operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), there is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to make it possible to win a ball, and the value depending on the number of winning prizes. The value (including not only the gift ball but also the data to be written on the magnetic card, etc.) is given.

The gaming machine Z3 according to any one of the above gaming machines, wherein the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the fused game machine is "provided with a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying the identification information sequence including a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. It is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and a ball is used as a game medium, and the identification information is also provided. The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display of, and a large number of balls are paid out when a special game state occurs.
<Other>
In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a holding device that can hold a game ball that has been launched on a game board is provided, and the player performs a release operation to cause the game ball held in the holding device to flow down to a ball entrance. Some have configurations. In this conventional type gaming machine, the player can determine the timing of letting down the game ball held in the holding device. In this way, the interest was improved (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-95235).
However, there is a need for further interest.
The present technical idea has been made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a player in playing a game.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the game machine of the technical idea 1 has a game area in which balls can flow down, a storage means provided in the game area and capable of storing the balls entered, and the game balls enter. Based on that, a specific ball entering means for giving a benefit to the player, an operating means operable by the player, and a storage state in which the balls can be stored in the storing means based on an operation on the operating means. From the above, the storage control means for changing the storage state to the release state, and the spheres flowing out of the storage means by the storage control means being changed to the release state enter the specific entering means. A first state that is easy to perform, and a second state that the outflowing ball is difficult to enter the specific ball entering means, and a variable means that variably controls the variable means according to a predetermined variable pattern. Having control means, A.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, in which the main control means for executing the control of the game and the sub-control for executing the control of the game based on the control signal from the main control means. Means for controlling the storage control means, the variable control means, and variable control information for generating variable control information for notifying the slave control means of the control content of the variable control means. Information generating means, wherein the sub-control means is a display means for executing a predetermined effect, and a variable in which variable information corresponding to a predetermined variable pattern for variably controlling the variable means is stored. A variable control status that specifies the variable control status of the variable means using the variable information stored in the variable information storage means based on the variable control information output from the information storage means and the main control means. Identification means , Effect setting means for setting an effect to be displayed on the display means based on the variable control status specified by the variable control status specifying means, and effect execution for executing the effect set by the effect setting means And means.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 2, wherein the variable control information generating means includes at least the variable control information in the variable control information which is first generated after the power of the gaming machine is turned on. It includes start timing information for starting the variable operation of the means.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 4 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 3, wherein the main control means is an operation start period from when the power of the gaming machine is turned on to when the variable operation of the varying means is started. The operation start period setting means can set different periods.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of the technical ideas 2 to 4, wherein the main control means is a plurality of the variable patterns for variably controlling the variable means by the variable control means. And a variable means for setting a variable pattern to be executed first when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, from the plurality of variable patterns. The control means repeatedly executes the plurality of variable patterns stored in the storage means in a predetermined order, and the variable control information generation means is first generated after the power of the gaming machine is turned on. The variable control information to be set includes at least the initial variable pattern setting information set by the initial variable pattern setting means.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, based on the game area in which the ball can flow down, the storage means provided in the game area and capable of storing the ball that has entered, and the game ball entering the ball. Based on a specific ball-in means for giving a bonus to the player, an operation means operable by the player, and a storage state in which the storage means is capable of storing balls based on an operation on the operation means, A storage control unit that changes the state to a release state, and a ball that has flowed out of the storage unit and easily enters the specific ball entering unit by being changed to the release state by the storage control unit. A variable state that is variable between a state and a second state in which the flowed-out ball is hard to enter the specific ball-in means, and a variable control means that variably controls the variable means in accordance with a predetermined variable pattern, Is to have.
As a result, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the following effect is achieved. That is, it has a main control means for executing the control of the game, and a sub-control means for executing the control of the game based on a control signal from the main control means, wherein the main control means is the storage control means. And variable control information generating means for generating variable control information for notifying the slave control means of the control content of the variable control means. Display means for performing an effect, variable information storage means for storing variable information corresponding to a predetermined variable pattern in which the variable means is variably controlled, and the variable control information output from the main control means. Based on the variable information stored in the variable information storage means, the variable control status specifying means for specifying the variable control status of the variable means, and the variable control status specified by the variable control status specifying means. Based on the situation, the effect setting means for setting an effect to be displayed on said display means, and has a presentation execution means for executing said effect set by the rendering setup means.
This has the effect of reducing the control load of the main control means.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, the following effect is achieved. That is, the variable control information generation means includes at least start timing information for starting the variable operation of the variable means in the variable control information generated first after the power is turned on to the gaming machine.
As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the accuracy of specifying the variable control status by the slave control means.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the main control means has an operation start period setting means capable of setting a different period as an operation start period from when the gaming machine is powered on until the variable operation of the variable means is started. .
As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping the variable operation of the variable means.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 5, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine described in any of the technical ideas 2 to 4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the main control means first executes the storage means in which the plurality of variable patterns for variably controlling the variable means by the variable control means are stored, and when the gaming machine is powered on. Initial variable pattern setting means for setting a variable pattern from the plurality of variable patterns, wherein the variable control means stores the plurality of variable patterns stored in the storage means in a predetermined order. The variable control information generating means is repeatedly executed, and at least the initial variable pattern setting means set by the initial variable pattern setting means is included in the variable control information generated first after the power is turned on to the gaming machine. It contains information.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping the variable operation of the variable means.

10 Pachinko machines (gaming machines)
6 30 Specific general entrance (specific entrance means)
770 First storage device (part of means)
771 Second storage device (part of means)
750 movable valve (variable means)
S1008 control means S1009 variable control means
S 2111 production execution means , suggestion production execution means

Claims (2)

A game area where game balls can flow down,
A first state in which a game ball flowing down in the game area can be positioned at a first position so as not to flow down to a specific flow path at a predetermined timing, and a game ball positioned at the first position is described above. A second state capable of flowing out to a specific flow path, and a variable means,
In a gaming machine having a specific entry means for giving a privilege advantageous to the player based on the entry of the game ball ,
An operation means that can be operated by the player,
The means is changed from the first state to the second state based on the establishment of a second condition that can be established in association with the establishment of the first condition that is established based on the operation of the operation means. Control means,
The control means changes the means from the first state to the second state, whereby the game ball flowing down the specific flow path is in a third state where it is easy to enter the specific ball entering means, A variable means capable of changing to a fourth state in which it is more difficult to enter the specific ball entering means than the third state,
Variable control means for variably controlling the variable means from a predetermined operation start timing in accordance with a variable pattern in which the variable timing is defined in advance;
A suggestive effect for indicating that the variable means is changed to the third state by the variable control means can be executed a predetermined period before a specific timing when the variable means is changed to the third state. And a suggestive production execution means,
The control means includes a first control in which a period during which the means is in the second state is a first period, and a second control in which a second period is a period in which the second state is longer than the first control. , Ri executable der the,
The gaming machine makes it easier for a player to visually recognize at least a part of the specific flow path in a state where the game ball can flow down the specific flow path than in a state where the game ball cannot flow down the specific flow path. A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible .   The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising display means for displaying the suggestive effect.

Images